C^s 2H53
George Washington Flowers
Memorial Collection _
DUKE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY
ESTABLISHED BY THE
FAMILY OF
COLONEL FLOWERS
* ?
/ /
THE
SOLDIER'S COMPANION:
CONTAINING
AN ABRIDGEMENT OF HARDEE'S INFAN-
TRY TACTICS ;
WITH THE
HEAVY IXFANTRY AXD RIFLE MANUALS,
SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAYONET EXERCISE, FIELD
FORTIFICATION,
PICKET AND OUTPOSTDUTY,
WITH VARIOCS REGULATIONS, FORMS, 40., THAT WILL BS
FOUND USEFUL TO THE SOLDIER IN CAMP
AND ON THE MARCH ;
WITH AN APPENDIX CONTAINIXG .
FANCY MOVEiMENTS FOR VOLUNTEER COMPANIES,
UNIFORM AND 1)RES3 OF THE ARMY, &0.
By Capt. GEO. C. LEWIS,
PROVIS10NA.L ARMY OF THE CONFEDERATE STATES.
RALEIGH, N. C. :
JOHN SPEfiMAN, PRINTICR, OFFICE STATE JOURNAL.
1803.
Entered according to Act of Congress, in the year 1862.
By Capt. GEO. C. LEWIS,
In the Clerk's Office of the District Court of the Confed-
erate States, for the District of Pamlico,
!^fo^th Carolina.
TO THE
OFFICERS AND SOLDIERS
OF THB
NORTH CxVKOLTNA TROOPS,
THIS LITTLE VOLUME 13 AFFECTION'ATELT AXl) IIESFKOTFCLLT
INSCRIBED.
340901
PREFACE.
The following paj^es of this Uttle votunie hare been pre-
pared and compiled by the undersigned, with the view of
supplying what he believes to be an important want of the
Officers and Soldiers, constituting^ the army of the Con-
federate States. It embracoB an abridgment of Harder's
Infantry TAorics, with the Heavy Infantry and Riflo
Manuals, adapted to the use of either the Percussion Mus-
ket or the Enfield Rifle; also the Skirmish Drill and Bayo-
onet Exercise, and a Sysopsis of Field Fortification,
Picket and Outpost Ddtt, and the Regulations as to
Parade?, Reviews, Inspections, Guard-moKntings, Ac.
It contains nvany suggestions that the practical soldier
needs in camp and on the march, with various forms that
are essentially necessary in a work ot this kind, such as
guard-repoftSjIofhcers and soldiers, pay accotints, fur-r
loughs, leaves of absence, &c.
It has been the object of the compiler, in the prepara-
tion of this work, to embrace as much as possible in the
emalieit limit, as he knows from experience how inconve-
nient it is, in an active campaign, for an officer or soldier
to be lugging around several works, when all that he need*
might easily be combined in on«.
TVyETXCZ.
Under the head of Firxn Fortification, the author hi's
introduced only so much as will enable the inexperienced
foldier, in case of necessity, to throw up temporary breast-
works for the protection of his men, or to enable them the
better to hold some important point to which they may
have been assigned. In a war like the one at present
waged between the Confederate and United States, where
there is such an extented frontier, it is very essential that
every soldier, and especially every officer, should knoiv
something of field fortification.
During the winter campaign of 1861 and 1862, on the
Potomac, and more recently when the City of Richmond
was beseiged b}' the enemy, the compiler paw many in-
stances where young and inexperienced officers, were by
force of circumstances, placed in positions that rendered it
exceedingly necessary that they should.have a knowledge
of entrenching and erecting temporary breastworks.
In the appendix will be found the regulations as pre-
scribed by the War Department for the dress and uniform
of the army ; also^ some movements that are intended prin-
cipally for volunteer companies in times of peace on their
public parades. They were translated from a French work
written by M. DuPre' and were used by the compiler
previous to the war.
The undersigned presents tl is little volume to his fellow
soldiers, with the knowledge that it contains many defics-
encies, but assures them that none but official works and
those most in repute have been coniulted in the selection
of its contents.
It was prepared during the long weary hours when the
author wsiB confined to bis room from disease contracted
in cttmp, and was written partially to relieve t\ie monotony
of the sick-room, and with the hope that though prevent-
cd at that time fr<tm being in active service, he still might
do something to aid t-lie glorious cause for which our
brave people are so gallantly stmggling^ and should this
work be tlie means of imparting to a brother soldier one
item of information that he otherwise would not have
known, the author will feel amply rewarded for his trouble.
GEO. C. LEWIS.
Balej<5m, X, C, January, 18^-
INTRODUCTION,
DIRECTIONS FOR CONDUCTING DRILLS,
A good method of instruction in military discipline,
should exclude everything that is unnatural or not appli-
cable to actual military eervice in action* If anything be
admitted at any time in the parades of show, mounting
guard, or the like, it should be taught separately, and
after the principles of a rational discipline are well estab-
lished.
It is too much the practice to commit the charge of the
elementary drills to non-commissioned officers, by which
many great evils are produced. No officer can expect to
command a company, much less a regiment, ( to which evei y
officer should through merit aspire,) unless he has had
practical experience; and in no circumstances can an
officer so soon acquire the habit of command, or learn the
mode of instruction and the effect of discipline, as by per-
sonall}' conducting the drill of his men. By devolvino'
these first duties on non-commissioned officers, the com-
missioned officers remain ignorant and timid ; and the
chance of finding non-commissioned officers who can
clearly comprehend and eacplain the principles of a gool
X TXJKODlCTIfyy.
discipline, u not one in. twenty ; from which cause it is
twenty to one t^at the reeraits are imperfectl}' or errone-
ously taught.
He, therefore, who has the charge of a drill, or who
teaches others, should not be himself ignorant j nor should
he be offended at the ignorance of those who never had an
opportunity to learn — he should be patient, but firmj
generous, but without relaxing from the strictness of duty ;
he should command his own temper, in order to secure re-
ipect ; and he shouid never be tired of rendering what be
teaches intelligible,, Every word should be explained,
and a single explanation to those whom he is to teach, will
not be sufficient — every man in the drill should understand
every word that is used, and the use ot every motion and
movement he makes j and personal actions should be used
as examples wherever practicable ; so that whenever a
word is used, or a movement commanded, not only the
word shall be familiar to the ear by repeated use and illus-
tration, but the movement itself, by frequent practice,
familiar to the eye.
AUdrills should, therefore, be superintended or conducted
by a commissioned otlicerywho should always keep in mind,
that discipline is as necessary for him who teaches, as for
those that are taught. He should, therefore, be careful
that he acts personally according to the manner he teaches,
and that his own motions conform to the principles ho
gives ; he should keep in mind that the soldier very soon
discovers the capacity of the officer; and that unless the
officer possesses skill himself, he cannot expect the soldiers
to confide in him, nor to respect him ; they may be made
to fear his power, but the fonfiidence which is most pre-
fNTROniTOTIOX. if
cious to a good ofllcer, is that which arises out of the
voluntary esteem and respect, produced by the gene-
rosity of his conduct and the skill which he manifests
in the discharge of his duty ; when he treats those
OTcr whom he is placed, as men. w^hose hapiness and
credit he studies, rather than as slaves over whom he has
the right to tyranise. The celebrate 1 General Lloyd,
speaking of the German discipline, reprobates its Bavage
character by observing: *' that blows may make a man
a coward, but never made a hero."
The instructor of a drill should be of a cheerful, but firm
disposition; he must have discernment and good sense to
know that as the habits of persons newly entering upon
military exercises have been formed differently, that they
cannot be expected to change their habits suddenly, or
embrace habitsat once different from those they hare been
accustomed to.
It should be explained that the first lessons of the posi-
tion— the /aciii ga-^-ihe step and toheelivg, are only like the
first lessons ia leading and writing ; that it is requisite to
practice them often, aud ta perform them with the greatest
exactness in the first beginnings, in order to c.Try the samo
correctness and exactness into more enlarged practice.
That the duties of a company are the same as^e duties
of a regiment and of a whole array—that the whole of
the military art consists In marching, facing and reheeling,
according to the rules which experience has proved to be
the most effective ; and that without perfec. ion in these
particulars, arms would be of ]jtt!c or Jio usn, opposed ro
troops who fire v,'oll disciplined,
IJiTRODUeTIOK.
These instructions should be introduced in familiar and
persuasive language, as advice, rather than command ;
always ivith good temper and kindness — ahuae never 1 1
The advantages and security of a good discipHne should
be constantly brought into view ; and the necessity of
inarching correctly ever equal spaces in equal times, should
be hinted at as being the means by which the whole power
and strength of a line or column is brought to bear at the
same instant.
No opportunity should be lost, that is practicable, to
present to the eye of the soldier the manner of any opera-
tion which he is to perform. A well disciplined man pre-
sented in front, whose actions may accord with the com-
mand, and who may be seen by the whole of the drill, will
have an excellent eflect in producing a ready understand-
ing, It is much easier to imitate what is seen, than to
execute what is barely described. The variety of habits,
and the different signification of the same word in the un-
derstanding of different persons, render verbal descriptions
generally imperfect. There can pbe no mistake by the eye,
and every word should be explained which may not be
otherwise understood.
The€fcmpiler of this work, would particularly and earn-
estly suggest that officers be careful in their treatment of
those under their command. In some armies, the mind
and feelings of the man are never studied; his passions
are never called forth, except to excite terror and hatred
of his officers ; and. there have been men who have held,
that the army should be more a£raid of their own General
than of the enemy I But we mu«t reprobate such ignor-
ance of human nature, " He who attempts to govern by
IVTRODUCTIOK. rfn
ihe lash," laid Timoub ''knows not how to govern."—
There is no incompatibility in exciting the generous affec-
tions of the soldier, with the principles of discipline.
Cruelty may make cowards and deserters, but in never
made a good, faithful, honorable soldier.
Officers have only to convince soldiers that they under-
stand their own duties, and the soldiers will respect them ;
officers have only to demonstrate that they are soldiers*
friends, and they may lead them to the cannon's mouth, or
in the face of the death dealing bullet, with an enthusiasm
that never fails to triumph when regulated by discipline.
The triumphs of the French armies, in which no man is
ever beaten with a cane, and in which whipping never was
known, clearly evince the futile barbarity of military
punishments, by the lash, or by any species of degiading
torture. The humblest bred man that fills the ranks of an
army, is as susceptible of the sentiment of glory, and
honor, and shame, as the proudest captain that ever car-
ried a plume.
The principle of discipline most prevalent is terror,
cruelty and degradation— the soldier is treated as an out-
cast of the earth, and however different he may be when
he enters the ranks, the manni r of his treatment too often
transforms him into the miserable slave which he is pre-
supposed to be.
This treatment is inconsistent with reason and humanity.
Officers should remember that the great majority of the
privates who constitute the Confederate army, and who
are so gallantly exposing themselves to the rigors and
hardships of a soldier's life— in the defence of our countrj-,
aio not of the material that compose other armies and
xir iNTROnccnON.
that in thousands of cases, they are the cherished jtod loved
idol of some household circle.
Besides, it is not neccsaary to discipline or subordination.
A generous, aflectionate, and cherishing courtesy, will
overcome the most hardened villian, and where it fails,
cruelty or barbarity vrill never succeed.
The line between familiarity and kind conduct, is easily
drawn by men of sense, conscious of themselves. None
but incompetent men will treat a soldier in the ranks with
contempt or cruelt3% O-n the parade, good temper and
good manners should never be absent. Haughtiness is in-
compatible with true dignity ; openness, generosity and
firmness, constitute the true deportment which inspires
respect without exciting fear; which commands with de-
cision, and is obeyed implicitly, and which is inflexible
only in the discharge of duty.
In the manner of command, much depends upon the
clearness and distinctness of the utterance of him who
teaches. At drill, he must not be spai'ing of explanation,
but on parade he gives no instruction ; he commands
only, and sees that what he orders, be executed promptly
and properly.
It is observed by the British General Dundas, with a
degree of truth that cannot be too strongly impressed upon
the mind of every man who holds a military commission —
" That the complete instruction of an officer enlarges with
his situation and at last takes in the whole circle of mili-
tary science. But an oflicer who cannot thoroughly 'dis-
cipline and exercise the body entrusted to his command,
large or small, is not fit, in time of service, to lead it
against an enemy; he cannot be cool and collected in time
nvTiioouci'iox. ^^
of danger; he cannot profit by circamstanccs, from his
inability to comprehend ivhatis doing by the enemy, or
what is necessary to be done against them, to direct it
properly. The fate cf many depend on his well or ill ac-
quitting himself of his duty ; for it is not suflicient to ad-
vance with bravery ; it is requsite to possess that degree
of intelligence, which should distinguish every officer, ac-
cording to his station. Soldiers will not act with spirit or
animation, when they have no reliance on he capacity of
thoffc who conduct i.hem/'
The intention of all discipline is to auppy a kind of arti-
ficial instinct, and to make this uniform throughout the
whole mass of an army, so that whenever an operation is
required to be performed by an army, no wore is requisite
than to assign stations to the several divisions^ and appoint
the time whe'n the movements commence, or when the
concert of operations should meet and produce the effect
required.
To discipline men well, there must be a familiar, compre-
hensible, and rational method.
The more simple it is, the more easily it is understood^
the better will it be executed.
To this end, the language must be that of the science'
and it must be taught and explained with clearness.
There must be nothing unnecessary or unnatural in the
svstem. Every operation and movement should be exe-
cuted exactly as required, in the shortest period of time,
and occupying the least possible space in which it can be
accomplished.
As all discipline is intended for action^ and not for parade^
discipline should be directed to inculcate that which is
adapted to action only, as fundamental, and to make all
that appertains to parade, secondary — action must never be
'ost sight of in teaching discipline.
It may be proper to remark here, for the information of
those who are not alread}' conversant in the subject, that
many of the words of instruction, direction, and precau-
tion, employed in the drill, cease to be employed when
the battalion is completed in its discipline. Numerous
words and commands are used in the elementary instruc-
tion, which are no longer required to be employed, though
their application and practical use are never to be omitted.
These directions cannot be made too familiar. .
Officers should remember that there are three kinds of
commands, viz :
The command of caution, which is attention.
The 2)reparatory command, which indicates the move-
ment which is to be executed.
The command of execution, such as march or halt, or in
the manual of arms, the part of command which causes an
execution.
The tone of command should be animated, distinct, and
of a loudness proportioned to the number of men under
instruction.
The command attention, is pronounced at the top of the
voice, dwelling on the last syllable.
The command of execution will be pronounced in a tone
firm and brief.
THE SOLDIER'S COMPANION.
PART FIRST
Position of the Soldier and Squad Drill.
The correct position of the soldier, and the drill of the
squad, being the ground work of proficiency in all mili-
tary exercises, it is exceedingly necessary that the men
should fix and keep their attention upon the instructor—
who should be as clear and concise as possible in his in-
structions and explanations, and should endeavor to habitu-
ate kiraself and men, by precept and example, to that com-
posure and presence of mind which is so essentially re
quisite in drilling and instructing recruits.
Great care should bo taken in learning them the correct
position at first, as considerable difficulty is sometimes
experienced in their further progress when they have been
incorrectly taught in the beginning,
In most cases it is impracticable to instruct recruits in
squads of less than four or eight men at a time.
Position of the Soldier.
1. Heels on the same line and as close together as the
conformation of the man will permit, the feet turned out
equally and forming with each other something lese than
2 I'OSITIOX OF TUB SOLIJ.KK.
a right angle ; knees straight without stiffness ; body erect
on the hips, inclining a little forward ; shoulders square
and falling equally ; arms hanging naturally ; elbows near
the body ; palms of the hands turned a little to the front,
the little fingers behind the seam of the pantaloons ; head
erect and square to the front, without constraint; china
little drawn in and near the stock without covering it;
eyes fixed straight to the front and striking the ground
at about fifteen paqes.
2. The instructor having given the recruit the position
of the soldier without arms, will now teach him the turn-
ing of the head and eyes ; he will command :
1. Eyes — Right. 2. Front.
3. At the word righ*, the recruit will turn the head
gently to the right, so as to bring the inner corner of the
left eye in a line with the centre of the body, the eye fixed
on the line of the eyes of the men in, or supposed to be in
the same rank. At the word front, resume the direct
position.
4. The movement of eyes — Left will be executed by in-
Terse means.
5. The instructor will take care that the movement of
the head does not derange the squareness of the shoulders.
Rest.
6. At the command rest, stand at ease.
7. When the instructor wishes to cause a resumption of
the habitual position, he will command :
POSITION OP THE SOLDIER. J
• • 1. Attention. 2. Sqdad.
8. At the first word, the recruit will fix his attention :
at the second, he will resume the prescribed position and
steadiness.
-^
Facings.
1. Squad. 2. lii(jht (or left)— Face.
9. At the second command, raise the right foot slightly,
turn to the right (or left,) on the left heel, raising th'^ toe
a little, and then replace the right heel, by the side of the
left, and on the same line.
10. At the command front, turn on the left heel so as to
regain the first position, and replace the right heel by the
side of the left.
11. To full face to the rear (or front), the command will
be given :
1. Squad. 2. About — Fack.
12. At the word about, turn on the left heel, bi-ing the
left toe to the front, carry the right foot to the rear,
the hollow opposite to and full three inches from the left
heel, the feet square to each other.
13. At the word face, turn on both heels, raise the toes
a little, extend the thighs and face to the rear, -bringing,
at the same time, the right heel by the side of the left.
14. The instructor will take care that the?o motions do
not derange tho position of tlio body.
4 POSITIOX OF THE SOLDIER.
The Direct Step ■ ♦
15. The direct step, or pace, in coimnon time, is ttventy
eight inches, reckoning from heel to heel and at the rate of
ninety a minute.
16. The instructor wishing to instruct the recruit in the
principles of this step, will place himself six or eight
paces in front and facing him. He will then execute the
step slowlj, by way of illustration, and command :
1. Squad foi'tvard. 2. Common time. 3. March.
17. At the first command, feel the weight of the body
on the right leg, without bending the left knee.
18. At the command march, step off with the left foot,
carrying it straight forward twenty-eight inches from the
right, the solencar the ground, the ham extended, the toe
a little depressed, and, as also the knee, slightly turned
out ; at the same time, throw the weight' of the body for-
ward, and plant flat the left foot, without shock, precisely
at the distance where it finds itself from the right, when
the weight of the body is brought forward, the whole of
which will now rest on the advanced foot. Next, in like
manner, advance the right foot and plant it as above, the
heel twenty-eight inches from the heel of the left foot, and
thus continue to march, without crossing the legs, or
striking the one against the other, without turning the
shoulders, and preserving always the face direct to the front.
19. The instructor wishing the squad to halt, will com-
mand: .
L Squad. 2. Halt,
20. At the command halt, which will be given at the
instant either foot is coming to the ground, the foot in the
POSITION OF Tllfi vSOLDIER. 5
rear will be brought up, and planted by the side of the
other, without shock.
The Quich-Stej).
21. The principles of the step in quick time are the same
as for common time, but its swiftness is at the rate of one
hundred and ten steps p^r minute. As soon as the recruit
has the required steadiness, and has become established in
the manual of arms, and in the mechanism of the step i
common time, he will be practiced only in quick time, the
double quick, and the run. " When the time is not indicat-
ed in the preparatory command, the squad will always
move in quick time.
22. Thi! instructor wishing to march in quich time, will
command :
1. Squad, forward. 2. March.
23. At the command march, the squad will step off and
continue to march in quick time.
The Double Quick-Step.
24. The length of the double quick-step is thirty-three
inches, and its swiftness at the rate of one hundred and
sixty-five steps per minute.
25. The instructor wishing to teach the recruit the prin-
ciples cf this step, will command :
1. Double qinch-Htep. 2. March.
26. At the first command, raise the hands to a level with
the hips, the hands closed, the nails towards the body, the
elbows to the rear.
C POSITION OF TIIF. SOl.DIEH.
27. At the second command, raise to the front the left
leg bent to its greatest elevation, the part of the leg be-
tween the knee and inst(»p vertical, the toe depressed ;
replace the foot in its former po.^ition ; execute with the
right leg what has just boen prescribed for the left, and
continue the alternate movement of the legs until the com-
mand :
1. S'itiad. 2. Halt.
28. At the command halt, bring the foot which is raised
by the side of the other, drop the hands to the side, and
resume the position of the soldier.
29. The instructor should phice 'himself six or eight
paces from, and facing the recruit, and indicate the ca-
dence bj the commands one and two, given alternately, as
each foot is brought to the ground.
30. The recruit being sufficiently established in tho
principles of this step, the instructor will command :
1. Squad, forward. 2, Double quick. 3. Makch.
31. At the first command, throw the weight of the body
on the right leg.
32. At the second, place the arms as indicated in No. 26.
53. At the third, carry forward the left foot, the leg
slightly bent, the knee raised, plant the left foot, toe first,
thirty-three inches from the right, and with the right
foot execute what has just been prescribed for the left.
This alternate movement of the legs will take place by
throwing the weight of tho body on the foot that is plant-
ed, and by allowing a natural oscillatory motion of the-
arms.
rOSITION or THH; SOLDIK!;. < ,
24. The instructor should cautien the recnuit to breathe
as much as possible through the nose, k-oping the moutfa
closed, as it will enable him to go a mncli longer distance,
without experiencing the fatigue that he otherwise would.
The. Run.
35. The recruits will also be exercised in running.
36. The principles are the same as for (he double quick
gtep, the only diflference consisting in a ;;rcater degree of
swiftness.
Aligmnenis.
57. The instructor will at first teach the recruits to
align themselves man by man, in order the better to make
them comprehend the principles of alignment ; to this end
he will command the two men on the right flank to march
to the front, and having aligned them, ho will cause the
remainder of the squad to more up, as thoy may ba suc-
cessively called, each by bis number, and align themselves
successively on the line of the first two men.
38. Each recruit, as designated by his number, will turn
the head and eyes to the right as prescribed in No. 3, and
will march in quick time two paces forward, shortening
the last so as to find himself about six inches behind the
new alignment, which he ought never to pass ; he wil»
next move up steadily by steps of two or three inches, the
thighs extended, to the side of the man next to him on
the alignment, so that, without deranging the head, the
8 rOSITIOX OF lilE SOLnil'R.
line of the eyes, or that of the shoulders, he inay find
himself in the exact line of his neighbor, whose elbow he
will lightly touch without opening his own.
39. The instructor eeeing the rank well aligned, will
command :
FRONT.
40. At this, the recruits will turn their ejes to the front
and remain firm.
41. Alignments to the left will be executed on the same
principles.
42. "When the recruits shall have learned to align them-
selves correctly, the instructor will cause the entire rank
to align itself at once by the command :
Bight (or left) Dress.
43. At this, the rank, except the two men placed in ad-
vance as a basis of alignment, will more up in quick time,
and place themselves on the new line as prescribed in No.
38.
44. The instructor will carefully observe that the princi-
ples are followed, and will place himself on the flank that
has served as a basis, to see that the alignment is correct.
45. The instructor seeing the rank aligned, will com-
mand :
FRONT.
46. Alignments to the rear will be executed on the same
principles, the recruits stepping back a little beyond the
POSITION' OF A SOLDIER. \f
line, am^ thon dressing up according to the principles pre-
scribed in No. 38, the instructor commanding :
1. Biffht (or left) backtcard—DR^m.
To March to (he Front.
47. The rank being correctly aligned, when the instruc-
tor shall wish to causa it to march to the front, he will
place a well instructed man on the right or left, according
to the side on which he may wish theguid' to be, and
command :
1. Squad, foncnrd. 2. Guide right {ov left.) 3. March.
48. At the command march, the rank will step off smart-
ly with the left foot ; the guide will take care to march
straight to the front, keeping hia shoulder in a square
with that line.
49. The men 'hould touch lightly the elbow towards the
side of the guide, be careful not to open out the left el-
bow nor the right arm, yield to the pressure coming from
the side of the guide, and resist that coming from the o{>-
posite side.
50. They should keep the head direct to the front, no
matter on which side the guide may be, and if found be-
fore or behind the alignment, the man in fault must cor-
rect himself by shortening or lengthening the step, by
degrees, almost insensible.
51. The instructor will labor to cause the recruits to
10 ror^iTTOx of thr soldier.
comprehend that the alignment can only be preserved, in
snarching, but bv the regularity of the step, the touch
of the elbow, and the maiutainance of the shouldera in &
square with tkQ line of direction.
62. The squad being in mirch, the instructor wishing to
march them obliquely, will command:
I. Itigkt (or left) obli-^ue. 2. Makch.
53. At the second command, each man will make a half
face to the right (or left) and will then march straight
forward in the new direction. As the men no longer touch
elbows, they should glance along the shoulders of the near-
est files towards the side to which they are obliquing, and
should regulate their steps so that the shoulders shall al-
ways be behind that of their next neighbor on that side,
and that his head shall conceal the heads of the other mem
in the rank.
54. The men sh«uld preserve the same length of pace
and the same degree of obliquity.
55. The instructor wishing to resume the primitive di-
rection, will command :
I. Foru-ard. 2. March,
56. At the second command, each man will make a half
face to the left (or right) and all will then march straight
to the front, as in the direct march.
57. The squad being at a halt, if the instructor should
wish, to march it in the back step, he will command:
1. Squadlacl-iOKtrd. 2. Guide right {ov left.) 3. Miuoir.
l-H. At the oouiinand marrh, the recruit will step off
Kosrrio.v ok ihk solltier. 11
smartly with the left foot fourtecu inches to tho rear,
reckoning from heel to' heel, and so on with the fset in
succession, till the command halt, which will always be
preceded by the cauti'>n, tSquacl.
59. The men will halt promptly at this command and
bring the foot in front by the side of the other.
60. This step will ahra3'S be execnted in quick time.
To Mirk Time.
01. The .'quad marching in the direct step in common
or quick time, the instructor will command :
1. 3fark time. 2. March.
62. At the command march, which will ho, given at the
instant either foot is coming to the groind, make a sem-
blance of marching, by advancing flr?t one foot and then
the other, always bringing back the advanced foot and
placing its heel by the side of the heel of the other.
To Change Step.
63. The squad being in march, the instructor will com-
mand :
1. Change step. 2. March.
Gi. At the second coiwraand, which will be given at the
instant cither foot is coming to the ground, bring up
quickly the foot in the rear to the side of that just come to
the ground, and step olV v.ilh the latter.
12 rosuiox OF ruK soldieu.
65. The squad marching in common, quick or double
quick time, and the instructor wishing to face it about,
will command :
J. Sqnad, right about. 2. MA.aCH.
66. At the comjiand march, which will be given the
instant the left foot is coming t» the ground, bring this
foot to the ground, and turning on it, face to the rear, then
place the right foot in the new direction, and step off with
the left foot.
67. If the squad be marching and the instructor wishes
to bring it to a halt and faced to the rear, he will com-
mand :
1. Sqnad, right about. 2. Halt.
08. At the command halt, which will be given as the
left foot is coming to the ground, bring this foot to the
ground, and turning on it face to the rear, then bring the
right foot to the side of the left.
69. The squad being at a halt, the instructor wishing
to move it to the right on the same line, will command :
1. Side step to the right. 2. March.
70. At the second command, each man will glance his
eyes to the right, and at the same time carry his right
foot about tcMi inches to the '•ight, and instantly bring up
his left foot, and so on, the whole with perfect precision
of time.
71. The shoulders must be kept square to the front, and
13 rOSITIOiV OF THE ROLPIBR.
each man perceptibly halting, when he has closed on the
fixed point, or on the man next to him.
72. When the instructor shall wish the squad to halt,
he will command : **
1. Squad. 2. Halt.
73. At the command halt, bring up the left foot to the
Bide of the right, and stand firm.
74. To change the position by aide step to the left it will
be executed on the same principles by inverse means.
To March by the Flanh.
75. The rank being at a halt and correctly alligned, the
instructor will command :
Count ttcos,
6. At this command the men count from right to left,
pronouncing in a loud and distinct voice, in the same tone,
and without turning the head, one, two, according to the
place which he occupies.
77. This being accomplished, the instructor will com-
mand :
1. Squad, right — Face. 2. Fornard. 3. March.
78. At the command face, the squad will face to tho
right; the even numbered men after facing to the right,
will step quickly to the side of tho odd numbered men,
the latter standi^ng fast, so that when the movement is
executed, the men wi;l be formed into files of two abreast*
1-i *tllLIUl- (»1- 1111', SyLAll.
70. Xt the command march, tlie equitd will jstep oft'
smartly with the lePt foot ; the files keeping alicjned and
prcsei ving their intervals.
80. To march by the left flank, %ill be executed b}- the
same command, substituting the word left for right, and
bj inverse means ; in this case the even numbered men
after facing to the left will stand fast, and the odd num-
ber will place themselves on their left.
81. The instructor should place himself five or six paces
on the flank of the rank marching in file, to watch over
the execution of the principles prescribed. He will also,
sometimes place himself in its roar, halt and suffer it to
pass fifteen or twenty paces, the better to see whether the
.men cover each other accurately.
82. When he wishes to halt the rank, marching by the
flank, he w ill command :
1. Squad. 2. Halt. 3. Front.
83. At the second command, the rank will halt, and af-
terward no man will stir, although he may have lost his
distance.
84. At the third command, each man will front by fac-
ing to the left, if marching by the right flank, and by a
face to the right, if marching by the left flank.
85. The rear rank men will at the same time move
quickly into their places, so as to form the squad again in-
to one rank.
86. To change direction by fik', the instructor will com-
mand :
1. B>/file left (or right) 2. March.
87. At the command march, the first file will change di-
rection to the left (or right) in describing a email arc of a
SCHOOT, OF THE SQIUD. 15
circle, and will then inarch straight forward ; the two
men of this file in wheeling will keep up the touch of the
elbows, and the man on the side to which the wheel ia
made, will shorten the first three or four steps. Each file
will come successively to wheel on the same spot where
that which preceded it wheeled.
88. To face by the right or left flank, in marching, tlio
instructor will command :
1. Squad, hij the ri;jht {ov left) Jlank. 2. March.
89. At the command march, which will be given a little
before either foot comes to the ground, the recruit will
turn the body, plant the foot that is raised in the new di-
rection, and step off with the other foot, w'ithout altering
the cadence of the step ; the men will double or undouble
rapidly.
90. If in facing by the right or left flank, the squad
should face to the rear, the men will come into one rank
agreeably to the principles as indicated in Nos. 84 and 85.
Observe that the men who are in the rear always move
up to form into single rank, and in such manner as never
to invert the order of the numbers in the rank.
91. If, when the squad has been faced to ihe rear, the
instructor should cause it to face by the left flank, it is the
even numbers who will double by moving to the left of
the odd numbers; but if by the right flank, it is the odd
numbers who will double to the right o' the even num-
bers.
92. Should the instructor wish the men to march in one
rank, he will caution them not to double files.
K> $||U00L OF THE SOLDIKR.
Wheelings.
93. Wheelings are of two kinds ; from halts or on fixed
pivots, and in march or on movable pivots.
9i. Wheeling on a fixed pivot takes place in passing a
corps from the order in battle to the order in column, or
from the latter to the former.
95. Wheels in marching, take place in changes of direc-
tion in column, as often as this movement is executed to
the side opposite to the guide.
96. In wheels from a halt, the pivot-man only turns in
his place without advancing or receding.
97. In the wheels in marching, the pivot-man takes
steps of nine or eleven inches, according as the squad is
marching in quick or double quick time, so as to clear the
wheeling point before the next subdivision arrives on the
Bame ground, which is necessary in order that the succeed-
ing subcivisions may not lose their distances by being
delayed.
98. The man on the wheeling fla:ik will take the full
step of twenty-eight inches, or thirty-three inches, accord-
ing to the gait.
Wheeling from a Halt, or on a Fixed Pivot.
99. The rank being at a halt, the instructor will place
a well instructed man on the wheeling flank to conduct it,
and then command :
1. By squad, ri(jht wheel. 2. March.
100. At the command march, the rank will step off with
the left foot, turning at the same tinip tli!" head a little to
A
T-OSiriON OF TUE .SOUDIKR. 17
the left, the C3'es fi.Tod on the line of the oyc^ of tlie men
to the left ; the pivot man will merely mark fimc in grada-
f.Wy turning his body, in order to conform himself to the
movement of the marching flank ; the man who conducts
this flank will take steps of twenty-eight inches, and from
the first step, advance a little the left shoulder, cast his
eycji from time to time along the rank, and feel constantly
the elbow of the next man lightly, but never push him.
101. The other men wiil feel lightly the elbow of th«
next man, towards the pivot, resist pressure cominjj from
the opposite side, and each will coRform himself to the
njarching flank, shortening his step according to his ap-
proximation to the pivot.
102. The instructor will make tlic rank wheel round tlio
circle once or twice before halting, in ^rder to cause th^^
pijnciplss to be better understood, and he will be watch-
ful that the centre docs not break.
103. The wheel to the left will be executed according to
the same principles.
lOL When the instructor shall wish to arrest the wheel
he will command :
1. iSqtKtd. 2. Malt.
105. At the second command the rank will halt and no
man stir. The instructor going to the flank opposite t)ie
pivot, will place the two outer men of that flank in the
direction he may wish to give to the rank, without, how-
ever, displacing the pivot, who will conform the line of
iiis shouldei's to this direction.
IOC. The instructor will take care to have between th-^PH
two men and the pivot, only the space necessary to cvsx-
iii'm the other men. lie will theu coaimaud •
li
18 SCHOOL or Tna soitDiEtr.
1. Left (or right) — Dress.
107. At this the rank will place itself on the allignmcnt
®f the two men established as a basis in conformity with
principles prescribed in No. 38.
108. The instructor will next cammand Front, which
will be executed as prescribed in No. 3^.
Wheeling^ in Marching, or on a Movable Pivot.
109. The rank being in march, and the instructor ■«Tiab-
ing tO' chang-e the direction to the reverse flank, (to the
side opposite to the guide or pivot flank) he will com-
mand:
1. Right (or left) whtel. 2. March.
110. The first command will be given when the rank is
jot four paces from the wheeling point.
111. At the command march, the wheel will be executed
in the same manner as from a halt, except that the toucb
of the elbow will remain towards the marching flank (or
side of the guide) instead of the actual pivot j that the
pivot man, instead of merely turning in bis place, will
conform himself to the movement of the marching flank,
feel lightly the elbow of the next man, take steps of full
nine inches, and thus gain ground-forward in describing a
small ciu've, to clear the point of wheel. The middle of
tha rank will bend slightly to the rear. As soon as the
movement shall commence, the man who conducts the
marching flank will cast his eyes on the ground over which
Jie will have to pass.
112. The wheel being ended, the instructor will com-
mand :
rOSITION OF A BOLOTUn. 19
1. Fortcard. 2. March.
a- '.A.
113. The first command will be pronounced when ftiuv
paces are yet re^juired to complete the chan,fe of direc-
tion.
Hi. At the command march, which will be given at the
instant of completinf^ the wheel, the man who- conducts
the marching flank will direct himself straight forward ;
the pivot man and all the rank will retake che step of
twenty-eight inches, and bring the head direct to the
froat.
Turning.
115. The change of direction to the side of the guide,
In matching, will be executed as follows : The instructor
will command : •
1. Left (or right) tiirit. 2, Mauch,
116. The first command will be given when the rank is
yet/our paces from the turning point.
117. At the command march, to be pronounced at the
instant the rank ought to turn, the guide will face to the
left (or right) in marching, and more forward in the new-
direction without slackening or quickening the cadence,
and without shortening or lengthening the step. The whole
rank will promptly conform itself to the new direction, to
eflect which, each man will advance the shoulder opposite
the guide, take the double quick step, to carry himself in
the new direction, turn the head and eyes to the side of
the guide, and retake the touch of the elbow on that side
in placing himself on the allig-njiicnt of the guide, from
20 POSITION OF rnK soldiek.
whom he will take the step, and then resynie tho direct
position of the head. Each man will thus arrive pucc-g-
sivelj on the allignment.
118. When the reoruits compreheiul and execute well, in
quick-time, the wheels, at a halt and in marching, and the
change of direction to the side of the guide, the instructor
will cause the same movements to bo executed in double
quick time.
Manual of Aims fur Heavy Infantry.
119. The manual of arms will be taught to four men,
placed at first in one rank, elbow to elbow, and aftcrwai-ds '
in two ranks.
120. Each command will be executed in one time, (or
pause) and this time will be divided into motions.
121. The rate or swiftness of each motion, except the
motions relative to the cartrige, to the rammer and to the
fixino- and unfixing of the bayonet, is fixed at the ninetieth
part of a minute ; but the motions here excepted should
be executed with promptness and regularity.
122. As soon as the recruits shall well comprehend the
positions of the several motions, they will be taught to
execute the time without resting on the motions.
123. Tlecruits are frequently seen with natural defects
in the conformation of the shoaldcrs, breast, and hips. —
These the instructor will endeavor to correct in the
lessons without arms, ana afterwards by steady endea-
vors, so thai the appearances of the pieces in tlie same
line may be uniform, and this without constraint to the
men.
rOSTTIOX OF THE SOLPIER. 21
'' Princi2)fes of Shouldered Arms:
124. The recruit being jilaccd in the position of the
soldier, thff instructor will cause him to seize the piece in
the left hand, the arm but a very little bent, the elbow
back, near the body, the palm of the hand passing on the
outer edge of the butt on the upper joints of the fi^gcri,
(the inner edge on the lower joints, and the ends inside,)
the heel of the butt between the middle and forefingers,
the thuihb on the front screws of the butt plate, the re-
maining fmgers under the butt, the butt more or less kept
back, according to the conformation of the man, so that
the piece seen from the front (or side) shall appear per-
pendicular, and also that the movement of the thigh, in
inarching, may not raise it, or cause it waver : the stock
below the tail band resting agiiinst the hollow of the shoul-
der, just within the joint, the right arm hanging naturally
as in the position of the soldier.
125. The instructor, before proceeding to drill the re-
cruit in the manual will causo to be repeated, the move-
ments of eyes right, left and/rout and the facings.
126. The manual of arms will be taught in the follo>Ving
progression : The instructor will command :
Pretent — Arms.
One time and two motions.
127. ( First motion. ) Turn the piece with the left hand,
the lock out, seize the small of the stock at the same time
with the right hand, the piece perpendicular and detached
iV ini the shoulder, the left hand remaining under the butt.
]'1R. {Second motion.) Complete the turning inwaids
oT ihe jjiccc so as to bring it erect before the centre of tlio
22 , POSITION OF THE SOLDlSlt.
body, the rammar to the front, the right hand under and
against the f^uard ; seize it smartly at the same time with
the left hand above the lock, the thumb extended along
the barrel and on the stock, the forearm resting on the
body without constraint, and the hand at the hight of the
elbow.
Shoulder — Arms.
One time and tu-o motions.
120. {First motion.) Turn the piece with the right
hand, the barrel out, (with the thumb on the S plate, and
the forefinger against the cock,) raise and support it
against the left shoulder with the right hand, drop the
left hand under the butt, the right hand resting on, with-
out graspin'g the small of the stock.
130. {Second motion.) Drop quickly the right hand
into its position. 0
Order — Arms.
One time and two motions
131. {First motion.) Drop the piece smartly by ex-
tending the left arm, seize it at the same time with the
right hand above and near the tail band; (without the
i?ast pause.) quit the hold of th^ left hand, and carry the
piece opposite the right shoulder, the rammer in front, the
little finger behind the barrel, the right hand supported
against the hip, the butt three inches from the ground,
the piece ei*ect, the left hand hanging by the side.
132. {Second motion.) Let the piece slip through the
rio-ht hand, without shock, to the ground and take the fol-
lowing position :
POSTTrON OF THE SOLDIER. 23
Position cf Order Arms.
133. The liand low, the barrel between the thumb and
forelinper, extended along the stock ; the other fingers ex-
tended and joined ; the muzzle about two inches from the
right shoulder ; the rammer in front : the toe (f»r beak'^
of the butt, against, and in aline with the toe of the right
foot; the barrel perpendicular.
134. The instructor will see the recruit is well establish-
ed in the position of order artnt, and then command :
Shoulder — Arms.
Otie time a»d trro mofiomi.
135. [Firnt motion.) liaise the piece smarlty with the
right hand, carry it against the left shoulder, so as to
bring the barrel to the front, place, at the same time, the
loft hand under the butt, and slip the right hand down to
the hammer.
136. (Second motion.) Let fall smartlj the right hand
into position.
Siijyport — Arms.
One time and three motionn.
137. {First motion.) With the right hand, seize the
small of the stock four inches below the lock, raising a
little but r.ot turning the piece.
138. {Second motion.) Take the left hand from the butt,
extend the left forearm upward, jicross the body, under
the cock, the hand flat on the right breast.
139. {Third motion.) Drop the right hand smartly into
its position.
24 POSITION OF THE SOLDIErv.
Shoulder (or carry) — Akms,
One time and three motions.
140. {First motion.) Carry quicklj the right hand to
the small of the stock.
141. {Second motion.) Place quicklj the left hand un-
der the butt, and at the same time, without any pause, let
the right hand, with the fingers extended slip up under
the cock of the piece, the cock resting on the forefinger
between the middle and third joints, and the thumb ex-
tended along the S plate.*
142. {Third motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand
into its position, and drop with the left, at the same time,
the piece into tha position of shoulder armf.
Unfix — Bayonet.
One time and three motions.
148. {First motion.) Drop the piece by a full extension
of tho left arm, seize it at the same tim* with the right
hand abore and near the tail band.
144. {Second motion.) Drop the piece with the right
hand along the left thigh, seize it with the left hand abore
the right, lengthen out the left arm, re»t the butt on the
ground without shock, and c irrj at the same time the
right hand to the bayonet; with the thumb turn the«lasp
♦This movement is somewhat different from that pre-
scribed in other works, but it will be found that it causes
uniformity and precision, and adds much more ease and
grace in its execution, ea^iecially li-om a front yiaw. It
was used entirely by the lamented Col. C. C. Tew, Sup't.
of the North Carolina Militarr Academr, at Hillsboro',
N. C.
POSITION OF THE Sni.PIER 2.>
against the stop, seize the bayonet at the s(X:ket and ihank,
10 that the lower end of the socket may be about an inch
below the heel of the palm, and that in wresting off the
bayonet, the thumb may be extended on the blade.
145. ( Third motion.) Wrest off the bayonet, return it
to the scabbard, place imnu-diately the rijjht little finfijer
on the butt of the rammer, lower the I'A'l hand alonp the
barrel, extending the arm, without depressing the shoulder.
Sliouhler- -kuMS. ,
0)lt time and thrte modnua.
146. {Fimt motion.) Uaise the piece with the left h^nd
■lon{( the left side, the hand at the height of .the chin, th;
forearm touching the piece, the barrel to the front ; drop
at the same time the right hand to seize the piece a littU
above the small of the stock, the forefinger touching the
^ock, and the thumb on the S plate.
147. (Second motion.) Raise the piece with the right
hand, drop the left and place it under the butt, support
the piece with the right hind against the shoulder i i the
pouition of $houlder armt, the right hand resting ou with-
ont grasping the piece.
143. {Third motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand
into its position.
149. The instructor should be careful that in all more-
nients where the hand is under the cock, as in the second
motion abore, that the fingers are extended and perfectly
•traight, the cock resting on the forefinger between the
middle and third joints, and Ihe tliuiub on the S plate.
26 POSITION OF THK SOLDIKR.
Secure — Arms.
One time and two motions.
150. (Fir$t motion.) Seize quickly the piece with the
right hand, the thumb on the S plate, and the forefinger
against the cock ; at the same instant, detach the piece
from the shoulder, the barrel to the front, seize it at the
tail band with the left hind, the thumb extended on the
rammer, the piece erect, opposite the shoulder the left
elbovT on the piece.
151. {Second motion.) Reverse the piece, pass it under
the left arm the left hand remaining at the tail band, the
thumb on the rammer, the little finger resting againit the
hip, and the right hand falling at the same time into ita
position.
Sho aider — Arms.
One time and two motions.
152. {First motion.) Raise the piece with the left hand,
(but not too suddenly lest the rammer should flj out,)
seize the small of the stock with the right hand to support
it against the shoulder, allowing the hand to assume the
position as indicated in Xo. 141, quit the hold of the left
hand and pass it quickly under th.e butt.
153. {Second ^notion.) Let fall smartly the right hand
into its position ; drop at the same time the piece into the
position of shoulder armt.
Fix — Bayonet.
One time and three motions.
154. {First motion.) Kimtrnfixhayontt, '^o. \iZ.
155. {Second motion.) As in unfix bayonet, No. 144,
SCHOOL OF THE SQCAB. 27
except that the right hand will go to the scabbard, to seize
the baronet by the socket and shank, so that the lower (now
upper) end of the socket shall extend about an inch above
the heel of the palm.
156. ( Third motion. ) Draw the bayonet from the scab-
bard, carry it and fix it on the muzzle, turning the clasp
towards the body with the right thumb: place immedi-
ately the little finger on the head of the rammer, lower
the left hand along the barrel, extending the arm without
depressing the shoulder.
iS'Ao«('(f*r~-AKus.
One time and three motio7is.
157. ( First, Second find Third moliow^.) As in shoulder
armn from uvfix bayonet.
Charge — Bayonet.
One time and tico motions.
158. {First 7not{on.) Make a half face to the right on
the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, place at the
same time the right foot behind and at right angles with
the left, the hollow of the right foot opposite to and about
three inches from the left heel ; turn the piece with the
left hand, lock outwards, and seize the small of the stock
at the same time with the right hand, the piece perpendi-
cular and detached from the shoulder ; leaving the left
hand under the butt.
150. {Second 7notion.) Bringdown the piece with the right
hand into the left, the latter seizing it a little in advance
of the tail band, the barrel up, the left elbow near the body
28
POSITION OF THE SOLDIER.
the right hand supported against the hip, the point of the
bayonet at the height of the eye.
160. The men of the rear rank will take care and not
touch their file leaders with the points of their bayonots.
Shoidder — Ahms.
One time and two motions,
161. {First motion.) Face to the front by turning on
the left heel, bring up the right foot by the side of the
left heel, at the sause time spring up the piece with the
right hand, to the left shoulder, and place the left hand
under the butt, allowing at the same time the right hand
to assume the position as indicated in No. 141.
162. { Second motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand
into its position.
Trail — Akms.
One time and tico motions.
1^3. {First motion.) As first motion of order armi
No. 131.
164. {Second motion.) Incline a little the muzzle to the
front, the butt to the rear, and about three inches from the
ground, the right hand grasping the piece and supported
at the hip.
165. Should the instructor wish to relieve the men when
marching with arms trailed, he will command : Change —
Trail, which will be executed in one motion, by raising
the muzzle to the shoulder, passing the piece across the
front of the bod}--, trailing it with the left. At the com-
mand Iiec7iange—TRAUj, raise the muzzle to the shoulder,
pass the piece to the right hand and retake the position of
trail arms.
ruSMION UF THE SOLl>IER, 29
Sh o u Ider — A R m s,
IGG. At the comniand shoulder raise the piece pcrpcn^i-
cuLar in the right hand ; at the command arms execute the
two motions in the shoxdder arma, from the positien of
order anna.
1C)7. The instructor wishing to give the men repose in
the position of order onus, will command:
Rest.
168. At this command, the men will no longer he re-
quired to ])rescrve silence, or to remain pteady in position.
Or he may command :
1. In place. 2. Rkst.
ino. At the second command, the men will not be re-
quired to preserve silence or steadineee of position, but
they must always keep one of their heels and their pieces
on the allignment.
[Jicninrkt.] (The instructor will be careful that the men
do not squat ur lie down, as it is exceedingly unmilitary
and apt to make them careJess and inattentive. The com-
piler of this woik has often seen reci-iaits stretched at full
length on the ground, l^iung ofhcers particularly, should
be cautioned against allowing it.)
If the instructor wishes, he will commaisd :
1. Parade. 2. Rest.
170. At the second command, the men will carry th«
right foot six inches in rear of the left heel, the left kne(»
slightly bent, the body upright upon the right log, th«
piece resting against the hollow of the ri^ht shoulder, tte
3'(J rOSITIOI* OF THE JfOLDIETt.
hands crossed in front, the back of them outwards, the
left hand uppermost, the eyes directed to the front.
171. To cause a resumption of the original position, the
instructor will command :
I. Attention 2.. Squai>.
172. At the second command, the men will resnme their
correct position of order arma.
173. If the squad should be at the position of support
arms, when the command in place or parade rest is given,
the men wiji be regulated by the directions indicated in
No. 169, ITO except they \Till bring up the right hand
amartly to the small of the stock and seize it.
174. At the command attention they will resume the cor-
rect po8itio>n of auj^pmH arms^
1. To Ei^ht Shotdder Shift 2. Arms. ( From a STiouMer
Arm9. )
One tim« and two mottona.
175. {First motion. ) Turn the piece with the left hand,
lock to the front, seize it at the same time with the right
hand at the small of the stock.
176. {Second motion.) Carry the piece to the right
shoulder, the lock plate upwards^ the left liand still holding
the butt, the muzzle elevated; |jiace the right hand on th&
Jautt, the beak between the two first fingers, the other twO"
fingers under the bait plate, and let fall the left hand by
the side.
Shoulder— Krms.
One time c$nd two motions .
177. ( First motion. ) Raise the piece and extend t&e
right arm, seize it with the left hand above the lock^ ca^-rj
TOSITIOK OF THS SOXDrRB. "31
tlie piece Jip:ainst the left shoulder, turning the barrel to
the front, (in turning place the thumb of the right hand
on the S plate, fingers extended, cock resting on the fore-
finger as indicated in Xa. 141,) the right hand being at the
small of the stock, place the left hand under the bult.
178. (Stdftid motion.) L«t the r^ht hand fall by the
fide.
Arms — At Will.
One f»o(io».
175. Carry the piece at pleasure on either tSiomlder, wit"k
one or both hands, the muzzle elevated.
Sh<nild-er— Av.iS£. •
180. Retake the position of ahoidder arms,
Armn — Port.
181. Throvf the piece diagouaUy across the body, the
lock to the front, seize it smartly at the same time with,
both hands, the right at the small ef the stock, the left at
the tail band, the thumbs pointing towards the muzzle, the
barrel sloping upwards and crossing opposite to the point
of the loft shoulder, the butt proportionately lowered ; the
palm of the right haad abore, tliat of the Mt under the
piece, and the nails of both hands next to the body, t©
vrhich the elbows will be clased.
Sim iildrcr — A R MS,
On« time and two motions.
182. ( First motion. ) Bring the piece smartly to the left
shoulder, place the left hand quickly under the butt, th«
fingers of the right hand under the cock and extended a4
in No. UL
■->-i POSITION OF TXTK SOLrHETt.
183. {Serond motion.) Drop the right hand sm.irtiv hy
the sido.
7b Ground Arm^.
184. The se(_uad being at ordered arms, if the instructor
Irish tbe piece to be placed on the ground, he will command;
Ground — Arms.
It
One time and two motions.
185. {First motion.) Turn the piece with the right hand,,
the barrel to the left, at the same time seiz'e the cartridge
box with left hand, bend the bodv, advance the,left foot,
the heel opposite the lower band ; laj the piece on the-
ground with the right hand, the toe of the butt on a line
with the right toe, the knee slightly bent, the right heej
raised.
186. (Second motion.) Rise up, bring the left foot by
the side of the right, quit the c?*rtridge box with tbe left
hand, and drop the bands by the side.
Maise — Akms.
187. Seize the cartridge box with the left hand, bend
the body, advance the left foot opposite tbe lower band,
and seize the piece with tfl*e right hand.
188. liaise the piece, bringing the left foot by the side of
the right ; turn the piece with the right ham}, the rammer
to the front; at the same time quit the cartridge box with
the left hand, and drop this hand by the side.
7o Sfock Arms,
189. The squad bring in two ranks at order arms, the
mstructov will command i
ras7TT0N OF TiiK &ni,rwj%v. 2.»
Stack — Arms.
100. At this commaiHl, the front rank man of crory
even numbered file will jjasp his jjicce before liini, seizing'
it with the left hand above the middle band, and place the
butt outsidd and near theleftfoot, the barrel turned to the?
front, the ifiuzzle opposite the rifjht shoulder. At the
same titnc the front rank man of ercry odd numbered file
■nill pass his piece before him, seizing it with the left hand
below the middle band, and hand it to the man next on the
left) the latter will receive it with the rig^ht hand two
inches above the middle band, throw the butt about thirty-
two inches to the front, opposite to his right shoulder, in-
clining the muzzle towards the right shoulder, and lock
the shanks of the two bayonets, the barrel remaining to
the rear ahd its shank above that of the first piece. The
tear sank man of every even file projects his bayonet for-
ward, the barrel to the right, and introduces it (usingboth
hands) between the muzzles and under the shanks of the
two other bayonets. He will then abandon the piece to
his file leader, who will receive it with the right hand un-
der the middle band, bring the butt to the front, holding
up his own piece and the stack with the left hand, ami
place the butt of this third piece bctwccr. the feet of the
man next on his right, the barrel to the right. The sCack
thus formed, the rear rank man of every odd file will pass
his piece into his left hand, the barrel turned to the front,
and, sloping the bayonet forward rest it on the stack.
li)l. ^Yhen organized coiypanies stack arms, the ser-
geants, (and also the corporals, if in the rank of file
closers,) will rest thoir pieces against ttie stacks nearest
them respectively, after ranks are broken and resume thevf
pieces on i':.v sisMial to ■>•' fi-u-in CKiik'--.
'^i POSITION OP THK SOLDTBH.
" 192. The nien of both ranks haring assumed ihe position
of the soldier without arms, the instructor noaj give the
command :
2. Break rank*. 2. Maroh.
193. The instructor Tiavlng; reformed tLe ranks wiil
command : '
Take — Arms,
194. At this command the rear rank man of every odd
file will withdraw his piece from the stack; the front rank
Hian of ever J even file will seize his own piece with the
left hand, and that of the man on his right with his right;
ihe rear rank man of every even file will seize his piece
with the right hand at the middle band, advancing for tke
purpose the hollow of the right f«ot as far as the right
heel of the file leader; these two men will raise *up the
stack to loosen tha sfeanks ; the front rank man of every
odd file receives his piece from the hand of the man next
on the left, and the four men retake the position of the
Boldier at order arms.
195. The instructor having brotight the mea to the posi-
tion of shoulder arms, will command :
Reverse — Arms-
Otie time and tito motions,
196. {First rAotiGn.) Grasp ike piece with tiae right
hand, the finger nail to the front, at the height of the
shoulder, turn the piece to the right and front of th® body,
and bring it reversed under the left arm, the barrel slop-
ing to the rear ; at the same time, slip the left hand to the
•gmall of the stock grasping it with the finger nails up.
P08ITI0X OF TnK SOT-DIBB. 3S
197. {Second motion.) Remove and -carry briskly the
right hand to the rear of the body, and with it grasp
the piece between the middle and lower bands, the finger
nails outwards.
Shoulder — Arms.
One time and ttco madotia.
198. (Fir et motion.) Bring the right hand briskly to
the front and with it grasp the piece at the swell of the
Slock, the finger nails inward; at the same time slip the
left hand to the butt and invert the piece with both han(I»
bringing it in front of the body, to the shoulder, and slip-
ping the right hand, let it fall to the hammer.
199. {Second motion. ) Drop the right hand by the side-
Jieat on — Arms.
One tivte (tnd two motions.
200. {First motion.) Grasp the piece at the height o
the shoulder with the right hand, the finger nails to tho
front, reverse it by turning it to the right in front of tho
body, let the muzzle rest on the left foot, the left hand rest-
ing on the butt.
201. {Second mofi&n.) Ilemore quickly the rigf^lit hand
to the butt and let it rest there, the finger nails outward ;
at the same time bow the head and bend the right knee.
[I^eynark.] (This movement is rarely used ezcept in
funeral ceremonies, Ac. )
Shoulder — Arms.
One time and ttco motions.
202. {First motion.) Drop the right hand, and with it
seize the piece at the swell of the stock, with both hands^,
3G rOSliluN OF TllH SOLDIEK.
(the left depressed and the right raised,) turn tlie piece in
front of the bod^^, bringing- it against the shoulder, and
slipping the right hand let it fall to the hammer.
203. {Second motion.) Drop the righthand bj the side.
Indirection of jlmis.
204. The men being nt orderod arms, and having the
bayonet in the scabbard, the instructor will command:
Inspection — AuMS.
One time and three motions.
205. {First motion.) Face to the right once and a half
e arryicg the right foot perpendicular to the allignmcnt,
about six inches from, and at right angles Mith the left,
foot; seize promptly'' the peice with the left hand a little
above the middle band, incline the muzzle to the rear with"
"out displacing the heel of the butt, the rammer turned
towards the body ; carrj'ing at the same time the right hand
to the baj'onet as indicated in /?.» hayonet.
206. {Second motion.) Draw the bayonet from the
scabbard, carry and fix it on the muzzle; seize next the
rammer, draw it-as explained in the fifth time of loading
(see Z)raH-— Rammer, Xos. 217, 218, 219.) and let it glide
to the bottom of the boi-e.
207. ( Third motion. ) Face promptly to the front, seize
' the peice with the right hand and retake the position of
order Mrm!*.
208. The insti'uctor will then inspect, in sviccession, the
piece of enfh man, in passing along the front of the rank.
Each as thi' insti'uctor roaches him will laise smartly his
piece v.'ith kis right hand^ seize it with the left near the
I'UtilJlON (IK TUB SULL>n-,lt. 0/
lower band, the lock to the front, the loft hand at the
height of the chin, the piece opposite to the left eye; the
instructor will take it with the right hand at the handle,
and after inspectinfj it, -will return it to the recruit, who
will receive it back with the right band and replace it ia
the position of order arms.
209. When the instructor shall have passed him, each
man will take the position prescribed in No. 203, return
the rammer as explained in the seventh time of loading;,
(sec ii'e/!n-»— Rammer, Nos. 221, 222, 223.)
210. If, instead ol tnitpcctioii of arms, the instructor
shall wish bayonets to be fixed, he will command:
iYx— Uayonet.
211. Take the position prescrioed in the first motion of
inspection arms. No. 203, fix bayonet and face to the front.
212. If the instructor should wish to ascertain if any
of the pieces are loaded, he will command :
6'p?*t » (7 — II A MM EU .
213. Put the rammers in the barrel as above explained,
and retake the position of order armif.
The instructor for the purpose stated, can take the
rammer by the small end, and spring it in the barrel, or
cause each man to make it ring in the barrel.
214. Each man after the instructor passes him will re-
turn rammer and resume the position of order arms.
Jiejitark. [The compiler would caution oflicers against
striking the buds of the pieces against the ground to
make the rammer J^pring, as it is liable to injure tbclock.]
38 POSITION OF THE SOLDIER.
Loading and Firing.
Load in ten times.
1. Load.
Two motions.
215. {First motion.) Drop the piece by a full exten-
sion of the left arm, seize it with the right hand above
and near the tail band ; at the same time carry the right
foot forvrard, the heel against the hollow of the left foot.
216. {Second motion.) Drop the piece with the right
band along the left thigh, seize it with the left hand at the
middle band, and with the left hand let it descend along to
the ground, without shock, the piece touching the left
thigh, and the muzzle opposite the centre of the body;
carry the right hand quickly to the cartridge box and
open it.
2. Handle — Cartridge.
One time and one motion.
217. Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next two
fingers and place it between the teeih.
3. Tear — Cartridge.
One time and one motion.
218. Tear the paper down to the powder, hold the cart-
ridge upright between the thumb and next two fingers,
near the top ; and in this position place it in front of and
near the muzzle, the back of the hand to the front.
4. Charge — CiRTRiDGE.
One time and one motion.
210. Fix the eye on the muzzle, turn quickly the back
POSITIOH OF THE SOLDIER. 39
Of the risht hand towards the bodj, in order to discharge
the powder into the barrel, rai.e the elbon' to the he.vtt
of he wr.st shake the cartrid<.e, force it into the muzzle
and eave the hand reversed, the fingers extended, the
thumb extended along the barrel.
5. 2>ro«?— Rammer.
One time and three motiona,
220 {Fir.t motion. ) Drop smartly the right elbow and
seize the rammer between the thumb and fore-fino-er bent
the other fingers shut; dra.v it smartly, extending the
arm; seize the rammer again at the middle, between the
thumb and fore-finger, the hand reversed, the palm to the
ront, the nails up, the eyes following the movement of
the hand; clear the rammer from the pipes bj again ex-
tending the arm.
221. {Second motion.) Turn rapidly the rammer bo-
tween the bayonet and the face, closing the fingers, (the
rammer of the roar rank man grazing the right shoulder
of the man of the same iile in front, respectively,) the
rammer parallel to the bayonet, the arm extended, the
butt of the rammer opposite to the muzzle, but not yet
inserted, the eyes fixed on the muzzle.
222. {Third motion.) Insert the butt of the rammer
and force it down as low as the hand.
6. i?a»i— Cartridge.
One time and one motion.
223. Extend the arm to its full length to seize the ram-
mer between the right thumb extended and the fore-fin-
ger bent, the other fingers closed ; with force ram home
twice, (the right elbow down and near the piece,) and
40 POSITION OP THE SOLDIER.
seize the ramuier at the little end, between the thumb and
fore-finger bent, the other fingers closed, the right elbow
touching the body.
7. Return — Rammeu.
One time and three motions.
224. {Fir $t motion.) Draw briskly the rammer, re-seize
the middle bet tveen the thumb and fore-finger, the hand
reversed, the palm to the front, the nails up, the eyes fol-
lowing the movement of the hand, clear the rammer from
the barrel by extending the arm.
225. [Seeond motion.) Turn rapidly the rammer be-
tween the bayonet and face, closing the fingers, (the ram-
mer of the rear rank man grasing the right shoulder of
the man of the same file in front,) tho rammer parallel to
the bayonet, the arm extended, the little end of the ram-
mer opposite to the first pipe, but not yet inserted. The
eyes fixed on that pipe.
226. ( Third motion.) Insert the little end, and with the
thumb, which willTollow the movement, farce it as low as
the middle band; raise quickly the right hand a little
bent, place the little finger on the butt of the rammer and
force it down, at the same instant lower the left hand on
the barrel to the extent of the arm, without depressing
the shoulder. ' •
8. Cast — About.
One time and two motions.
227. ( First motion. ) Raise the pieco with the left hand
along the left side, the hand at the hei^rht of the chin, the
fore-arm touching the piece, the bai'rel to the front; drop
at the same time tho right hand to seize the piece a little
rosmON OF THE SOLDIER. 41
above tlie pmall of tlic stock, the fore-finger touching the
lock, the thumb on the S plate, and bring the right heel
to the side of the left.
228. (Second iiio'ion.) Make a half face to the rijht on
the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, the right foot
behind and at right angles with the left, the hollow of the
right foot against the heel of the left. At the same time
seize the small of the stock with the right hand, and bring
down the piece with both hands to the position of charge
hayonet.
9. Phime.
One time and one motion. ♦
229. Sustain the piece with the left hand, (half cock the
piece,) brush ofl" the old cap and with the thumb and first
two fingers take a cap from the pouch, place it lirmly on
the cone, pushing it down with the thumb.
10. Shoidder — AuMS.
One time and ttro motions.
230. As from Charge— Bayontt. Nos. 161, 162.
To Load in Four Times.
231. The first time will be executed at the command
Load ; the three others at the words tv-o, three and four.
Load in four times— \jOkD.
222. Execute w^hat is prescribed for Load, Handle-
Cartridge, Tear — Cartridge and Charge — Cartridge.
TWO.
233. Drato — Ramm'.r and Ram — Cartridge.
42 POSITION OF THE SOLDIER.
THREE.
234. Return — Rammer and Castr— About.
FOUR,.
235. Prime and Shonldar — Arms.
To Load At Will.
236. The instructor wishing the men to execute the load-
ing without pause, will command.
Load at Will — Load.
237. At the command load, the men will execute the
loading as in four times, but without resting on the times.
Ready.
One time and four motions.
238. {First motion.) Make a half face to the right on
the left heel, bring the left toe to the front, place at the
same time the right foot behind, and at right angles with
the left, the hollow of the right'foot against the left heel ;
turn the piece with the left hand, the lock outwards, and
seize at the same time the small of the stock wiWi the right
hand, the piece perpendicular, and detached from the
shoulder; leave the left hand under the butt.
239. {Second^motion.) Bring the piece with the right
hand to the middle of the body, place the left hand just
above the lock, the thumb extended on the stock at the
height of the chin, the S plate almost turned towards the
body, the rammer obliquely to the left and front.
240. ( Third motion.) Place the thumb on the hammer,
the fore-tinger under and on the guard, the other three
fingers joined to the first, the elbow at the height of the
wrist.
POSITION OF THK SOLDIKR. 43
241. ( Fourth motion. ) Close the right elbow smartly to
the body in cocking, seize the piece at the small of the
stock, lot it descend along the body in the left hand to
the tail bind, which will remain at the height of the
shoulder, and opposite the centre of the body.
Aim.
One time and one motion.
242. Drop smartly the muzzle, the left hand remaining
at the tail band, support the butt against tkc right should-
er, the left elbow a little down, shut the left eye, direct
the right along the barrel, drop thr head upon the butt to
catch the object, and place the fore-finger on the trigger.
243. The rear rank will, at the same time, carry the
right foot about eight inches towards the left heel of the
man next on the right.
FiRB.
One time and one motion.
244. Apply the fore-fingor with force to the trigger,
without further lowering or turning the head, and remain
in that position.
245. The instructor wishing the men to load, rom this
position, will command :
Load.
One time and one motion.
246. {First motion. ) Bring back the piece quickly with
both hands, the rear rank man bringing the right foot be-
side the left; depress the butt strongly by extending the
right arm, and carry it with the arm thus extended to the
left side, the barrel turned to the front, and opposite the
44 POSITION OF THE SOLDIER.
left shoulder, open the left hand to let the piece slide
through it to the middle hand, the back of the hand to
the front, the left fore-arm touching the stock ; at the
same time face to the front, and cari'y the right foot for-
ward, the heel against the hollow of the left foot.
247. {Second motion.) Quit the hold of the right hand ;
with the left hand remaining at the middle hand, let the
piece descend to the ground, without shock, and take the
position of the second motion of the first time of loading.
248. The men being in the position of Fire, and the in-
structor wishing them to come to the position of Shoulder
— Arms, will command :
Shoulder — Aems.
One time and tico motions.
249. (First motion.) Bring back the piece with both
hands, face to the front, carry the piece to the left shoulder,
the right hand under the cock in the position as prescribed
in No. 141, the left hand under the butt.
250. (Second motion.) Let fall smartly the right hand
into position.
251. The men being in the position of Aim, if the in-
structor wishes, he may command :
Recover — Arms.
One time and one motion.
252. At the word recover, Avithdraw the finger from the
trigger; at the command Arms, thi-o^v up smartly the
muzzle, and re-take the position of tlie fourth motion of
ready.
253. The men being in the position of rcacZv// the in-
structor will command;
POSITION OF THE SOLPIER. 45
Shonliler — Arms.
One time and one motion.
254. At the word ShoMcr, face to the front, hv'ing the
piece to the middle of the bodj; the left thumb at the
height of the chin, the piece supported by the left hand,
holding it fast above the lock ;. next place the righnhunib,
on the head of the cock, support tho fore-linger on the
trigger, sustain at the same time the cock in its descent
till it nearly touches the cone, raise the cock to the half
cock notch, (the reachino- of which will be both felt and
heard,) and seize the hamrlc of the i>iece, (or small of the
stock,.) with the right hand. At the word Armn, carry
the pi.ece smartly to tlic shoulder, and re-take the position
of shoulder — arms.
The Firing.
255. The firings arc direct or oblique, and \tili be exe-
cuted as follows :
The Direct Fire.
IftC. For the direct fire the instructor will command.
1. Fire hrj Spiad. 2. Sqnad. 3. Ready. 4. Aim. 5.
Fire. 6. Load^
257. These several commands will be executed as Iras
been prescribed in the Mannal of Arms.
258. At the fourth command they will aim according to
the rank in which each man may find himself placed, the
rear rank men inclining forward a little tlie upper part of
the body, in order that their pieces may reach as much
bej-ond tlie front rank as possible.
259. At the sixth command, they will load their pieces
and return immediately to the position of ready.
46 POSITION OF THG SOLDIER.
260. The instructor Trill re-commence the firing by the
commands;
1. Squad. 2. Aim. 3. Fire. 4. Load.
261. When the instructor wisnes the firing to cease, he
will command ;
Cease— Firing.
262. At this command the men will cease firing, hut will
load their pieces if unloaded, and afterwards bring them to
a shoulder.
The Oblique Fire.
263. The oblique firings will be executed to the right
and left, and by the same commands as the direct fire, with
this single difference — the command Aim, will always be
preceded by the caution, right or left oblique.
Posiiion. of the Ranks, in ihe Oblique Fire to the
Right.
264. At the command ready, the two ranks will execute
what has been prescribed for the direct fire.
265. At the cautionary command, right oblique, the two
ranks will throw back the right shoulder and look steadily
at the object to be hit.
266. At the command Aim, each front rank man will
aim to the right without deranging his feet ; each rear
rank man will advance the left foot about eight inches to-
wards the right heel of the man next on the right of his
file leader, and aim to the right, inclining the upper par
of the body forward, and bending a little the left knee.
267. At the command load, both ranks will resume the
position of load, in the fire direct.
POSITION OP THE SOLS>Icn. 41
Position of the Ranks in the Ohlique Ffre to tke
Left
268. At the command left ahliqne, the two ranks wil
throw back tbe left shoulder, and look tteadily at the ob-
ject to be hit
269. At the command aim, the front rank will take aim
to the left without deranging the feet; each man in the
rear r&nk will advance the right foot about eight inches
towards the right heel of the man next on the right of his
file leader, and aim to the left, inclining the upper part of
the body forward, and bending a little <be right knee.
270. At the command load, both ranks will come to the
position of load as prescribed in the direct lire.
To Fire by File,
271. The fire bj file, will bo executed by the two ranks,
the files of wliicb will fire successively, and without wait-
ing on each other, except for the first fire.
272. The instructor will command :
1. Fire by file: 2. Squad. 3. Ready. 4. Conwicnce —
Firing.
273. At tbe third command, the two ranks will take tbe
position prescribed in tbe direct fire.
274. At the fourth command, the file on the right will
aim and fire, the men together, the rear rank man, in tak-
ing aim, will carry the right foot about eight inches to the
right.
275. The second file will aim at the instant the first
brings down the pieces to re-load ; and each file successive-
ly on to the left.
-IS rosi-TIOX OF TUB SOi,DlEIl.
276. After ?he first fire, every man will load and fire
without waiting for the others.
277. The instructor wishing the Are to eease, will coiu-
Qiand:
Cease— FiuiNa.
278. At this command the men will cease firing. If they
have fired, they will load their pieces and biing them to
a shoulder ; if at the position of ready, they wiH half cock
and shoulder- arms. It in the position of Ami, they will
bi'iHg down their pieces, half cock and shoulder arms-
To Fire hy Rank.
■279. The fire by rank will be executed by each cntii"c
rank, alternately.
280, The inst]'uctor will coraman-d :
1. Fire l>Tf rank. 2. Squad. 3. Heady, 4. Ecar raulc
5, Aim- 6. Fire, 7. Load.
281. At the third command, both ranks Avili take the po-
sition of ready.
282, At the seventh comm.and, th^^ rear rank will load
and come to the position of ready.
283. As soon as the instructor shall see several men in
the rear rank in the position of ready, ho will command :
1. Front-rank. 2. Aim. 3. Fire, 4. Load,
284. At these commaads, the men in the front rank v.- ill
execute what has been presci'ib6,d lor the rear ra.nk, but
will not step off with the right foot.
285, The instructor will thus continue to alternate the
fire from rank to raAik, until he shall wish the firing to
ceas',^, whfii he will command cease yirm^, which will be
e^iccuted as heretofore prescribed.
THE COMPANY.
PART SECOND
2'Ae Formation of the Company.
286. The company being assembled on its ground, will
be formed in two ranks, b}' the first serfjeant, who will
command : *
Fall In.
287. At which command the rank and file, (corporals
jind privates,) will form in two ranks faced to the right,
the tallest corporal on the, right, (or head of the com-
pany,) the two tallest men next, and so on down to tho
jcft or rear of the rank.
•288. This having been accomplii:»hed, the first sergeant
will command :
• FHONr.
289. At this command the company will face to the
front; the command Right — Dress, will then be given,
which will be executed as'has been jirescribed ; the men
keeping their etjes right until the command front,
290. The company should fall in at a support arms, and
if the roll is called, each man as he answi rs to his name,
will first bring his jiiece to a shoulder, and then to an ojv
der ar}ni>.
291. This being done the fust sergeant will bring (^9
company to a shoulder, and command ;
ifjj SCHOOL or THE COMPAKJ'.
292. At this command the men count in each rank from
light to left, pronouncing in aloud and distinct voice, in
the same tone, without hurry, and without turning the
head, o«c, two, according to the place which each one
«!ccupies.
293. He will then divide the company into two equal
j^atoons, and each plat6on into two equal sections, place
the corporals in position in the front rank, on the right
and left of platoons, and report to the captain the forma-
^ tion of the company.
294. The otficers and sergeants will now take their posts
a? follows :
295. The captain in the front rank on the rjght of the
company, touching with the left elbow.
296. The Jirst h'eM/enajii two paces in rear of and opposite
the centre of the fourth section.
297. The second lieutenant two paces in rear of and op-
posite the centre of the first platoon.
298- The third lieutenant two paces in rear of and op-
posite the centre of the second platoon.
299. The Jirst sergeant in the rear rank and covering
the captain. He is denominated the cohering sergeant, or
right guide of the company.
300. The second sergeant two paces in rear of and op-
posite the second file from the left of the company. lie is
designated as left guide of the company.
301. The third sergeant two paces in rear of and opposite
the second file from the right of the second platoon.
302. The/('»r^A sergeant two paces in rear of and op-
j.osite the second file from the left of the first platoon.
Z(iZ. .T\\Q fifth sergeant two paces in rear of and oppot^ite
tlie second file from Ihc right of the tirrt platoon.
hCiiooL Of rut; i ipwr. 6G
S04. Absent oflicers an(Ksergeant3 will^be re-placed —
officers by sergeants, and sergeants by corporals.*
305. The officers and sergeants thus posted in the rear
constitute the rank of closers. This rank is two paces ia
rear of the r^ar rank. •
306. The pittneer is posted on the line of file closers on
the right; and the music in aline with the front rank,
four paces on its right, the drum on the right of the tifer
or bugler.
To Open Ranhs*
3p7. The company being at ordered aims, the ranks and
, tile .closers well aligned, to open ranks, tl^e instructor will
» command: ».'
1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Shonlder-r-X'&yi^. 4. Prt-
pare to open ranks. 5. To the rear open order.
308. At the fourth command the kft guide will place
himself on the left of the front rank.
309. At the fifth command the covering sergeant and
the left guide will step off smartly to the rear, four paces
from the front rank, in order to mark the alignment of the
rear rank.
310. The instructor having observed that Uiese two
guides are on a line parallel to the front rank, will com-
mand :
G. March.
311. At this command the front rank will stand fast.
*When the captain acts as instructor, or is in indepen-
dent command of the company, the first lieutenant takes
his post, and his post in turn is filled by the second lieu-
tenant, and so on.
•
-»
S7 8CJI00L OF THK COJfFAST.
312. The rear rank will step to the rear without count-
ing the step, and will place itself on the alignment marked
out for it. "^
313. The covering sergeant will then align the rear
rank on the left guide.
314. The file closers will step off at the same time with
the rear rank, and place themselves two paces in the rear
of it when it is aligned.
315. The instructor seeing the rank aligned, will com-
mand:
7. FaoNT.
316. At this command the sergeant on the left of the
rear rank, will return to his place as a file closer. ^-
Jllignments in Open Ranks.
317. The ranks being open, the instructor will, in the
first exercises, align the ranks, man by man, the better to
iuculculate the principles.
318. To effect this he will cause two men on the right or
left of each rank to march two or three paces forward,
and after having aligned them, command :
By file right (or left) — Dkess.
319. This command will be executed as has been prescri-
bed. The instructor will also cause the men to align
themselves backward, and he will be careful to observe
^at they dress correctly, and that their arms are in proper
position.
Manudl of A^'ms.
olQ. The ranks being open, the instructor will place
^
SCHOOL or XHK COMPACT 6S
himself in a position to see the ranks, and will command
the manual of arms in the following order :*
Present Armi. Shoulder Anno,
Order Arms.
dound Arms.
Raise Arms. Shoulder Arms.
Support Arms. Shoulder Arms.
Fix Bayonet. Shoulder Arms.
Charge Bayonet. Shoulder Arms.
Trail Arms. Shoulder Arms.
Unjix Bayonet. Shoulder Arms,
Secure Arms, Shoulder ^rms.
Load in ten times.
321. To close the ranks after the execution of the
manual of arms, the instructor will command :
1. Close order. 2. March.
322. At the command march, the rear lank will close up
in quick time, each man directing himself on his file leader.
323. The company should be exercised in the manual of
arjns, loading at will, Jiring by Jile, Jiving by rank, and
directjind oblique Jiring, by company as prescribed in the
squad drill, the instructor substituting the word company
fcr squad w^hercver it occurs.
324. At the preparatory command in firing, the captain
will promptly place himself opposite the centre of hia
company, and four paces in rear of the line o! file closers ;
*The compiler would suggest to officers the practica-
bility of causing the front rank to about face, and place
themselves at one end, so that they can better see the exe-
cution of the movement by the whole company.
69 SCHOOL OF IBB COMPANY.
the covering sergeant will retire to that line, and place
himself opposite to his interval. This rule is general for
both captain and covering sergeant in all the different
firings.
To Fire hy tJie Rear Rank.
325. The instructor will cause the several fires to be
executed to the rear, that is, by the rear rank. To effect
this he will command :
\. Face by the rear rank. 2. Company. Z. Jlbout — Face.
326. At the first command the captain will step out and
place himself near to, and facing the right file of his com-
pany; the covering sergeant and file closers, will pass
quickly through the captain's interval, and place them-
selves faced to the rear, the covering sergeant a pace be-
hind the captain, and the file closers two paces fi^om the
front rank opposite their places in line, each passing be-
hind the covering sergeant.
327. At the third command, which will be given at the
instant the last file closer shall have passed through the
interval, the company will face about; the captain will
place himself in his interva,l in the rear rank, now become'
the front, and the covering sergeant will cover him in the
front rank, now become the rear.
328. Faced by the rear rank, the diflerent firings will be
executed in the manner already prescribed.
329. The fire by file will commence on the left of the
company, now become the right ; and in the fire by rank,
the firing will commence with the front rank, now become
the rear.
SCHOOL IHS COMHAHT. « (-'
330. To resume the proper front, the instructor will
command :
1. Face by the front rank. 2. Company. 3. About — Face.
331. At the first command the captain, covering ser-
geant and file closers will conform to what is prescribed in
Nos. 326, 327.
332. At the third command the companj having faced
about, the captain and covering sergeant will resume
their places in line.
To Advance in Line of Battle.
333. The company being in line and correctly aligned, to
march it b}'- the front the instructor will cause a sergeant
to take position six paces in advance of the eaptain. This
advanced sergeant, who is charged with the direction,
will take two points on the ground in the straight line to
the front to direct his course.
334. The instructor will then command :
1. Company — Forward. 2. March.
335. At the command march, the company will step off
with life. The directing sergeant will observe with the
greatest precision, the length and cadence of the step,
marching on the two points he has chosen ; he will take in
succession, and a little before arriving at the points near-
est him, new points in advance, exactly in the same line
with the first two, and at the distance of some fifteen or
twenty paces from each othei-. The captain will march
steadily in the trace of the directing sergeant, keeping al-
ways six paces from him. The men will march with the
li.'ad direct to the front, touch lightly the elbow towards
the captain, and resist pres.-ure coming- from the opposite
71 Si'HuOL V¥ lUK COMPANY,
side. The file closers will march at the habitual distance
of two paces behind the rear rank.
336. If the men lose the step, the instructor will com-
mand :
To </ie— Step.
337. At this the men will glance towards the directing
sergeant, re-take the step from him, and again direct the
eyes to the front.
338. The instructor wishing to halt the company, -will
command ;
1. Company. 2. Halt.
339. At the second command the company will halt; the
directing sergeant will remain in advance, unless ordered
to return to the line of file closers.
340. The captain will then rectify the alignment, by the
commands and according to the principles prescribed in
No. 9.
To March in Retreat.
341* The company being halted and correctly aligned,
to cause it to march in retreat, the instructor will place the
directing sergeant sis paces in rear of the line of file
closers, and in the same straigkt line with the covering
sergeants, and will then command :
1. Com-pany. 2. About — Face.
342. The company and directing sergeant having faced
to the rear, the instructor will command :
3. Co/npan?/— Forward.
343. At this command tho. covering sergeant will step
into the line of file closers, opposite to his inlerval. and
SCHOOL or THE COMPANY. 72
the captain will place himself in the rear rank now become
the front.
344. This disposition being promptly made, the instruc-
tor will command :
4, March.
345. At this the directing sergeant, the captain and the
men will conform themselves to what has been prescribed
in No. 335.
346. The instructor will cause to be executed, marching
in retreat, all that has been prescribed for marching in ad-
vance; the commands and the means of execution will be
the same.
Ohllqi\e March in Line of Buttle.
347. The company being in the direct march, when the
instructor shall wish to cause it to march obliquely, he
will command :
1. RigJit (or left) oblique. 2. March.
848. At the command march the company will take the
oblique step, and execute the movement as prescribed in
No. 53.
349. In the oblique march the men not having the touch
of elbows, the guide will always be on the side to which
the oblique is maae, without any indication to that effect
being given, and when the direct march is resumed, the
guide will be, equally without indication, on the side where
it was previous to the march.
350. When the instructor shall wish the direct march to
be resumed, he will command .
1. Forvnrd. 2. March.
73 SCHOOL OF THB COMPANT.
351. At the command march the company will resume
the direct step. '^
352. The instructor should now exercise the company in
the following commands^ according to the principles pre-
scribed in squad drill :
1. Mark Time. 2. Mabch.
1. For tear d. 2. March.
1. Common Time. 2. March.
1. Double Quick, 2. March.
1. Quick Time. 2. March.
1. Change Step. 2. March.
1. Right About. 2. Ma ich.
1. liight About. 2. Halt.
353. When the company is inarching in the double quick,
the pieces should be carried at a right shoulder shift arms
or a trail arms, and the distance between the ranks should
be twenty-six inches.
354. When the pieces are carried on the right shoulder,
in quick time, the distance between the ranks should be
sixteen inches.
355. Whenever the company is halted, the men will
bring their pieces at once to a shoulder at the command
halt; and the rear rank will close up to its proper distance
of thirteen inches. These rules are general.
To March hy the Flanh.
356. The company being in line of battle, and at a halt,
when the instructor shall wish to cause it to march by the
right flank, he will command :
1. Company right — Face. 2. Forward — March.
3a7. At th» first command, the company willfacsr to th«
SOBOOL or XJiK (.'0H1«1.N"Y. (4
right, the covering sergeant will place himself at the bead
of the front rank, the captain having stepped out for the
purpose, so far as to find himself by the side of the ser-
geant, and on his left ; the front rank will dot ble as is
prescribed in Xo. 77 ; the rear rank will, at the same time,
side step to the right one pace, and double i» the same
manner so that when the movement is completed, the files
will be formed of four rnen aligned, and elbow to elbow.
The intervals will be preserved.
358. The file closers will also juove by side step to the
right, so tha» when the ranks are formed, thej will be two
paces from the rearmost rank.
359. At the command march, the company will move oflf
briskly in quick time ; the covering sergeant at the head
of the front rank, and the captain on his left, will march
straight forward. The men of each file will march abreast
of their respective front lank men, heads direct to the
front ; the file closers will march opposite their places in
line of battle.
360. The instructor will cause the march by the loft flank
to be excuted by the same commands, substituting left for
right; the ranks will double as has been prescribed in
No. 83, the rear rank will side step to the left one pace
before ioubling.
361. At the instant the company faces to the left, the
left-guide will place himself at the hsad of the front rank;
the captain will pass rapidly to the left, and place hiniself
by the right side of this guide; the covering sergeant will
replace the captain in the front rank, the moment the
latter quits it to go to the left.
362. Should the instructor wish to face the company
75 scuoot or thb compast.
to the right or left, without doubling files, be will com-
mand :
Compani/, in two ranks, right (or left) — Face.
362. At which command, the company will face to the
right or left, without doubling.
To Change Direction hj File.
263. The company being facod by .he flank, and either
in march, or at a halt, when the instructor shall wish to
cause it to wheel by file, he will command :
1. By file left {or right.) 2. March.
365. At the command march, the first file will wheel ;
if to the side of the front rank man, the latter will take
care not to turn at once, but to describ e a short arc of a cir-
cle, shortening a little the first five or si* steps in order to
give time to the fourth man of this file to conform himself
to this movement. If the wheel be to the side of the rear
rank, the front rank man will wheel in the step of twenty-
eight inches, and the fourth man will conform himself to
the movement by describing a short arc of a circle, as has
been explained.
3^6. Each file will come to wheel on the same ground
when that which preceded it wheeled.
367. When the company is marching by the flank and
the instructor wishes to halt it and face it to the front, he
will command :
1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front.
368. The second and third commands will be executed as
has been prescribed in No. 81, 82, 83. As soon as the files
have undoubled, the rear rank will close to its proper dis'
lance.
SBnOOL OF THE COMPANY. ' 7$
369. The captain and covering sergeant, as well as the
left guide, if the march be by the left flank, will return to
their habitual places in line at Uie instant the company
faces to the front.
370. The instructor may then rectifiy the alignment hw
the means prescribed.
371. The company being in march by the flank, to form
it on the right (or left) by file into line of battle, the in-
structor will command :
1. On tJie right, bi/ file into line. 2. March,
:^72. At the command march, the rear rank men doubled,
will mark time, the captain and covering sergeant will
turn to the right, march straight forward, and be halted
hy the instructor, when they shall have passed at least
six paces beyond the rank of tile closers ; the captain will
place himself correctly on the line of battle, and will direct
the alignment as the men of the front ranfc successively
arrive ; the covering sergeant will place himself behind
the captain at the dis'anee of the rear rank; the two men
on the right of the front rank doubled, will continue to
march, and passing beyond the covering sergeant and the
captain, will turn to theright,- after turning, they wili
continue to march elbow to elbow, and direct themselves
toward the line- of battle, but ^vhen they shall arrive at
two paces from this line, the even number will shcrtcn the
step so that the odd number may precede him on the line,
the odd number placing himself by the side and on the
left of the captain ; the even number will afterwards ob-
lique to the loft, and place himself on the left of the odd
number; the next two men of the front rank doubled.
7^ .SLUOOL Of IHK DOM PAS r,
will i^ass in the same manner behind the two first, turn
then to the right, and place themselves according to the
means just explained, to the left and by the side of the
two men already established on the line of battle ; the re-
maining files of this rank will follow in succession, and be
formed to the left in the same manner.
373. The i-ear rank doubled will execute the movement
in the manner already explained for the front rank, taki-ng
care not to commence the movement until four men of the
front rank are established on the line ; the rear rank men
as they arrive on the line, will cover accurately their file
leaders.
374. If the company be marching by the left flank, and
the instructor wishes to cause it to form by file on the left
into line of battle, he will command r
1. On the left, hy file into line. 2. March.
375. At the second command, the same movements will
be made to the left ; in this case the odd numbers wilf
shorten the* step, so that the even numbers may
precede them on the line. The captain, placed on the left
of the front rank, and the left guide, will return to their
places in line of battle, by order of the instructor, after
the corapany shall be formed and aligned.
376. The instructor should at first cause this movement
to be executed separatelj^ by each rank doubled, and after-
wards by the two ranks united and doubled. He should
also place himself on the line cf battle, and without the
point where the right or left is to rest, in order to estab-
lish the base of alignment, and afterward will assure him-
self that each file conforms itself to what has just been
5)rosLcrihcd.
377. If the company be marchipg by the right flank,
and the instructor should wish to undouble the files, whick
inight sometimes be found necessary, he will cause arms to
OQ shouldered or supported, and command :
1. In I ICO ranks, undouhle files. 2. March.
^78. At the second command, the odd numbers will con-
tinue to march straight forward, the even numbers will
shorten the step, and obliquing to the left will place them-
selves promptly behind the odd numbers; the rear rank
will gain a step to the left so as to retake the touch of
elbows on tJie side of the front rank.
;;7y. If the company be marching by the loft flank., it
u-ill be the evoa numbers who will ci^ntinuc to march for-
ward, and the odd numbers who will undouble.
380. If the iustiuctor should wish to double the files, he
will command :
], In four ranks, doiihle fUn^ 2. Maiich.
■m. At the command mavdi, the files will double in the
iuanner as explained, when the company faces bv the ric^hi
or left flank. ' "
382. The instructor should also cause these movement
to be executed in double quick time.
Movements in Column.
383 The company being in n^.arch bj the right flank,
and the instructor wishing to form into line, mil command,
1. % compaay into line. 2. March.
384. At the command march, the covering-sergeant will
continue to march straight forward ,• the men will ad.anc.
th. nght shoulder, take the double quick step, and moT.
70 SCHOOL or THE COilfAAT.
into line by the shortest route, taking care to uadowbie
the files, and to come on the line one after the other.
385. As the front rank men successively arrive into line
with the covering sergeant, thej will take from him the
step, and then turn their ejos to the front.
386. The men of the rear rank will conform to the move-
ments of their respective file leaders, but without endea-
Toring to arrive in line at the same time with the latter.
387. At the instant the movement begins, the instructor
will face the company and observe the execution ; and as
soon as the company is formed, he Mill command, guideJeft.
388. At the cemmand guide left, the second sergeant
will promptly place himself in the front rank, on the left,^
lo serve as guide, and the covering sergeant who is on the
opposite flank, will remain there.
389. When the company is in march by the left flank,
this movement will be executed according to the same
principles and by the same commands. The company being
formed, the captain will command, guide right ;. the cover-
ing sergeant, who is on right of the front rank, will
serve as guide, and the second sergeant placed on the left
flank will remain there. *
390. Thus in column by C()mp.any, right or left in front,
the covering sergeant and the second sergeant of each
company, will always be placed on the right and left, re-
spectively, of the front rank, and they will be denominat-
ed right guide and left guido, and the one or the other
charged with the direction.
391. The company being in march by the flank, and the
instructor wishing to form platoons, he will command :
1. By jjlaioon into line, 2. 3Iakcii.
SCnOOi. OF THE CUMPANT. 80
392. This movement will be executed by each platoon
according to the above principles. The captain will prompt-
ly place himself before the centre of the first platoon, and
the first lieutenant before the centre of the second, and
command, without waiting for each other — guide left (or
right) as soon as the platoons are formed.
393. At the command, guide left {or right), the guide of
each platoon will pass rapidlj- to the flank indicated, if
not already tb«ro.
394. The right guido of the company will always serve
39 the guide of the right or left of the first platoon, and
the left guide of the company will serve, in like manner,
as the guide of the second platoon.
395. Thus in a column, by platoon, there will be but one
guide to each platoon, and he will always be placed on the
jeft flank, if the right is in front, and on the right flank if
the left is in front.
396. In these movements, the file closers will follow the
platoons to which they are attached.
397. The instructor should exercise the company in pas-
sing, without a halt, from the march to the front to the
march by the flank, and reciprocally, and in either case he
will command.
1. Company by the right (or left) fiotk. 2. March
398. At the command march, the company will face to
the right or left, as is prescribed in No. 88, and the cap-
tain, file closers and guides will conform themselves to
what has been prescribed for each, in the march by the
flank, or the front,
^99, If after facing to the right or lefi. ia- niarrhing, th";-
SI SCHOOL tf? THfci COMPASr.
company find itself faced by the rear rank, the captarn
"svill place hiinstdf two paces behind the centre of the front
lank, now tiio rear, the guides vs ill pass to the rear rank,
now leadinfj, and the file closers will march in front of this
rank.
400. Wlien the company i.s marching in column by pla-
toon, right in front, and the instructor wishes to march it
by the flank in the same direction, he will command :
1. Column, hy the right jlank. 2, By file left. 3. March,
401. At the second command, each chief of platoon and
its guide, will pass rapidly to the right flank, to conduct it.
402. At the command march, each platoon will face to
the right in marching, wheel by file to the left, and then
march straight forward ; the leading file of the second pla-
toon will unite with the rear file of the first , the chief and
guide of the second will pass through the interval to their
places as file closers.
403. When the left is in front, the movement wili be
executed by inverse means, substituting in the command,
lefi fov ricjh', and rif/ht fov left. The captain, (if a hall
he will not irumediately commanded), will replace the first
lieutenant and conduct the left flank, and the covering
sergeant wili return to his place on the right fl ink now be.
come the rear.
404. The company being at a halt, in line of battle, the
Instructor, wishing to break it into column, by pLitoon to
,the right, will command t
1. l',y lAatoon, right u-heel. 2. MaRch.
403, At th.3 first command, the chiefa of platoon will
rapidly pluc'-j ihemselves two paces before tha centre* •(
their respectire platoons, the lieutenant parsing around
The left of the company. Ther need not occupy theni-
i-elves with dressing one upon the other. The coveriug^
sergeant will replace the captain in the front rank.
406- At the command march, the right front rank man
of each platoon will face to the right, the covering ser-
geant standing fast ; the chief of each platoon will movo
quickly by the shortest line, a little beyond the point at
which the marching flank will rest when the wheel shall
be completed, face to the late rear, and place himself so
that the line wljich he forms with the msn on the right
(who had faced) shall be perpendicular to that occupied by
the coiupan}' in line of battle; each platoon will wheel ac
cording to the principles prescribed for tho wheel on a
fixed pivot, and when the man who conducts the marching
flank shall approach near to the peri>endicul!ir, its chief
will command :
1. Platoon. 2. Halt.
407. At the command halt, which will hv given at the
instant the' man who conducts the marching flank shall
have arrived at three paces from the perpondicular, the
platoon will halt; the covering sergeant will move to the
point where the left of the first platoon is to rest, passing
b}' the front rank ; the second -«ergeaut will place himser
in like manner, in regard to the second platoon. Each
will take care to leave between himself and tho man on the
right of his platoon, a space equal to its front ; the cap-
tain and first lieutenant will look to this, .and each take
care to align the sergeant between himself and the man af
the platmm who had faced to the right.
83 SCHOOL or THH COilPAXt,
408. The guide of each platoon, being thus established
on the perpendicular, each chief will place himself two
paces outside of his guide, and facing towards him, will
command :
409. The alignment being ended, each chief of platoon
will command Fuoxr, and place himself two paces before
its centre.
410. The file closers will conform themselves to the
movements of their respective platoons, preserving always
the distance of two paces from the rear rank.
411. Should the instructor wish to break by platoon to
the left, he will execute it according to the same principles
and by inverse means, and will give the following com-
mands :
1. Bi/ platoon left wheel. 2. MARCH. 3. Platoon. 4. Halt.
5. Right — Dress. 6. FROiJT.
Post of Officers in Column.
412. In column hy company the captain is two paces in
front of the centre of his company ; the first sergeant on
the right of the front rank, and is the right guide of the
company ; the second sergeant on the left of the front
rank, and is the left guide of the company.
413. In cohimn by platoon the captain commands the
first platoon, the first lieutenant the second platoon ; each
two paces in front of the certre of his platoon; the first
sergeant is the guide of the first platoon ; the second ser-
geant is the guide of the second platoon ; they will be, un-
less otherwise ordered, on the left of the front rank of
their respective platoons, if the column is right in front,
aoi oa th2 ri^^bt, if tb? left is in front.
kMiiiDl. OF THE COMPANT, 64
414. In column by section the captain commands the
first section ; the first lieutenant the third; the second
lieutenant the second ; the third lieutenant the fourth ;
each two paces in front of his section ; the first sergeant
is guide of the first section, the second sergeant is guide of
the fourth ; the third is guide of the third ; and the
fourth is guide of the second ; each on the left front rank
of his section, if the column be right in front, and on the
right if the left be in front.
415. In column b}' company, platoon or section, the file
closers not otherwise provided for, are in their proper
places behind the rear rank of their respeotire sub-divi-
sions.
To March in Column.
316. The company having broken by platoon, right (or
left) in front, the instructor wishing to cause the column
to march, will command :
1. Column forward. 2. Guide left (or right.) 3. March.
417. At the command march, promptly repeated by the
chiefs of platoon, th*^ whole will step ofi" together.
418. The men will each feel lightly the elbow of his
neighbor toward the guide, and conform himself to the
principles prescribed in the school of the squad.
419. The man next to the guide, in each platoon, will
take care never to pass him, and also to march always
about six inches to the right (or left) from him, in order
not to push him out of the directiofl.
420. The leading guide will observe, with the greatest
precision, the length and cadence of the step, and maintain
the direction of his match by means prescribed in No. 335.
>?5 «t'HOUl, OP lUK t'CJilPASy.
421. The following guide will march exactly in the trace
of the leading one, preserving between the latter and him-
self a distance precisely equal to the front of his platoon,
and inarching in the same step with the leading guide.
422. If the following guide lose his distance from the
one leading (which can only happen by his own fault,) he
will correct himstlf by slightly lengthening oi^shortening
a few steps, in order that there may not be sudden quicken-
ings or slackenings in the march of his platoon.
423. The guide of each sub-division in column will be
responsible for the direction, distance and step.
424. The chief of each sub-division, will be responsible
for the order and conformity of his sub-division with the
movements of the guide, accordingly the chief will fre-
quently turn, in the march, to observe his sub-division.
425. In column the chiefs »f sub-divisions will always
repeat, with the greatest promptitude, the commands
march and halt; they will give no other command given by
the instructor, but may explain, if necer.sary, to their sub-
divisions, in an under tone, what they will have to exe-
cute, as indicated by the commands of caution.
To Change D'rection.
426. The changes of direction of a column while march-
ing, will be executed according to the pi-inciples prescri-
bed for wheeling on the march. Whenever, therefore, the
direction of the column is to be changed, the instructor
will change the guide^ if not already there, to the flank
opposite the side to which the change is to be made.
427. The column being in march i-ight in front, if it be
the wish of the instructor to change* direction to the right,
* SCHOOL OF IHB COMPAN V. 86
he will give the order to the chief of the first platoon, and
immediately go himself or send a marker to tlie point at
which the change of direction is to be made ; the instruc-
tor or marker will place himself on the direction of the
guides, so as to present the breast to that flank of the
column.
428. The leading guide will direct hia march on that
person, so that, in passing, his left arm may just graze hia
breast. "When the leading guide shall have approached
near the marker, the chief of the platoon will cemmand:
1. Eight icheel. 2, March.
429. The first command will be given, when the platoon
is at the distance of four paces from the marker.
430. At the com in and march, which will be pronounced
at the instant the guide shall have arriveH opposite the
marker, the platoon will wheel to the right, conforming to
what has been prescribed in the school of the squad.
431. The wheel being almost completed, the instructor
will command :
3. Forward.
432. And when the wheel is finished, he will command :
4. March.
433. At which the platoon will march straight forward
in the new direction.
434. The second platoon will continue to march straight
forward till up with the marker, when it will wheel to the
riffht, ai'd i-e-take the direct march b}- the same commands
and the same means which governed the first platoon.
435. Should the instructor wish to change the direction
to the l.eft. Via will command rfuid'! right. At lhi« covi^-
87 SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY.
mand the two guides will move rapidly to the right of
their respective platoons, each passing in front of his sub-
division ; the men will take the touch of elbows to the
right ; the instructor conforming to what has been pres-
cribed.
436. The change of direction to the left will then
be executed according to the same principles as the change
ol direction to the right, but by inverse means.
437. When the change of direction is completed, the in-
structor will command, guide left.
438. The change of direction in a column left in front,
will be executed according to the same principles.
439. Each chief will observe that his subdivision arrives
at the point of change in a square with the line of direc-
tion; with this view, he will face to his subdivision when
the one wWch precedes has commenced to turn or to
wheel, and he will be watchful that it continues to march
squarely until it arrives at the point where the change of
direction is to cpmmence.
To halt the column and to form to the right or
left into line, either at a halt or on the march.
440. The column being in march, right in front, to halt
it the instructor will command :
1 Cohimn — 2 Halt.
441. At the second command, promptly repeated by the
chiefs of platoons, the column will halt; the guides also
will stand fast, although they C'^ay have lost both distance
and direction.
442. The instructor wishiHg to lorm ii into line will
place himself at platoon distance in frent of the leading
StllOOL OF rUR COMPANT. Sft
guide, face to him and rectify, if necessary, the position
of the guide beyond J which being executed he will com-
mand :
Left — Dress.
443. At this command, which will not be repeated by
the chiefs of platoon, each of them will place himself
briskly two paces outside of his guide and direct the
alignment of the platoon perpendicularly to the direction
of the column.
444. Each chief having aligned his platoon, will com-
mand Front, and return quickly to his place in the column.
445. The instructor having seen this disposition made,
will command :
1. Left i)ito line, wheel. 2. March.
446. At the command inarch, briskly repeated by the
chiefs of p atoon, the front rank man on the left of each
platoon will face to tlie left, and place his breast lightly
against the arm of the guid - by his side, who stands fast ;
the platoons will then wheel to the left on the principles of
wheels from a halt.
447. Each chief will turn to his platoon to observe its
movements, and wht?n the marching flank of his platoon
is three paces from the line, he will command :
1. Platoon. 2. Halt.
448. The chief of the second platoon having halted it,
will return to his place as file closer, passing Iround the
left of his subdivision.
449. The captain having halted the first platoon, will
move rapidly to the j^oint at which the rig^t of the com-
pany will revt in lino of battle, und command ;
*J1 «CHt)Cr. <1P lUli COMBANY.
Right. Dress.
450. At this command, the two platoons will dress up on
the alignment.
451. The company being aligned, the captain will com-
mand :
Front.
452. The instructor seeing the company in line of battle*
will command:
Guides. Posts.
453. At this command, the covering sergeant will cover
the captain, and the left guide will return to his place as
file closer.
453. If the column be left in frorjt, and the instructor
wishes to form it to the right into line of battle, it will
be d»ne upon the same principals and bv inverse means. —
The instructor will command :
1. Right into line wheel. 2, March.
454. At the command mar^'h, the front rank man on
the right of each platoon will face to the right and
place his breast lightly against the left arm of the
guide by his side, who stands fast; each platoon will
wheel to the right, and will be halted by its chief,
when the marching flank has approached near the line of
battle ; for this purpose he will command :
1. Platoon. 2. Halt.
455. The pl^oon having halted, the chief of the second
platoon will return to hia place as file closer, and the cap-
tain will move briskly to the point at which the left of the
company is to rest? and command ; *
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. 90
Ze/V. Dress.
456. At the command, the two platoons will dress up on
the alignment; the man on the left of the second platoon,
opposite the instructor, will place his breast lightly against
the right arm of this oflicer, and the captain will direct
the alignment from the left on the man on the opposite
flank of the company.
457. The company being aligned the captain will com-
mand:
Front.
458. The instructor seeing the company in line of battle»
will command :
Guides. Posts.
459. At the command, the captain will move to the
right of his company, the coyering sergeant will cover
him, ana the left guide will return to his place as file closer.
460. If the column be marching right in front, and the
instructor should wish to form it into line without halt-
ing the column, he will give the command prescribed in
No. 444, and move rapidly to platoon distance in front of
the leading guides. _
461. At the command march, briskly repeated by the
chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt short, the in-
structor, the chiefs of platoon, and the platoons will con-
form to what has been prescribed in No. 445.
462. If the column be in march left in front, the forma-
tion will be made, according to the same principles and by
inveise means.
463. If the column be marching right in front, to form
it into line without halting, and to march the company in
line to the front, the command is :
SI SCHOOL or THE COMPAKT.
1, By lilatQonSfleft wTitel. 2. March.
464. At the command march, briskly repeated by the
chiefs of platoon, the left guides will halt; the man next
to the left guide in each platoon will mark time; the
platoons will wheel to the left ; conforming to the princi-
ples of the wheel on a fixed pivot.
465. When the right of the platoons shall arrive near
the line of battle, the instructor will command :
3. Forward. 4. March. 5. Guide right (or left.)
466. At the fourth command, given the instant the
wheel is completed, the company will move promptly
together, the captain, the chief of the second platoon,
the covBring sergeant and the left guide will take their
positions as in line of battle.
467 At the fifth command, to be given immediitely
after the fourth, the captain and covering sergeant, if not
already there, will move briskly to the side on which the
guide is designated.
468. The same principals are applicable to a column
left in front.
To break tke company into platoons.
469. The company marching right in front and suppos
ed to make part of a column, to cause it to break by pla.
toon, the instructor will command :
1. Break into platoons. 2. March.
470. At the first command, the captain will place him-
self before the centre of the first platoon and give the
caution: 1. First -platoon. 2. Forward; the first lieu-
tenant will pass quickly around the left to the centre o*^
SCHOOL OF TSB COyTAYT. 92
hifl plato«n and give the cautioH. 1. iSnond platoon. 2,
Mark time.
471. At the command march, promptlr repeated bv the
captain and first lieutenant, the first platoon will continue
to march straight forward. — the covering sergeant, as
joon as the flank is disengaged will 5hift to the left fiank of
this platoon; the second platoon will begin to mark time
and its chief will immediatel.y add 1. Right ohliqxie. 2.
March. The last command will be given so that this
platoon may commence tobliquing the instant the rear
rank of the first platoon shall have passed.
472. The men will.shorten the step in (/bliqing, so that
when the command forioard march is given, the platoon
may have its exact distance.
473. The guide of the second plato»n being near the. di-
rection of the guide of the first, the chief of the second
will command Forward, and add March the instant that
the guide of his platoon shall cover the guide of the first.
474. In a column, left in front, the company will break
into platoons by inverse means, applying to the first pla-
toon all that has been prescribed for the second and reci-
procally.
475. In this case, the left' guide of the company will
shift to the right flank of the second platoon, and the cov-
ering sergeant will remain on the right of the first.
To reform the compcniy.
476. The column, by platoon, being in march, right in
front and the instructor wishing to form it into company
will command :
1. Form company, 2, Mabch.
93 scnoOL OF the compakt.
477. At the first command, the captain will give ths
caution, 1. Firnt platoon; 2. Right oblique; the first
lieutenant will give the caution. 1. Second platoon. 2.
Foricard.
478. At the command march, promptlj repeated by tha
captain and first lieutenant, the first platoon will obligue
to the right in order to unmask the second — the covering
sergeant will return to the right of the company, and the
second will continue to inarch straight forward.
479. When the first platoon shall have nearly unmasked
the second, the captain will command : Mark time, and
at the instant the unmasking shall be complete, he
will add : 2. March. The first platoon will then cease t<>
oblique, and will mark time.
480. In the meantime the second platoon will have con-
tinued to march straight forward, and when it shall be
nearly up with the first, the captain will command, for-
toarc?, and at the instant the t^vo platoons unite, he will
add, March ; the first platoon will then cease to mark
time, the whole company stepping ofl:' together.
481. In a column left in front, the same movements will
be executed by inverse means, the chief of the second
platoon giving the command, foricard, and the captain
adding the command March, when the platoons are united.
482. The guide of the second platoon, on its right, will
pass to its left flank the moment the platoon begins to ob-
lique^ the guide of the first, on its right, remaining on
that flank of the platoon.
Being in column, to break files to the rear^ and
to cause (hem to re-enter into line.
tCnutjU tiK TJIH (;(.iVPA!<V. SI
483. The company being in march, and constituting^
part of a column, rigbt in front, the instructor will com-
mand :
1. Tuo files from left (o rear. 2, Maiich.
484. At the command march, the first two files on the
left of the- company will mark time, the others will con
tinue to march straitforvvard ; the two rear rank men of
the files will, as soon as the rear rank of the company
shall clear them, move to the right by advancing the outer
shoulder; the odd number will place himself behind the
third file from that flank, the even number behind
the fourth, passing for this purpose behind the odd num-
ber^ the two front rank men will, in like manner, move lo
the right when the rear rank of the company shall clear
them, the odd number tvill place himself behind the first
file, the eren number behind the second file, passing for
this purpose behind the odd number.
485. At the command march, the files already broken,
advancing a little the outer shoulder, will gain the spac^e
of t\vo files to the right, shortening «t the same time, the
step, in order to make room between themselves and the
rear rank of the company for the files last ordered to the
rear; the latter will break by the same commands and in
the same manner as the first. The men who double should
increase the length of the step in order to prevent dis-
tances being lost.
486; Should the instructor wish to break files from the
right, he will command :
1. Twojiles from right to rear. Maiich.
487. At the command march, the files will now move to
the left, advanciiiff the outer shoulder, thcpvi-n number of
95 sCniOOL OF THE COlIfANY.
the rear rank will place himself behind the third file, the
odd number of the same rank behind the fourth ; the eren
number of the h-ont rank behind the second, the odd num-
ber for this purpose passing behind the even numbers.
489. When the front of the company is thus dirainifhed
by breaking off successive groups of two files, the rear files
must always be broken from the same side.
490. If the instructor wish the files broken ofl' to return
into line, he will command :
1. I'lco files into line. Makch.
490. At the command march, the first ten files of those
marching by the flank, will return brisklj- into line, as the
others will gain the space of two files by advancing the
Inner shoulder towards the flank to which they belong.
491. On the same principals any number of files may
be broken ofif togher, in which case the command will be ;
I. Four or six files from left {or right) to rear. 2. Mauch.
On the same principals any number of files jnay be bro-
ken ofi' together, in which case the command will be r
1, Fiyur or six files into line. 2. Mabch,
493. As often as files shall break off to rear, the guide
on that flank will gradually clase on the nearest front rank
man remaining in line, and he will also open out to
make roomfBr files ordered into line.
494. Whenever there is on the right or left of a subdi-
vision, a file which does not belong to a group, it will be
broken off and bi'ought into line singly.
The Coulumn in Rout^.
495. The r'ompany boino; in march, and supposed to
"• £CHOOI. OF THE POMPA.VT, 'SJ
<'on3titute a part of a eoluinn, if the in3tructor wish io
tnarch it in the route step, he will command :
1. Botite step, 2. 'SIkv.cu.
496. At the command march, repeated by the captain,
the front rank will continue the step of twentj-eight inch-
es, the rear rank wiil take, by gradually shortening the
step, the distance of tvrenty-eipht inches from tlic front
rank, which distance will be computed from the breast of
Ibbe man io the rear rank to tho knapeack of the maa in the
front rank.
497. The men without further command, will immediate^
ly carry their arms at will, ^.s has been prescribed in the
school of tlie squad. They will no longer be required to
inarch in the cadence step, or with the same foot, or re-
main silent.
498. The company marching in the route step, its front
may be diminished by breaking ipto piatoons or sections,
't)y the same G.^mro^^nds, and by the same means as if the
poinpany were marching in the cadence step.
499. When tl;e corapajay br^^^':^' ijito platoons, the chief
of each will more to tbe flank of his platoon, and will
take the place of tjie guide, who will step back into tfee
rear r.ank.
&0G. As so©n tts the platoons sUalJ be bri>]ten, each chie^
flf section will place himself on its directing flank in the
front rank, and the Ifle closer will close up to within ono
pace of this rank. The moment the platoons are re-form-
ed, t )e chiefs of the left sections will rrtjjrn tp tbeir pUceai
ps til»; closera.
5.01. The f^<)iiij>;niv r»i.7i''!i:rRr in *};•' ^••M'^'^■|P/^• f<' ?'(|i!s«
i ' '
^ SCHOOL OF THE COMPANY. ^
it to paag to the cadenced step, the instructor will order
the pieces to be brought to the right shoulder, and cona-
inand :
1. Quick time. 2. March.
502. At the command march, the men will resume the
cadence step, and will close so as to leave a distance of
sixtcn inches between the rear rank and the front.
503. The company marching in the route step, the in-
structor will cause it t© change direction, which will be
executed without formal commands, en a simple caution
from the captain ; the rear rank will come up to change
direction in the same manner as the front rank.
504. Each rank will conform itself to the piinciples
prescribed for the change in close ranks with this differ-
ence only ; that in wheeling the pivot man will take steps
of fourteen inches, instead of nine, to close the wheeling
point.
505. When the company marching in the route step
shall halt, the rear rank will close up at the command halt,
ftnd the whole will shoulder arms.
Counlermaj'ch,
506. The company being at a halt, and supposed to con-
stitute part of a column, right in front, when the instruc-
tor shall wish to cause it to countermarch, he will com-
mand :
1. Countermarch. 'I. Company, right Face. 3. By file
left. 4. March.
507.- At the second command, the company will face to
the right, the two guides to the right-about ; the captain,
will go to the right of his companr and cause two files to
SCHOOI- OF THK CClM^AWT. 99
break to the rear, and then place hiin?olf by tbe side of the
front rank man row to conduct him.
508. At the command march, hoih guides will stand fast;
the company will step off smaKly ; the first file conducted
by the captain will wheel around the right guide, and di-
rect its march along the front rank so as to arrive behind,
and two paces from the left guide ; each file will come in
succession to wheel ok the same ground around the right
guide; the leading file having arrived at a point opposite
the left guide, tke captain will command:
1. Company. 2. Halt. 3. Front. 4. Right-Dii.'Ess.
509. The first command will be given at four paces
from the point where the leading file is to halt.
510. At the second command, the company will halt.
611. At the third, it will face to the front.
512. At the fourth, the captain will step two paces out-
side of ttie left guide, now on the right, and direct the
Alignment, s» that the front rank may be enclosed between
the guides ; the company being aligned he will command,
Front, and place himself before the centre of the company
tis if in column ; the guides passing along the front rank,
will shift to their proper places, on the right and left of
that rank.
513. In a column by platoon, or section, the counter-
march will be executed by the same commands, and ac-
cording to the same principles; the guide of each
, platoon, or section, will face about, and its chief will place
himself by the side of the file on the right to conduct it.
614. In a column left in front, the countermarch will be
executed by inverse commands and means but according
to the same principles. Thus the movement will be made
20U aCBOOL OV THE COMPAJSTT,
by the tigbt flank of subdivisions, if the right be in front,
and by the left flank if tbe left be in front ; in both casesj
the subdivisions will wheel by file ts the side of the front
rank.
Being m column hy jtlatoon, to form vn the right (or left)
into line of battle.
515. The column by platoon, right in front, being in
niarch, the instructor wishing to form it on the right into
line of battle, will command :
1. On the right into line. 2. Guide right
516. At the second command, the guide of each platoon
will shift quickly to its right flank; the column will con-
tinue to march straight forward ; the instructor will move
briskly to the point at which the right of the com.
pany ought to rest in line, and place himselt facing the
point of direction to the left which he will choose.
517. The head of the column being nearly opposite the
instructor the chief of the first platoon will command:
1. night turn ; and when exactly opposite to that point he
will add : 2. March.
618. At this command the first platoon will turn to tbe
right occording to the principles prescribed in No. lid,
its guide will so direct his march as to bring the front rank
man next on his left, opposite to the instructor ; the chief
Qf the platoon will march before its centre, and when the
guide shall be near the line of battle, he will command :
1. Platoon. 2. Halt,
510. At this command, which will be given at the instant
the light uf the platoon ehall arrive at the distance ef
SOtfOUL OF IHK f-'OMPANY. 10 1
;hrce paces from the line of battle, the platoon will halt ;
the files not yet in line will come up promptly.
520. The guide will throw himself on the line of battle
opposite to one of the three left files of his platoon, and
face to the instructor, who will align him on the point of
direction to the left.
521. The chief of the platoon having at the same time,
gone to the point where the right of the company is to
rest, will, as soon as he sees all the files of the platoon in
line command :
Bight — Dress.
522. The second platoon will continue to march itraight
forward, until its guide shall arrive opposite to the left
file of the first; it will then turn to the right at the com-
mand of its chief, and march towards the line of battle,
its guide directing himself on the left file of the first pla-
toon.
523. The guide having arrived at the distance of three
paces from the line of battle, this platoon will be halted,
as prescribed for the first; at the instant it halts its
guide vvill spring on the line of battle, opposite to one of
the three left files of his platoon, and will be assured in his
position by the instructor.
524. The chief of the second platoon, seeing all his files
in line, and its guide established on the dii-ection, will
command :
Hight— Dress.
626. Having given this the command, he will return to
his place as file-closer, passing around the left; the second
platoon will dress up on the alignment of the first, and
when eetabliehed, the captain will command ;
102 school of the company.
Front.
i26. The movetrient ended, the instructor will command!
Guides — Posts.
527. At this comiBand the guides will return to their
places in line of battle.
528. A column by platoon, left in front, will form on the
left into line of battle according to the same principles,
and by inverse means, applying to the second platoon
what is prescribed for the first, and reciprocally.
529. The chief of the second platoon having aligned it
from the left, will return to his place as file closer.
630. The captain having halted the first platoon three
paces behind the Inie of battle, will go to the same point
to align this platoon, and then command : Front. At
the command, guides-posts, given by the instructor, the
captain will shift to his proper flank, and the guides take
their places in line of battle.
Formation of a company from, two ranks into
single rank, and reciprocally.
531. The company being in two ranks, and supposed to
make a part of a column, right or left in front, when the
instructor shall wish to form it into single rank, he will
command :
1. In one rank form company. 2. Makch.
532. At the first command the right guide will face to
the right.
533. At the command march, the right guide will step
off and march in the prolongation of the front rank.
534. The first file will step off at the satme time with the
SCHOOL OF THE COMPANT. 103
guide ; the front rank man will turn to the right at the
first step, follow the guide, and be himself followed by the
rear rank man of his file, who will turn on the same spot
where he turned.
535. The second file, and all other files successirelj, will
Btep off as has been prescribed for the first, the frontVank
man of each file following immediately the rear rank man
of the file next on his right. The captain will superintend
he moTement, and when the last man shall have stepped oC,
he will halt the company, and face it to the front.
636. The file-closers will take their places in line of bat-
tle, two paces in rear of the rank.
637. The company being in single rank, where the in-
structor wishes to form it into two ranks, he will command:
1. In two ranks, form compani/. 2. March.
638. At the second command, the company will face to
the right ; the right guide and the man on tlio vi<rht will
remain faced to the front. "
639. At the command march, the men who hare faced to
the right will step off and form files in the following man-
ner ; the second man in the rank will place himself behind
the first to form the first file; the third will place him
selfby the side of the first in the front rank; the fourth
behind the t^hird in the rear rank. AH the others ,..7/ in
like manner place themselves, alternately, in the front and
rear rank, and will thus form files of two men, on the lott
of those already formed.
Formation of a compauf^ Jrun two ranks hito
four, and reciprocal} ij, at a halt andin march.
alO. The company being in two ranks, at a halt, and
104 • SCHOpii Ot r»£ eO»[FA>'Y.
supposed to form part of a'coluinn right in front, when
the instructor shall wish to form it into four ranks, he will
command :
1. Jn/our ranks, form company. 2. Company, left — Fl.CB.
3. March, {or double-quick — March.)
541. At the second command, the left guide wilLremain
faced to the front, the company will face to the left, the
rear rank will gain the distance of one pace from the front
by a side step to the left and rear, and the men will form
into four ranks as prescribed in the school of the squad.
542. At the command march, the first file of four men
will reface to the front without undoubling. All the oth-
er files of four will step off, and closing successively to
about five inches of the preceding file, will halt, and im-
mediately face to the front, the men remaining doubled.
543. The file closers will take their new places in line
of battle at two paces in rear of the front rank.
544. The captain will superintend the movement.
645. The company being in four ranks, when the in-
structor shall wish to form it into two ranks, ha will com-
mand :
I. In ttco ranks form company. 2. Company right — Face.
3. March, {or double-quick — March.)
646. At the second command, the left guide will stand
fast, the company will face to the right.
547. At the command march, the right guide will step
off and march in the prolongation of the front rank. The
leading file of four men will step off ac the same time, the
other files standing fast; the second file will step off when
there shall be between it and the first space soffioient to
form two rankp.
««HOOL OF laE COMJ'AKr. lOo
548. The following files will execute successively whatha*
been prescribed for the second. As soon as the last file
shall have its distance, the instructor will command :
1. Company, 2. Halt. 3. Front,
549. At the cocimand/roMf, the company will face to the
front, and the files will undouble.
650. The company being in two ranks and marching to
the front, when the instructor shall wish to form it into
four ranks, he will command:
1. In/our ranH form company. 2. By the left, double
files. 3. March, {or double-quick— yikuca.)
651. At the command march, the left ffuide and the left
file of the company will continue to march straight to the
front ; the company will make a half face to the left, th«
odd numbers placing themselves behind the even numbers.
The even numbers of the rear rank will shorten their stepa
a little, to permit the odd numbers of the front rank to
get between them and the even numbers of that rank.
552. The files thus formed of fours, except the left'file,
will continue to march obliquely, lengthening their steps
slightly, so as to k^ep constantly abreast of the guides-
each file will close successively on the file next on its left,
and when at the proper distance from that file, will face
to the front by a half face to the right, and take'the touch
ol elbows to the left.
553. The company being i„ march to tV front in four
ranks, when the instructor shall wish to form it into two
ranks, he will command :
1. Ih (wo rank, form company. 2. By the right undonhU
.fif'f. Maeck, (or ffofihl€-p/i.ek—}4A-Rva.)
100 8iH0(H. or THE COMPAJ<T.
554. At the command march, the left •j;uide and the
l'»f( file of the company will march straight to the front ;
the company will make a half face to the right and march
obliquely, lengthening the step a little, in order to keep
as near as possible abreast of the guide.
555. As soon as the second file from the left shall have
gained to the right the interTal necessary for the left file
to form into Wo ranks, the second tile will face to the
front by a half face to the left and march straight for-
ward; the left file will immediately form into two ranks,
and take the touch of elbows to the left.
656. Each file will execute successiyeiy, what has just
been prescribed for the file next to the left, and each file
will form into two ranks, when the file next on its right
has obliqued the required distance and faced to the front.
557. If the company be supposed to make part of a col-
umn, left in front, these different morements will be exe-
cuted according to the same principles and by inre "se
means, substituting the indication left for right.
RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY MANUAL.
PART THIRD.
Manual of Arms for Riflemen or Light Infantry.
Position of Shouldered Arms.
1 The recruit being placed as explained in the first part
of squal drill, the instructor will cause him to bend the
right arm slightl}', and to place the piece in it in the fol-
lowing manner,
2. The piece in the right hand —the barrel nearly rerti-
cal and resting in the hollow of the shoulder — the guard
to the front, < he arm hanging nearly at its full length,
near the bodv ; the thumb and forefinger embracing the
guard, the remaining fingers closed together, grasping
the swell of the stock just under the cock, which rests on
the little finger.
3. In learning the reoruits the manual of arms, the last
syllable ot the command will decide the brisk execution of
the fi''st motion of each time or pause, and the commands
tuo, three and four, will decide the brisk execution of the
other motions.
4. The manual of arms will be taught in the following
progression. The recruit having the piece at the shoulder,
the instructor will command :
108 EIFLB AND LIGHT INTA.N'lur SiA^UVAt.
Suppert —AviMB.
One time and three motions.
5. (First motion. ) Bring the piece, with the right hand,
perpendicularly to the front and between the eyes, the
barrel to the rear; seize the piece with the left hand at the
lower band, raise this hand as high as the chin, and seize
the piece at the same time with the right hand four inchei
below the cock.
6. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with the right
hand, the barrel to the front ; carry the piece to the left
shoulder, and pass the forearm extended on the breast be-
tween the right hand and the cock; support the cock
against the left forearm, the left hand resting on the right
breast.
7. (Third motion.) Drop the right hand by the side*
Shoulder — Arms.
One time and three motions.
8. ( First motion.) Grasp the piece with the right hand
under and against the left forearm ; seize it with the left
hand at the lower band, the thumb extended ; detach the
piece slightlj» from the shoulder, the left forearm along
the stock.
9. (Second motion. ) Carry the piece vertically with
both hands, to the right shoulder, the rammer to the front,
change the position of the right hand so as to embrace the
guard with the thumb and forefinger, slip the left hand t»
the height of the shoulder, the fingers extended and joined,
the right arm nearly straight.
10. (Third motion.) Drop the left hand quickly by th«
«ld«.
Pretent— AtU%.
One titnt and tte9 taotioHt.
11. (First naotioa.) With (he rigrht hand, briny the
piece erect before the centre of the body, the rammer to
the front ; at the same time seize the piece with the left
hand half way between the guide sight and lower band,
the thumb extended along the barrel and against the
stock, the forearm horizontal and resting against the body,
the hand as high as the elbow.
12. (Second motion. ) Grasp the small of the stock witk
the right hand belon and against tlie guard.
.S'^owWer— Akms.
One tune and ttco motion«.
13. (First motion.) Bring the piece to the right shoul-
vJer, at the 8»me time change the position of the right hand
so as to embrace the guard with the thumb and fore-
linger, slip up the left hand to the height of the shoulder,
the fingers extended and joined, the right arm nearly
straight.
H. (Second motion.) Drop the left hand guickly to
tiie side.
Order — Arms.
One dmt andtivo .mottont. •
15. (First motion.) Seize the piece briskly with the
left hand near the upper band, and detach it slightly from
Ihe shoulder with the right hand ; loosen the grasp of the
right hand, lower the piece with the loft, re-seize the piece
ivith the right hand above the lower band, the little fingec
io the repT of the barrel, the butt abautfour inohe? frons
110' RirLF AJfD trSHT rNFANTRT MANUAI,,
«
mhe groirad, the right hand Bvvpported against the hip;.
drop the left hand by the side.
16. (Second position^) l>et the piece slip through the-
iright hand to the ground by opening slightly the finders,
and take
The posiiton of Order Arms^.
17. The hand lowr, the barrel between the thumb and
forefinger extended along the stock; the other fingers
extended and joined ; the muzzle asbout two inches from:
She right shoulder; the rammer in front; the toe (or
beak of the butt against and in a line ^th the toe of the
right foot, the barrel perpendicular.
Shoulder — Arms.
One time and two- motions,
18. (First motion.) Raise the peace verticariy with
the right hand to the height of the right breast, and op-
posite the shoalder, the elbow close to the body ; seize th-e-
piece with the left hand below the right, and drop qiUicklj
the right hand to grasp the pi^ce at the smafU of the stocky
the thumb and forefinger embracing the guard ; press the
piece against the shoulder with the left hand, the righit
arm nearly straight.
19. (Second motion.) I>i*op the left hand qutckly hj
the side.
Load in nine timei,
I. JLOAI>.*
20. Grasp the piece with the left hand as high as the
*(NoTE.) Whenever the loadings and firings are to be
executed, the instructor will cause the cartridge boxes to
18>e brought to the front.
UIFLK ASU LIGHT INFASTRT MAHCAL. lU
right elbow, and bring it rertically opposite the middle of
the body, slip the right hand to the upper band, place the
butt between ike feet, barrel to the front ; seize it witX
the left hand near the muzzle, which should be three inch-
es from the body; carry the right ha«d to the cartrid|:«
box.
2. i/flMdie— CARTRIOaB.
0ns time and one mottoa.
2L Seize the cartridge with the thumb and next two
f.ngere, and place it between tftie teeth.
3. Tear— Cartridge.
One time and one motion.
22. Tear tJie pap»r to the powder, hold ihe cartridge
upriglit between tJie th«mb and first two fingers, aear the
top ; in this position place it in front of and near the mux*
zle— the back of the hand to the front.
4. C'Aor^e— Cartribqb.
0*« time and one motion.
23. Empty tho powder into the barrel ; disengage the
ball from the paper with the right hand and the thumb
and first two fingers of the left ; insert it into the bore,
the pointed end uppermost, and press it down with the
right thumb ; seize the head of the rauiiaer with the thumb
and forefinger of the right hand, fhe other fingers closed,
ihe elbow near the body.
5. jDraip— Rammeu.
One time and three viotionn.
U. (First motion.) Half draw the rammer by extend-
in^. the right arm; steady it in this poiition with lefi
t)iu«»b ; grasp the rammer near the muzzle with the riglk
hand, the little finger itpperm^wt, tfee nails to the front,
the thumb extended along the rammer.
25. (Second motion. ) Clear the rammer from the pipes
By again extending the arm : the rammer i-n the prolon-
gation of the pipes.
2G. (Third motion.) Turis the rammer, the little end'
of the rammer paBsiing near tbe left shoulder ; pfeec the
lead of the rammer on the ball, the back of the hand t»
the ft-ontv
G. Bam — CARiniDGE,
One time and ove matio^.
27. Insert the rammer as far as the-right, ffnd' steady ft
m this position with the thumb of the left hand ; seize the
rammer at the small end with the thumb and forefinger of
the right hand, tlje back- of tli« hsind to thte front j press
the ball home, the elbows nea;r tSie body,
7. Return — Rammer,
One time andtnree motions.
28. (First mstion. ) Draw the rammer half way oufe^
and steady it in this position with the left thumb ; grasp it
aear the muzzle with the right band, the little ferefl-nger
uppermost, the nails to the front, the thumb along ih^e
rammer ; clear the rammer from the bore by extending
the arm, the nails to the front, the rammer in the proton-
gation of the bore.
29. (Second motion.) Turn the rammcT, the head of
the rammer passing near the left shoulder, and insert it in
the pipes until the right hand voachct? tt^e muzile, the nails
to the froftt.
30. (Third motion.) Force tiie rammer home by plac-
ing the little finger of the right hand on the head of the
rammer ; pass the left hand down the barrel to the extent
of the arm, without depressing the shoulder,
8. Fbimb-
One time and two motinna.
SI. (First motion.) With the left hand raise the piece
until the hand is as high as the ej^e, grasp the small of the
Btock with the right hand ; half faeo the right ; place at
eamc time, the right foot behind and at right angles with
the left, the hollow of the right foot against the left heel.
Slip the left hand down to the lower band, the thumb
along the stock, the left elbow against the body ; bring
the piece to the right side, the butt below the right fore-
arm— the smafl of tbo stock against the body and two
inches below the right breast, the barrel upward, the muz-
zle on a IcTcl with the eye.
32. (Second motion.) Half cock with H)c thumb of tho
right hand, tho fingers supported against the guard and
pmall of the stock — remove the old cap with one of the
fingers of the right hand, and with the thumb and fore-
finger of the same hand, take a cap from the pouch, place
it on the nipple, and press it down with the thumb; seize
the small of the stock with the right hand.
9. Shoulder — Arms.
0;jfl time and two motion •;.
33, (First motion.) Bring the piece to the right shoul-
der and support it there with the left hand, face to the
front ; bring the right hand to the side of and on a line
with the left; grasp the piece with the li^ht hand as indl-
eated in the po.^ilion o( nhoi'hfrr nrmt.
114 niFLK AND LIGHT INFANTRY HANtJAL,
34. (Se«ond motion.) Drop the left hand quickly to
the side.
Readt.
One time and three mottona.
35. (First motion.) Raise the piece slightly with the
right hand, raakingf a half face to the right on the left
beel ; carry the righ foot to the rear, and place it at right
angles to the left, the hollo\y of it opposite to and against
the left heel ; grasp the piece with the left hand at the
lower band and detach it slightly from the shoulder.
36. (Second motion.) Bring down the piece with both
Lands, the barrel upward, the left thumb extended
along the stock, the butt along the right forearm, th«
small of the stock against the body and two inches below
the right breast, the muzzle as high as the eye, the left el-
bow against the side; place at the same time, the right
thumb on the Jaead of the coek, the other fingers under and
against the guard..
37. (Thir4 motion.) Cock and seize the piece at the
small of the stock, without deranging the position of the
butt.
Aim.
One time and one motion.
38. Raise the piece with both hands, and support the
butt against the right shoulder ; the left elbow down, the
right nearly as high as the shoulder, incline the head upon
the butt so that the right eye may perceive quickly the
object aimed at ; the left eye closed, the right thumb ex-
tended along the .stock, the forefinger on the trigger.
39. The rear rank men, in aiming, will each carry the
UIFLB AND LKjlHr INFANTRY MANIAL. 115
right foot about eight inches to the right, and towards the
left beelof the man next on the right, inclining the upper
part of the body forward.
FlKE.
40. Press the forefinger against the trigger, fire, without
lowering or turning the head, and remain in this position.
LOADk
One time and one motxoif,
41. Bring down the piece with both hand'^, at the same-
time face to the front, and take the position of load. Each
rear rank man will bring bis right foat by the side of the
left.
43. If, after firing, the instructor should not wish the
recruits to re-load, he will command :
Sho nlder — Arms.
One time and one motion.
43. Throw up the piece briskly with the left hand^
and resume the position of shoulder arms, at the same time
face to the front, trarningon the left heel, and bringing the
right heel on a Tine with the left.
44. To accustom the recruits to wait for the camnfiand,.
Jlre, the instructor, when they are in the position ofaiiri^
will command :
liecover — Arms.
One time ttnd orte motion.
45. At the first part of the command, withdraw the fin*-
ger from the trigger; at the command, arms, retake tfe^e
position of the third motion of rei%dy.
116 RIFLE A.X9 LI6HX I^'FA^'TRr MAXPAL.
46. Tte recruits being in the position of the third mo-
tion ofrtady ; if the instructor should wish to bring them
to a shoulder, he will command :
Shoulder — Arms.
One time and one motion.
47. At the com\na.nd shoulder, place the thumb upon the
cock, the forefinger on the trigger, half cock, and seize the
small of the stock with the right hand. At the command
arms, bring up the piece briskly to the right shoulder and
re-take the position o^ shoulder arms.
Fix — Bayonet.
Onetime and three motions.
.48. (First motion.) Grasp the piece with the left hand
at the height of the shoulder, and detach it Blightly from
the shoulder with the right hand.
49. (Second motion.) Quit the piece with the right
hand, lower it with the left hand, opposite the middle of
the body, and place the butt between the feet without
shock, the rammer to the rear, the barrel vertical, the
muzzle three inches from the body ; seize it with the right
hand at the upper band, and carry the left hand reversed
to the handle of the sabre bayonet.
50. (Third motion.) Draw the sabre bayonet from the
scabbard and fix it on the barrel ; seize the piece with the
left hand, the aim extended, the right hand at the upper
band.
Shoulder — Arms.
One time and two motiom^
51. (First mcti«n,) Kaise the piece with the left hand,
KIFIJk ANP LIGHT ISFiiNTRT MASUAL. 117
and place it against the right shoulder, the rammer to the
front ; seize the piece at the same time with the right
hand, at the small of the stock, the thumb and forefiger,
embracing the guard, the right arm nearly extended.
52. (Second motion.) Drop the piece briskly, the left
hand by the side.
Charge-^BxronsT.
One time and two motioiu,
53. (First motion. ) Raise the piece slightly with the
right hand, and make a half face to the right on the left
heel ; place the Lollow of the right foot opposite to, and
three inches from the left heel, the f«et square ; seize the
piece at the same time, with the left hand a little above the
lower band.
64. (Second motion. ) Bring down the piece with both
hands, the barrel uppermost, the left elbow against the
body; seize the small of the stock at the same time, with
the right hand, which will be supported against the hip ;
the point of the sabre bayonet as high as the eye.
Shoulder — Arms,
One time and two viotiona.
55. (First motion. ) Throw up the piece briskly with
the left hand, in facing to the front, place it against the
right shoulder, the rammer to the front; turn the right
hand so as to embrace the guard, slide the left hand to the
height of the shoulder, the right hand nearly extended.
66. (Second motion. ) Drop the left hand smartly by
the aide.
TratV— Arms.
Out tiiiie and ti»o motietit.
118 RIKLE AND LIGHT IM^ANTRT MANUAL.
57. (First motion.) The same as the first motion of
Order arms.
58. (Second motion.) Incline the muzzle slightly to
the front, the butt to the rear and about four inches from
the ground. The right hand supported at the hip, will so
hold the piece that the rear-rank men may not touch with
their bayonet, the men in the front rank.
Shoulder — Ahms.
59. At the command shoulder, raise the piece perpendic-
ularly in the right hand, the little finger in rear of the bar-
rel. At the command arms, execute the two motions pre-
scribed for the shoulder, from the position of order arms.
Unfix — Bayonet.
One time and three motions,
60. (First motion.) The same as first motion of yiaj
hayonet.
61. (Second motion.) The same as second motion of_/?J5
bayonet, except, that the thumb of the right hand will be
placed on the spring of the sabre bayonet, and the left hand
will embrace the handle of the sabre bayonet and the
bai rel, the thumb extended along the blade.
62. (Third motion. ) Press the thumb of the right hand
on the spring, wrest off the sabre bayonet, turn it to the
right, the edge to the front, lower the guard until it touch-
es the right hand, which will seize the back and the edge
of the blade between the thumb and first two fingers, the
other fingers holding the piece; change the position of
the hand without quitting the handle, return the sabre
bayonet to the scabbard, and seize the piece with the left
band, the arm extended.
RIFLE AND LIOHT INFANTRT MANUAL. 119
Shoulder — A BMS.
One time and two motiona.
63. (First motion.) The same as the first motion, from
fix bayonet.
(54. (Second motion.) The same as the second motion
in Jixbar/onet.
Secure — Alms.
One time and three motions.
65. (First motion.) The same as the first motion of
support arms, except, with the right hand seize the piece
at the small of the stock.
6(5. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with both hands,
the barrel to the front ; bring it opposite the left shoulder
the butt against the hip, the left hand at the lower band,
the thumb as high as the chin and extended on the rammer;
the piece erect and detached from the shoulder, the left
forearm against the piece.
67. (Third motion.) Raise the piece, pass it under the
left arm, the left hand remaining at the lower band, the
thumb on the rammer to prevent it from falling out, the
little finger resting on the hip, the right hand falling at
the same time by the side.
Shoulder — Arms.
One lime and three motions.
68. (First motion. ) Raise the piece with the left hand,
and seize it with the right hand at the small of the stock,
the piece erect and detached from the shoulder, the butt
against the hip, left foream along the piece.
69. (Second motion.) The same as the second motioB
of shoulder armn from a inpport.
120 hlSin A^O U.UBI infantry MA.NCA-Ii.
70. (Third motion.) The same as the third motion of
shttuldtr arms from a support.
Right Shotilder Shift — Arms.
One time and two n\ptio7u.
7i. (First motion. ) Detach the piece perpendicularly
from the shoulder with the right hand, and raise it with
the left between the lower band and guide sight, raise the
piece, the left hand at the height of the shoulder and four
inches from it; place, at the same time, the right hand ou
the butt, the back between the first two fingers, the other
two fingers under the butt plate.
72. (Second motion.) Quit the piece with the left hand,
raiae and place the piece on the right shoulder with the
right hand, the lock plate upwards ; let fall, at the same
time, the left hand by the side.
Shoulder — Arms.
One time and ttco motions,
73. (First motion.) Raise the piece perpendicularly by
extending the right arm to its full length, the rammer to
the front, at the same time, seize the piece with the left
hand between the lower band and guide sight.
74. (Second motion.) Quit the butt with the right
hand, which will immediately embrace the guard, lower
the piece to the position of shoulder arras, slide up the left
hand to the height of the shoulder, the fingers extended
and closed. Drop the left hand by the side.
75. The men being at support arms, the instructor will
sometimes causfe the pieces to be brought to the right shoul-
der. To effect this, he will command :
ElfLS i^'D LieHX UfFAlTTKT MAXUAX. 121
Bight Shoulder Shift — Ariis.
One time and tico motiont.
76. (First motion.) feize the piece with the right hand,
below and near the left forearm, place the left hand under
the butt, the heel of the butt between the first two fingers.
77. (Second motion.) Turn the piece with the left hand,
the lock plate upward, carry it to the right shoulder, the
left hand still holding the butt, the muzzle elevated ; hold
the piece in this position and place the right hand upon
the butt as is prescribed in No. 71, and let fall the hand
by the side.
Support — Arms.
One time and two motions.
78. (Finst motion. ) The same as the first motion of
»houlder arms, No. 73.
79. (Second motion. ) Turn the piece with both hands,
the barrel to the front, carry it opposite the left shoulder,
slip the right hand to the small of the stock, place the left
forearm, extended, on the breast and let fall the right hand
to the side.
Arms — At Will.
One time and one motion.
80. Carry the piece at pleasure on either ghoulder,
with one or both hands, the muzzle elevated.
Shoxdder— Arms.
One time and one motion.
81. Retake quickly the position of shoiUder armt.
Ground— Aniiis.
Oiif. time aitd twH vwtion-fi.
122 EIl-LB AND LIGHT INFANTUy MANUAL.
82. (First motion.) As prescribed in heavy infantry
manual, (squad drill.)
83. ( Second motion. ) As prescribed in heavy infantry
manual, (sqaad drill.) ^
Raise — Aries.
One time and two motions,
84. (First motion. ) As prescribed in heavy infantry
manual, (squad drill. )
85. (Second motion.) As prescribed in Aeavy tn/a»try
manual, (squad drill. )
86. The recruits being at order arms, and having the
sabre bayonet in the scabbard, if the instructor wishes to
cause an inspection of arms, he will command,
Inspection — Arms.
One time and two motions.
87. (First motion. ) Seize the piece with the left hand
below and near the upper band, carrj it with both hands
opposite the middle of the body, the butt between the feet,
the rammer to the rear, the barrel vertical, the muzzle
about three inches from the body ; carry the left hand re-
versed to the sabre-bayonet, draw it from the scabbard
and fix it on the barrel ; grasp the piece with the left hand
below and near the upper band, seize the rammer with the
thumb and forefinger of the right hand, bent, the other
fingers closed.
88. (Second motion.) Draw the rammer, as has been
explainednn loading, and let it glide to the bottom of the
bore, replace the piece with the left hand, opposite the
right shoulder, and take the position (»f order arms.
89. The instructor will then inspect in sur-rogiion. the
RTFLE AND LIGHT INFA.NTRT MANUAL. 123
piece of each recruit, in passing along the front of the rank,
in conformity with the principles prtscribed in squad drill
for the inspection of arms
90. When the instructor shall have passed him, each re-
cruit will retake the position prescribed at the command
insjyection armn.
91. The men being at order arms, the instructor will
command,
Stack — Arms.
92. At this command, the front rank man of every even
numbered lile will pass his piece before him, seizing it
with the left land near the upper band ; will place the butt
a little in advance of the left toe, the barrel turned toward
the body, and draw the rammer slightly from its place ,
the front rank man «f every odd numbered file will also
draw the rammer slightly, and pass his piece to the man
next on his left, who will seize it with the right hand near
the upper band, and place the butt a little in advance of .
the right toe of the man next on his right, the barrel turn-
ed to the front ; he will then cross the rammer of the two
pieces, the rammer of the piece of the odd numbered man be-
ing inside; the rear rank man of evry even file will also draw
his rammer, lean the piece forward, the lock plate down-
ward, advance the right foot about six inches, and insert
the rammer between the rammer and the barrel of the piece
of his front rank man ; with his left hand he will place the
butt of his piece on the ground, thirty-two inches in rear
of and perpendicular to the front rank, bring back his
right foot by the sids of the left ; the front rank man of
every even file, will at the same time lean the stock to the
rear, quit it with the right hand and force all the rammers
. l",iI4 a.l?LK AHl} lilUHI t^trANlAT MANUAL.
down. The stack being thus fbrmed, the rear rank man of
every odd file will pass his piece into his left hand, the
barrel to the front, and inclining it forward, will rest it
on the stack.
93. The men of both ranks having taken the position of
the soldier without arms, the instructor will command
1. Break ranks — 2. March.
To Resume Arms.
94. Both ranks beinc: reformed in rear of their stacks,
the instructor will command :
Take — Arms.
96. At this command, the rear rank man of every odd
numbered piece, will withdraw his piece from the stack ;
the front rank man of every even file, will seize his own
piece with the l«ft hand, and that of the man on his right,
with his right hand, both above the lower band ; the rear
rank man of the even file will seize his piece with the right
band below the lower band ; these two men will raise up
the stack to loosen the rammers ; the front rank man of
every odd file, will facilitate the disengagement of the ram-
mers, if necessary, by drawing them out slightly with the
left hand, and will receive his piece from the hand of the
man next on the left ; the four men will retake the position
of the soldier at order arms.
formation of a Regiment in line of Battle or in
line,
96. A Regiment is composed of ten companies, which
will habitually be posted from right to left, in the follow-
ing 6rder: first, «iith, fourth, ninth, third, eighth, fifth.
Rffi/B AND LIOHT INFAWTRT JMNCAL. 125'
^tenfh, seteath, second, according to the p»nk cf captains.
07. With a less numbar of companies tlio same principle
trill be observed, viz : the first captain will command the
right company, the second captain the left company, the
third captain the right centre company, and so on.
98. The companies thus posted will be designated from
right to lcft,^r«< company, eecond company, etc. This
designation will be observed in the mancriivrcs.
09. The first two companies on the right, whatever their
denomination, will form the Jirst division ; the next two
companies the second divistom ; and so on, to the left.
100. Each company will be divided into two equal parts
which will be designated as the first and second platoon,
countine from the ri}.ht; and each platoon, in like man-
ner, will be subdivided into two sections.
101. In all exercises and mancevres, every rcgin-ent, or
part of a regiment, composed of two or moro companies,
will be designated as a battalion.
102. The color, with a guard to be hereinafter designated,
will be posted on the left of the right centre battalion
company. That company and all on its right, will be
denominated the right wing of the battalion ; the remain-
ing companies the left tviiig.
103. The farmation of a regiment is in two ranks ; and
each company will be formed into two ranks, in the fol-
lowing manner : the corporals will be posted in the front
rank, and on the right and left of platoons, according to
height ; the tallest corporal and the tallest man will form
the first file, the next two tallest men will form the second
file, and so on to the last file, which will be eompoeed of
the shortest corporal and the shortest man.
126 RIFLE AND LIGHT INFANTRY MANUAL.
104. The odd and even files, numbered as one, two, in the
company, from right to left, will form groups of four men,
who will fee designated comrades in battle,
105. The distance from one rank to another will be thir-
teen inches, measured from the breasts of the rear rank
men to the backs or knapsacks of the front rank men.
106. For manoeuvring, the companies of a battalion will
always be equalized, by transferring mea from the strong-
est to the weakest companies.
Posts of Field Officers and Regiment'/ 1 Staff.
107. The field officers, colonel, lieutenant-colonel and
major, are supposed to he mounted, and on active service
shall b« on horseback. The adj utant, when the battalion
is manoeuvring, will be on foot.
108. The colonel will take post thirty paces in rear of the
file closer, and opposite the centre of the battalion. This
distance will be reduced whenever there is a reduction im
the front of the battalion.
,109. The lieutentant-eo!onel and the major will be oppo-
site the centres of the right and left wings respectively,
and twelve paces in rear of the file closers.
110. The adjutant and sergeant major will be opposite
the right and left of the battalion, respectively, and eight
paces in the rear of the file closers,
111. The adjutant and sergeant-major will aid the lieu-
tenant-colonel and major, respectively, in the manoeuvres,
112. The colonel, if absent, will be replaced by the lieu-
tenant-colonel, and the latter by the ihajor. If all the field
officers be absent, the senior captains will command the
battalion 3 but if either be present, he will not fl^U the
RIftK AND LKJHT IXKANTR MA.NfAL. 127
senior captain to act as field officer , except in case of evi-
dent necessity.
113. The quarter-master, surgeon, and other staff oflScers,
in one rank, on the left of the colonel, and three paces in
his rear.
114. The quarter-master sergeant on aline with the front
rank of the field music, and two paces on the right.
Posts of Field Music and Band.
115. The buglars will be drawn up in four ranks, and
posted twelve paces in rear of the file closers, the left op-
posite the centime of the left centre company. The senior
principle musician will be two paces in front of the field
musie, and the other two paces in the rear.
116. The regimental band, it there be one, will be drawn
up in two or four ranks, according to its numbers, and
posted fiye paces in rear of the field music, having oqe of
the principal musicians at its head.
Color- Guard.
117. In each battalion the color-guard will be composed
of eight corporals, and posted on the left of the right
centre company, of which company, for the time being,
the guard will make a part.
118. The front rank will be composed of ajsergeant, to be
selected by the colonel, who will be calied, for the time,
color-barer, with the two ranking corporals, respectively,
on his right and left; the rear rank will be composed of
tlie three corporals next in rank ; and the three remaining
corporals will be posted in their rear, and on the line of
file closers. The left guide of the color «^f>inpany, when
these three last nanced corporals are iu the rank of fiit-
closers, will be immediately on their left.
119. In battalions with less than five companies proaont,
there will be no color-guard, and no displaj of colors, e*-
cept it may be at reviews.
120. The corporals for the color-guard will be seiected
from those most distinguished for regularity and percisioc,
as well in their positions under arms as in their marching.
The latter advantage, and & just carriage of the person,
are to be more particularly sought for in the selection of
the color-bearer.
Getierai Guides.
121. There will be two general guides in each battalion,
•elected, for the time, by the colonel, from among the ser-
geants (other than first sergeants) the most distinguished
for carriage under arms and accuracy in marching.
122. These sergeants will be respectively denominated,
in the manoeuvres, right general guide and left general
guide, and be posted in the line of file closers; the first in
sear of the right and the second in rear of the left fl^ulf of
the batt»lioa.
SKIRMISH DRILL AND BATONET EXERCISE.
PART FOURTH.
INSTRUCTIOX FOR SKIRMISHERS.
General principle.^ and division of the iiisiruction»
1. The movements of skirmishers should be subjected to
such rules as will give to the commander the means of
moving them in any direction with the greatest prompti-
tude.
2. It is not expected that these movements should be exe
cuted with the same precision as in closed ranks, nor is it
desirable, as such exactness would materially interfere
with their prompt execution.
3. When skirmishers are thrown out to clear the way
for, and to protect the advance of the main corps, their
movements should be so regulated by this corps as to keep
it constantly covered.
4. Every body of skirmishers should hare a reserve, the
strength and composition of which will vary according to
circumstances.
5. If the body thrown out be within sustaining distance
5
S3'0 !»KlltMlftiH DKIH, ANU BAVUNKV KXEROISfi.
of the main corps, a very small reserre will be sufFicienfc
for each company, whose duty it shall be to fill vacant pla-
ces, furnish the line with cartridges, relieve the fatigued,,
and serve as a rallying point for the skirmishers.
6. If the main corps be at a considerable distance, be-
sides the compan}' reserves, another reserve will be re-
quired, composed of entire companies, which will be em-
ployed to sustain and reinforce such parts of the line as
may be warmly attacked ; this reserve should be strong
enough to relieve at least half the companies deployed as
skirmishers.
7. The reserve should be placed behind the centre of the
line of skirmishers, the company reserves at one hundred
and fifty, and the principal reserve at four hundred paces.
This rule however, is not invariable. The reserves, while
holding themselves within sustaining distance of the line,
should be, as much as possible, in a position to afford each
other mutual protection, and must carefully profit by any
accidents of the ground to conceal themselves from the
view of the enemy, and to shelter themselves from his fire.
8. The movements of skirmishers will be executed in
quick, or double quick time. The run will be resorted to
only in cases of urgeant necessity.
9. Skirmishers will be permitted to carry their piefcs
in the manner most convenient to them.
10. The movements will be habitually indicated by the
sounds of the bugle.
11. The officers, and, if necessary, the non-commisaioned
officers, will repeat, and cause the commands to be execu-
ted, as soon as they are given ; but to avoid mistakes,
when the signals arc employed, thvy r\iii wait until the
•SkinMI^H DRILT, ANT) HAYONRT LXKUPI.SK. ISl
last bugle note is sounded befvsrc commencing the move-
ment. ^
12, When skirmishers are «9rdercd to more rapidly, the
officers and non-commissioned officers will sec that the
men econemize their strength, keep cool, and profit bj- all
thr" advantages which the ground may offer for cover. It
is (>nly by this continual watchfulness on the part of all
grades, that a line of skir'mij-hers can attain success.
13. This instruction will bcdivdedinto five article.', ano!
subdivided as follows :
Article First.
1- To deploy forward.
2. To deploy by the flank,
ij. To extend interval.-.
4. To close ijitervals.
f>. To relieve skirmishers.
Aktici.k Skooki^.
1. To advance in line,
2. To reteat in line.
3. To change direction.
4. To march by the flank.
Article Thihi>.
i. To fire at a halt.
■2; Tn fire marcfoiii^..
132 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAYONET EXERCISE.
Article Fourth.
1. The rally.
2. To form coIuihh to march in any direction,
3. The assembly.
Article Fifth.
1. To deploy a battallion as skirmishers.
2. To rally the battalion deployed as skirmishers,
14. In the first four articles, it is supposed that the
juovemente are executed by a company deployed as skir-
mishers, on a front equal to that of the battalion in order
of battle. In the fifth article, it is supposed that each com-
pany of the battalion, being deployed as skirmishers, oc-
cupies a front of one hundred paces. From these two
examples, rules may be numerically deduced for all cases^
whatever may be the strength of the skirmishers, and the
extent of ground they ought to occupy.
Article First.
J)ejjloi/?nents.
15. A company may be deployed as skirmishers in two
ways : forward and by the flank.
16. The deployment forward will be adopted when the
company is behind the line on which it is to be established
as skirmishers: it will be deployed by the flank, when it
fipd? itself already on thj^t line.
SKIUMT.«H DRILL iND 8AY0SET EXKKCI8E. 133
17. Whenever a company is to be deployed as skirmish-
ers, it will be divided into two platoons, and each platoon
will be subdivided ioto two sections ; the comrades in bat-
tle, forming groups of four men, will be careful to know
and to sustain each other. The captain will assure him-
Belf that the files in the centre of each platoon and section
are designated.
18. A company may be deployed as skirmishers on its
right, left, or centre file, or on any other named file what-
soever. In this manner, skirmishers may be thrown for-
ward with the greatest possible rapidity on any ground
they may be required to occupy.
19. A chain of skirmishers ought generally to preserve
thoir alignment, but no advantage which the ground may
present should be sacrificed to attain this regularity.
20. Tile interval between skirmishers depends on the
extent of ground to be covered ; but in general, it is not
proper that the groups of four men should be removed
more than forty paces from each other. The habitual
distance between men of the same group in open grounds
will be five paces ; in no case will they lose sight of each
other.
21. The front to be occupied to cover a battalion com-
prehends its front and the half of each interval which
separates it from the battalion on its right and left. If a
line, whose wings are not supported, should be covered by
skirmishers, it will be i»ecessary either to protect the flanks
with skirmishers, or to extend them in front of the line so
far beyond the wings as effectually to oppose any attempt
which might bo made by the er emy's skirmishers to di.v-
*urb the flank?.
134: SKi-HMlSH ©KILL AJ<D BArOiiET SXEECISfi.
To deploy forward.
22. A company being at a halt or in march, when tho
captain shall wish to deploy it forward on the left file of
the first platoon, holding the second platoon in reserve, he
will command:
1. First platoon — as skirmishers.
2. On the left file — take intervals.
3. March {or double qiiich — JIarch.)
23. At the first command, the second and third lieuten-
ants will place themselves rapidly two paces behind the
centres of the right and left sections of the first platoon ;
the fifth sergeant will move one pace in front of the centre
of the first platoon, and will place himself between the two
sections in the front rank as soon as the movement begins ;
the foul th sergeant will place himself on the left of the
front rank of the same platoon, as soon as he can pass. —
The captain will indicate to this sergeant the point on
which he Vi'ishes him to direct his march. The first lieu-
tenant, placing himself before the centre of the second
platoon, will command: •
Second platoon hachicard — March.
24. At this command, the second platoon will step three
paces to the rear, so as to unniiisk the flank on the first
platoon. It will then be halted by its chief, and the se-
cond sergeant will place himself on the left, and the third
sengeant on the right flank of this platoom
25. At the 0*1 m"<m Iliad rnnrch. the left eronp of four men.
SKIRMISH t>niLL AN'O EATONCT EXERCI.'E. 135
conducted by the fourth fergeant, will direct itself un thu
point indicated ; all the other groups rf fours throwing
forward briskly the left shoulder, will moyd.'diagonally to
the front in double quick time, so as to, gain to the right
the space of twenty paces, which shall be the distance be-
tween each group and that immediately on its left. "When
the second group from the loft shall arrive on a line with
and twenty paces from the first, it will march straight to
the front, conforming to the gait and direction of the
first, keeping constantly on the same alignment and at
twenty paces from it. The third group, and all the others,
will conform to what has just been prescribed (or the se-
cond ; they will arrive successively on the line. The right
guide will arrive with the last group.
26. The left guide having reached the point where the
left of the line i^hould rest, the captain will command the
skirmishers to halt; the men composing each group of
fours will then immediately deploy at five paces from each
other, and to the right and left of the front rank man of
the even file in each group, the rear ^ank men placing
themselves on the left of their file leaders. If any groups
be not in line at the command halt, they will move up rap-
idly, conforming to what has just been prescribed.
27. If, during the deployment, the line should be fired
upon by the enemy, the captain may cause the groups of
fours to deploy, as they gain their proper distances.
28. The line being formed the non-commissioned officers
o& the right, left and centre of the platoon will place
themselves ten paces in rear of the line, and opposite the
position they respectively occupied. The chiefs of sections
will promptly rectify any irrrgularitie?, and then place
136 SMRMISH DRILL AND BATO^iET KXBRCISB.
themselves twenty-five or thirty paces in rear of the centre
of their sections, each having with him four men taken
from the reserve, and also a bugler, who will repeat, if
necessary, the signals sounded by the captain.
29. Skirmishers should be particularly instructed to take
advantage of any cover which the ground may offer, and
should lie flat on the ground whenever such a movement
is necessary to protect them from the fire of the enepiy.
Regularity in the alignment should yield to this important
advantage.
30. When the movement begins, the first lieutenant,^
will face the second platoon about, and march it promptly,
and by the shortest line, to about one hundred and fifty
paces in rear of the centre of the line. He will hold it
always at this distance, unless ordered to the contrary.
31. The reserve will conform itself to all the movements
of the line. This rule is general.
32. Light troops will carry their bayonets habitually in
the scabbard, and this rule applies equally to the skirmish-
ers and the reserve ; whenever bayonets are required to
be fixed, a particular signal will he given. The captain
will give a general superintendence to the whole deploy-
ment, and then promptly place himself about eighty paces
in the i ear of the centre of the line. He will have with
him a bugler and four men taken from the reserve.
„ 33. The deployment may be made on the right or the
centre of the platoon, by the same commands, substituting
the indication right or centrcy for that ofleft file.
34. The deployment on the right or the centre will be
made according to the principles prescribed above ; in this
latter case, the centre of the platoon will be marked by
5KIRMWH DRILL AND BIYOXKT KIERCIS-B. 137
the right group of fours in the second section ; the fifth
sergeant will place himself on the right of this group, and
serve as the guide of the platoon during the deployment.
35. In whatever manner the'deployment be made, on the
right, left or centre, the men in each group of fours will
alvvays deploy at five paces from each other, and upon the
front rank man of the even ijumbered file. The deploy-
ments will habitually be made at twenty paces interval ;
but if a greater interval be required, it will be indicated
in the command.
36. If a company be thrown out as skirmishers, so near
the main body as to render a reserve unnecessary, the en-
tire company will be extended in the same manner, and
according to the same principles, as for the deployment of
a platoon. In this case, the third lieutenant will command
the fourth section, and a non-commissioned oflicer desig-
nated for that purpese, the second section ; theJifth ser-
geants will act as centre guard ; the file closers will place
themselves ten paces in the rear of the line, and opposite
their places in line of battle. The first and second lieu-
tenant will each have a bugler near him.
To deploy by thefianh.
37. The company being at a halt, when the captain shall
wish to deploy it by the flank, holding the first platoon in
reserve, he will command :
1. Second platoon — as shirmhhers. 2. By the right /lank
— take intervals. 3. Marcu, {or douhle quick — March.)
iJ8. At the first command, the first and third lieutenants
l')S SKIRMISH DraLL AXD BAYOKET EXEROISE.
will place themselves, respectively, two paces behind the
centres of the first and second sections of the second pla-
toon ; the fifth sergeant will place himself one pace in
front of the centre of the second platoon ; the third serge-
ant, as soon as he can pass, will place himself on the right
of the front rank of the same platoon. The captain will
indicate to him the point on which he wishes him to direct
his march. The chief of the first platoon will execute what
has been prescribed for the chief of the second platoon,
IVos. 23 and 24. The fourth sergeant will place himself
on the left flank of the reserve, the first sergeant will re-
main on the right flank.
39. At the second command, the first and third lieuten-
ants will place themselves two paces behind the left group
of their respective sections.
40. At the command march, the second platoon will face
to the right, and commence the movement; the left group
of fours will stand fast, but will deploy as soon as there is
room on its right, comforming to what has been prescrib-
ed, No. 26 ; the third sergeant will place himself on the
left of the right group, to conduct it ; the second group
will halt at twenty paces from the one on its left, the third
group at twenty paces from the second, and so on to the
right. As the groups halt, they will face to the enemy,
and deploy as has been explained for the left group.
41. The chiefs of sections w'ill pay particular attention
to the successive deployments of the groups, keeping near
the group about to halt, so as to rectify any errors which
may be committed. When the deployment is completed,
they will place themselves thirty paces in rear of the cen-
tre ef tkeir sections, as has been heretofore prescribed.
SHBIlMiSn DRILL AND B.VTONET HXERGISE. 13§
The non-commissioned officers will also place themselves
as previously indicated.
42. As soon as the movement connnencos, the chief of
the first platoon, causing it to face about, will move it as
indicated, Xo. 30.
43. The deployment may be made by the left flank ac-
cording to the same principles, substituting left flank for
right flank.
44. If the captain should wish to deplo}' the company
upon the centre of the platoons, he will command :
1. Second platoon — an skirmishers. 2. By the right and
left flank — take intervals. 3. March {or double piick —
March.)
•
45. At the first command, the ofllcers and non-commis-
sioned oflicers will conform to what has been prescribed,
No. 38.
46. At the second command, the first lieutenant wil
place himself behind the left group of ihc right section of
the second platoon, the third lieutenant behind the right
group of the left section of the same platoon.
47. At the command march, the right section will face
to the right, the left section will face to the lelt, the group
on the right of this latter section will stand fast. The two
sections will move oft" in opposite directions ; the third
sergeant will place himself on the left of the right file to
conduct it, the second sergeant on the right of Ihe left file.
The two groups nearest that which stands fast, will each
halt at twenty paces from this group, and each of the oth-
er gfroups will halt »t twenty- paces from the group which
140 BUrRJUSH PRILL AND BATONBT BXBRCISE.
is in rear of it. Each group will deploy as heretofore pre-
scribed, No. 40.
48. The first and third lieutenants, will direct the move-
ment, holding themselves always abreast of the group
which is about to halt.
49. The captain can cause the deployment to be mado
on any named group whatsoever ; in this case^ the fifth
sergeant will place himself before the group indicated,
and the deployment will be made according to the princi-
ples heretofore prescribed.
60. The entire company may he also deployed, accord-
ing to the same principles.
To extend intervals.
51. This movement, which is employed to extend a line
of skirmishers, will be executed according to tke principle*
prescribed for deployments,
62. If it be supposed that the line of skirmishers is at a
halt, and that the captain wishes to extend it to the left,
he will command :
1. Bif the left Jlanh, {so inany 2^(^ce8), extend intsrvaU.
2. March (or double quick — March.)
53. At the command inarch, the group on the right will
stand fast, all the other groups will face to the left, and
each group will extend its interval to the prescribed dis-
tance by thecaeans indicated, No. 40. *
54. The men of the same group will continue to preserve
between each other the distance of five paces, unless the
satur« ©f the ground should render it necessary tliat they
SEIBMISU DRlJ.L ANU BAYOXfcf F.XtRClSE. I4l
should close nearer, in order to keep in sight of each other.
The intervals reler to the spaces between the groups, and
re>t to the distances betw'een the men in each group. The
intervals will be taken from the right or left man of the
neighboring group.
56. If the line of skirmishers be marching to the front,
and the captain should wish to extend it to the right, he
will command:
1. On the left group {to many paces), extend inM-vals,
2. M-xncii {ov double qtiick — March.)
5*5. The loft group, conducted by the guide, will contin-
ue to march to the point of direction ; the other groups
throwing forward the left shoulder, and taking the double
quick step, will open their intervals to the prescribed dis-
tance, by the means indicated, No. 25, conforming also to
what is prescribed. No. 54.
57. Intervals may be extended on the centre of the line,
according to the same principles.
58. If in extending intervals, it be intended that one
company or platoon should occupy' a line which had been
previously occupied by two, the men «f the company or
platoon which isto retire will fall successively to the rear
as they are relieved by the extension of the intervals.
To close intervals^
59. This movement, like that of opening intervals, will
be executed according to the principles prescribed for the
deployments.
60. If the line of skirmishers be halted, and ths cap-
14.2. SKIttMISII DKILIi ANU BAVONET KXEUCISE,
tain should wish to close intervals to the left, he will coui-
manil :
1. Z?v th-^ left Jlank {no many paces) dose inlervalt,
2. March {or doulle quick— '}iI.j\.vi.ch.)
61. At the command march, the left group will stand
fast, the other groups will face to the left and close to the
prescribed distance, each group facing to ih-e enemy as it
attains its proper distance.
62. If the line be marching to the front, the captain wiU
command :
1. On the left fp'oup {so many paces) clo^e intercaU^
2. Marsh (or double qHicfc— March.)
63. The left group, conducted by the guide, will contin- ,
ue to move on in the direction previously indicated ; the
other groups, advancing the right shoulder, will close ta
the left, until the intervals are reduced to th<e prescribed
distance. ,
64. Intervals may be closed on the riglit, or o-u tht> centre,
according to the same principles.
G5. When intervals are to be closed up, in order to reiu-
foFce a line of skirmishers, so as to cause two companies
to cover the ground which had been previously occupied
by one, the new company will deploy so as to finish its
movement at twenty paces in rear of the line it is to occu-
py, and the men will successively move upon that lino, as
they sliall be unmasked by the mon of the old company.
The reserves of the two companies will unite behind the
centre of the line.
.nKIRMISII UUU.L and liAYONKT K XKIUMSI- . U^f
To relieve a company deployed as skirmishers.
6G. When a company of ?kirmidicrs is to bo relieved,
the captain will be advised of the intention, which he will
immediately communicate to his first and second lieuten-
ants.
67. The new company will execute its deployment for-
xvard, so as to finish the movement at about twenty paces
in rear of the line.
C8. Arrived at this distance, the men of the new compa-
ny, by command of their captain, will advance rapidly a
few paces beyond th6 old line at halt ; the new line being
established, the old company will assemble on its reserve,
taking care not to get into groups of fours until they are
beyond the fire of the enemy.
(59. If the skirmishers to bo relieved, are marching in
retreat, the company thrown out to relieve them will de-
ploy by the fiank, as i)rescribed. No. 38, and following.
The old skirmishers will continue to retire with order,
and having passed the new line, thej will form npnn the
reserve^
Atjticlk Seconb.
To advance.
To advance in line, and to retreat in line.
70. When a platoon or a company, deployed as skirmish-
ers, is marching by the front, the guide will be habitually
in the centre. No particular indication to this effect need
ha given in the commands, but if on the contrary it be in-
144 SKIRMISH DRILI. AND BAYONET EXKRCISK.
tended that tbe directing guide should be on the right, or
left, the command guide right, or guide I'^ft, will be given
immediately after that of forward.
71. The captain, wishing the line of skirmishers to ad-
Tance, will command ;
1. Foricard. 2. March (or dotihle quick — March.)
72. This command will be repeated with the greatest
rapidity by the chief of sections, and in case of need, by the
sergeants. This rule is general, whether the skirmishers
march by the front or by the flank.
73. At the first command, three sergeants will move
briskly on the line, the first on the right, the second on the
left, and the third in the centre.
74. At the command march, the line will more to the
front, the guide charged with the direction, will move on
to the jx>int indicated to him, the skirmishers will hold
themselves aligned on this guide, and preserve their inter-
vals toward him.
75. The chiefs of sections will march immediately behind
their sections, so as to direct their movements.
76. The captain will give a general superintendence to
the movement.
77. When he shall wish to halt the skirmishers, he Avill
comraniand :
IlAtT.
78. At this command, briskly repeated, the line will halt.
The chiefs of sections will promptly rectifj' any irregulari-
tv in the alignment and -intervals, and after taking every
SKIRMIJ^H DRILL AND BATONBT SXERCISK. 145
possible advantage which the ground may oflfer for pro-
tecting the men, they, with the three sergeants in the line,
viil retire to their proper places in rear.
79. The captain, wishing to march the skirmishers in
retreat, will command :
1. Jn retreat. I. March (or double quick — March.
SO. At the first command, the three sergeants will more
on the line as prescribed, No. 73.
81. At the command march, the skirmishers will face
about individually, and march to the rear, conforming to
the principles prescribed. No. 74.
82. The officers and sergeants will use every exertion
to preserve order.
83. To halt the skirmishers, marching in retreat, the
captain will command :
Halt.
8-J. At this command, the skirmishei's will halt, and im-
mediately face to the front.
85. The chiefs of sections and the three guides, will each
conform himself to what is prescribed. No. 7S.
To chang^e direction.
86. If the commander of a line cf skirmishers shall wish
to cause it to change direction to the right, he will com-
mand :
1. Right tcTt eel. 2. Mkv.(TSi{(si' double quick — Mauok.)
T46 SKrRMf:;H BRir.i aw bayonet exep.\;i-;e.
87. At the eominand march, the right guide will mark
time in his place ; the left guide will move in a circle to
the right, and that ho may properly regulate his morc-
ments, will occa-jionally east his eyes to the right, so as to
observe the di'fction of the line, and tiie nature of the
ground to be passed over. The centre guide will also
inarch in a circle to the right, and in order to conform his
movements to the general direction, will take care that his
fite"""' are only h.i.lf the length of the steps of the guide on
t' Joft
88. The skirmishers will regulate the length of their
steps by their distance from the marching flank, being less
as they approach the pivot, and greater as they are re-
moved from it ; they will often look to the marching flank^
fio as to preserve the direction and their intervals. .
89. When the commander of the line shall wish to re-
sume the direct march, he will command :
1. Foricard. 2. Marod.
90. At the command inarch, the line willcease to wheel,
and the skirmi.<hers will move direct to the front; the cen-
tre guide will march on the point which will be indicated
to him.
91. If the captain should wish to halt the line, in place
of moving it to the front, he will command :
Halt.
92. At this command, the line will halt.
93. A changt" of direction to the left will be made ac-
cording to the ?ame principles, and by inverse means.
\ SKlIlKISfl «)RILIi AND BATONKT EXERCISE. 147
#
y-l. A line of skirmishers marching in retreat, will
change direction by the same means, and bj the same
c^^mmands, as a line marching in advance; for example,
if the captain should wish to refuse his left, now become
the right, he will command : 1. Left ivli eel. 2. MARcn.
At the command halt, the skirmishers will face to the
cnemv.
95. But if, instead of halting the lino, the captain should
wish to continue to march it in retreat, he will, when he
judges the line has wheeled sufficiently, command ;
1. In retreat. 2. March.
To inarch by the flank.
96. The captain, wishing the skirmishera to march by
the right flank, will command :
1. Bi/thcriffhJlanJc. 2. MAncfi {or double r/vick — MARfn.)
97. At the first ccmmand, the three sergeants will place
themselves on the Hne.
98. At the command mnrck, the skirmishers will face to
the right, and move off"; the right guide will place him-
self by the side of the leading man on the right to conduct
liim, and will march on the point indicated ; each skir-
misher will take care to follow exactly in the direction of
the one immediately preceding him, and preserve his dis-
tance.
99. The skirmishers may be marched by the left flank^
according to the same principles, and by the same com-
asands, substituting' left for ri'jkf ; Wi? l.i't g-uide wil!
148 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAtONET EXERCIIB.
place himself by the side of the leading man to conduct
him.
100. If the skirmishers be marching by the flank, and
the captain should wish to halt them, he will command :
Halt.
101. At this command, the skirmishers will halt and
face to the enemy. The officers and sergeants will con-
form to what has been prescribed, No. 78.
102. The reserve should execute all the movements of
the line, and be held always about one hundred and fifty
paces from it, so as to be in position to second its opera-
tions.
103- When the chief of the reserve shall wish to march
it in advance, he will command : 1. Platoon, forward.
2. Guide left. 3. March. If he should wish to march it
in retreat, he will command : 1. In retreat. 2. March.
8. Guide right. At the command halt, it will re-face to
the enemy.
104. The men should be made to underLtand that the
elgnals or commands, such ix^ forward, mean that the skir-
mishers shall march on the enemy ; in retreat, that they
shall retire, and to the right or left flank, that the men
must face to the right or left, whatever may be fheir po-
sition.
105. If the skirmishers be marching by the flank, and
the captain should wish to change direction to the right
(or left) he will command: 1. By file right (or left) 2.
MaIvCh. These movements will be executed bv the signali
Xes. 11 and I.'),
ffiriaMKH DRILL AKB BATONBT EZERCISR. l40
Article Third.
The firinga.
106. Skirmishers will fire either at a halt or marching.
To fir eat a halt.
107. To cause this fire to bo executed, the captain will
command :
Commence — FiRINO.
108. At this command, briskly repeated, the men of the
front rank will commence firing ; they .will reload rapid-
ly, and hold themselves in readiness to fire again. During
this time the men of the rear rank will come to a ready,
and as soon as their respective file leaders hare leaded,
they will also fire and reload. The men of each fire will
thus continue the firing, conforming to this principle, that
the one or the other shall always hare his piece loaded.
109. Light troops should be always calm, so as to aim
with accuracy; they should, moreover, endeavor to esti-
mate correctly the distances between themselves and the
enemy to be hit, and thus be enabled to deliver their fire
with the greater certainty of success.
110. Skirmishers will not remain in the same place
whilst reloading, unless protected by accidents in the
ground.
To fire marching.
111. This fire will bo executed by the nam* a^raroandg
as 1%« fir^ at a halt.
150 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAy0NET EXERCISE.
112. At the command commence firing, if the line be
advancing, the front rank man of every file will halt, fire,
and reload before throwing himself forward. The rear
rank man of the same file will continue to march, and after
passing ten or twelve paces beyond his front rank man,
will halt, come to a ready, select his object, and fire when
his front rank man has loaded ; the fire will thus continue
to be executed by each file ; the skit-mishiirs will keep
united, and endeavor as much as po.ssible to preserve the
general direction of the alignment.
113. If the line be marching in retreat, at the command
commence Jiring, the front rank man of every file will halt,
face to the enemy, §re, and then reload whilst moving to
the rear j the rear rank man of the same file will continue
to march, and halt ten or twelve paces beyond his front
rank man, face about, come to a ready, and fire when his
front rank man has passed him in retreat and loaded ; after
which he will move to the rear and reload ; the front rank
man in his turn, after marching briskly to the rear, will
halt ten or twen#)' paces from the rear rank, face to the
enemy, load his piece and fire, conforming to what has
just been prescribed , the firing will thus be continued.
114. If the company be marching by the right flank, at
the command, commence Jlring , the front rank manof eve-
ry file will face to the enemy, step one pace forward, halt,
and fire; the rear rank man will continue to move for-
ward. As soon as the front rank man has fired, he will
place himself briskly behind his rear rank man and reload
whilst marching. When he has loaded, the rear rank man
will, in his turn, step one pace forward, halt, and fire ;
and returning^ to the ranks, will place himself behind
SKIRMI?!! DRILL AND BAYONET SXERCISE. 151
his front rank man ; the latter, in his turn, will act in
the same niannor, observing the same principles. At the
comrmnd, ceanefirinj, the men of the rear rank will re-
take their original positions, if not already there.
115. If the company be marchincj by the loft flank, the
fire will be executed accordinc^ to the same principles, but
in this case, it will be the rear rank men who will fire first.
116. The following ruks will be observed in the cases to
which they apply.
117. If the line be firing at a halt, or whilst marching
by the flank, at the command, Forxcard — March, it will
be the mbn whosj pieces, are loaded, without regard to
the particular rank to which they belong, who will move
to the front. Those men whose pieces have been discharg-
ed, will remain in their places to load them. before moving
forward, and the firing will be continued agreeably to the
principles prescribed, No. 112.
118. If the line be fii-ing cither at a halt, advancing, or
whilst marching by the flank, at the command. In re-
treat— March, the men whose pieces are loaded will re-
main faced to the enemy, and will fire in this position;
the men whose pieces are discharged will retreat loading
them, and the fire will be continued agreeably to the prin-
ciples prescribed, No. 113.
119. If the liiie of skirmishers be firing either at a halt,
advancing, or in retreat, at the command, By the rijlit
(or lej't)JIanh — March, the men, whose pieces arc loaded,
will step one pace out of the general alignment, fact to the
enemy, and fire in this position ; the men whose pieces are
unloaded will face to the right (or left) and march in
the direction indicated. The men who stepped out of
152 SKIRMISH BRILL A:sD TATO'BT EXERCI6E.
the ranks will place themselves, immediatelj after firing,
upon the general direction, and in rear of their front or
rear rank men, as the case may lie. The fife will be
continued according to the principles prescribed, No 114.
120. Skirmishers will be habituated to load their pieces
whilst marching ; but they will be enjoined to halt always
an instant, when in the act of charging cartridge and
priming.
121. They should be practised to fire and load kneeling,
lying down and sitting, and much liberty should be allowed
in these exercises, in order that they may be executed in
the manner found to be most convenient. Skirmishers
should be cautioned not to forget that, in whatever posi-
tion they may load, it is important that the piece should
be placed upright before ramming, in order that the entire
charge of powder may reach the bottom of the bore.
122. In commencing the fire, the men of the same rank
should not all fire at once, and the men of the same file
should be particular that one or the other of them be aU
ways loaded.
123. In retreating, the officer commanding the skir-
mishers should seize on every advantage which the ground
may present for arresting the enemy as long as possible.,
124. At the signal to cease firing, the captain will see
that the order is promptly obeyed; but the men who may
not be loaded, will load. If the line be marching, it will
continue the movement; but the man of each file who
happens to be in front, M'ill wait until the man in rear shall
be abreast with him.
125. If a line of skirmishers be firing advancing, at tho
♦ommand/irt?/, the line will re-form upon the ^kirmisUevs
AKIRUISU DRILL i.N'D BATQ^'ET EZEROISB. Ibo
who are in front ; when the line ia retreating, upon the
skirmisherB who are in rear.
126. Officers should watch with the greatest posaiblo
Tigilance over a line of skirmishers; in battle they should
neither carry a rifle or fowling piece. In all the firings,
they, as well as the sergeants, should see that order and
silence are preserved, and that the skirmishers do not
wander imprudently ; they should especially caution them
to be calm and collected ; not to fire until they distinctly
perceive the objects at which they aim, and are sure that
those objects are within proper range. Skirmishers should
take advantage promptly, and with intelligence, of all
eheltcr, and of all accidents of the ground, to conceal
themselves from the view of the enemy, and in protect
themselves from his fire. It may often happen that inter.
vals are momentarily lost when several men near each other
find a common shelter ; but when they quit this position,
they should immediately resume their intervals and their
places in line, so that they may not, by crowding, needless-
ly expose themselves to the fire of the enemy.
Article Fourth.
THE RALLY.
To form column,
127. A company deployed as skirmishers, is rallied in
order to oppose the enemy with better success ; the rallies
are made at a run, and with bayonets fixed ; when ordered
to rally, the gkirmishors fix bayonets without command.
154 SKIRMISH DRILL AND BAYONET KXERflgE.
128. There are several ways of rallying, which the chief
of the line will adopt according to circumstances.
129. If the line, marching* or at a halt, be merely dis-
turbed by scattered horsemen, it will not be necessary to
fall back oji the reserve, but the captain will cause bayo-
nets to be fixed. If the horsemen should, however, ad-
vance to charge the skirmishers, the captain will com-
mand, rally hy fours. The line will halt, if marching, and
the four men of each group will execute this rally in the
following manner : the front rank man of the even num-
bered file will take the position of guard again't cavalry ;
the rear rank man of the odd numbered file will also take
the position oi guard agmmt cavalry, turning his back to
him, his right foot thirteen inches from the right foot of
the former, and parallel to it ; the front fank man of the
odd file, and the rear rank man of the even file, will also
place themselves back to back, taking a like position, and
between the two men alreadly established, facing to the
right and left ; the right feet of the four men will be
brought together, forming a square and serving for mutu-
al support. The four men in each group will come to a
ready, fire as occasion may oflfcr, and load without moving
iheir feet.
130. The captains and chiefs of sections will each cause
the four men who constitute his guard to form square, the
men separating so as to enable him and the bugler to place
themselves in the centre. The three sergeants will each
promptly place himself in the group nearest him in the
line of skirmishers.
131. When ever the captain shall judge these squares too
weak, but should wish to hold his position by strengthen-
n^: his lin-v h* v ill ce;nmand :
SKIRMISH BRILL A!» BAYONET EXERCISS, 155
Jially hy sections.
132. At this command, the chiefs of sections will more
rapidly on the centre group of their respective sections,
or on any other interior group whose position might offer
a shelter, or other paiticul.ir advantage; the skirmishers
will collect rapidly at a run on this group, and without
distinction of numbers. The men composing the group on
which the formation is made, will immediatel}' form square,
as heretofore explained, and elevate their pieces, the bayo-
nets uppermost, in order to indicate the point on which
the rally is to be made. The other skirmishers, as they ar-
rive, will occupy and fill the open angular spaces between
these four men, .and successiTcly rally around this first
nucleus, and in such manner as to form rapidly a complete
circle. The skirmishers will tjrke, as they arrive, the po-
sition of charge bayonet, the point of the bayonet more
elevated, and will cock their pieces in this position. The
movement concluded, the two exterior ranks will fire as
occasion may offer, and load without moving their feet.
133. The captain wifl move rapidly with his guard,
wherever he may judge his presence most necessary.
134. The officers and sergeants will be particular to ob-
serve that the rally is made in silence, and with prompti-
tude and order ; that some pieces in each of their subdi-
visions be at all times loaded, and that the fire is directed
on those points only where it will be most effective.
135. If the reserve should be threatened, it will form in-
to a circle around its chief.
136. If the captain, or commander of a line of skirmish-
ers formed ofmanv platoon?, should judge that the rally
156 tKlRUlSe DRILL ANP BAYONET EXBaCISi;.
by sections does not offer sufficient resistance, he will
cause the rally by platoons to be executed, and for this
purpose, will command : ^
Rally by platoons^
137. This movement will be executed according to the
same principles, and by the same means, as the rally by
sections. The chiefs of platoons will conform to what has
been prescribed for the chiefs of sections.
138. The captain wishing to rally the skirmishers on the
reserve, will command :
Rally on the reserve.
139. At this command, the captain will, move briskly on
the reserve ; the officer who commands it will take imme-
diate steps to form square ; for this purpose, he will cause
the half sections on the flanks to be thrown perpendicular-
ly to the rear ; he will order the men to come to a ready.
140. The skirmishers of each section, taking the run,
will form rapidly into groups, and upon that man of each
group who is nearest the centre of the section. These
groups will direct themselves diagonally toward each oth-
er, and in such manner as to form into sections with the
greatest possible rapidity while moving to the rear ; the
officers and sergeants will see that this formation is made
in proper order, and the chiefs will direct their sections
upon the reserve, taking care to unmask it to the right
and left. As the skirmishers arrive, they will continue
and complete the formation of the square begun by the re-
serve, closing in rapidly upon the latter, without regard
i« their place? in line t thoV will come to a ready without
KIRVISB DRir.I. ANB BATONEI SIEF.CI8S. IdT
eommand, and fire upon the enemy ; which will also be
done by the reserve as soon as it is unmasked by the skir-
mishers.
141. If a section should be closely pressed by cavaly
while retreating, its chief wiU command halt ; at this com-
mand,J,he men will form rapidly into a compact circle
around the otficer, who will re-form his section and resume
the march, the moment be can do so with safety.
14'2. The formation of the square in a prompt and effi-
cient manner, requires coolness and activity on the part
of both officers and sergeants.
143. The captain will also profit by every moment of
respite which the enemy's cavalry may leave him ; as soon
as he can, he will endeavor to place himself beyond the
reach of their charges, either by gaining a position where
he may defend himsef with advantage, or by returning to
the corps to which he belongs. For this purpose, being in
square, he will cause the company to break into column
by platoons at half-distanee ; to this effect, he will com-
mand :
1. Foi'ni column. 2. March.
144. At the command march, each platoon will dress on
its centre, and the platoon which was facing to the rear
will face about without command. The guides will place
themselves on the right and left of theirj respective pla-
toons, those of the second platoon will place themselves at
half distance from those of the first, counting from the
rear rank. These dispositions being made, the captain can
move the column in whatever direction he may judge
proppr.
158 SKlEiHSH DRILL iJST) BAYONET EXERCISE.
145. If he wishes to march it in retreat, he will com-
mand : '
1. In retreat. 2. March (or douhle .^jucA;— March. )
146. At the command march, the column will immedi-
ately face by the rear rank, and move off in the opposite
direction. As soon as the column is in motion, the captain
will command :
3. Guide right (or left.)
147. He wiU indicate the direction to the leading guide,
the guides will march at their proper distances, and the
men will keep aligned.
148. If again threatened by cavaly, the captain will
command :
1. Form square. 2. March.
149. At the command march, the column will halt ; the
first plotoon will face about briskly, and the outer half sec-
tions of each platoon will be thrown perpendicularly to
the rear, so as to form the second and third fronts of the
square. The officers and sergeants will promptly rectify
any^irregularities which may be committed.
150. If he should wish to march the column in advancGj
the captain will command :
], Form column. 2. March.
151. Which will be executed as prescribed, No. 174.
152. The column being formed, the captain will com-
mand ;
^fMBMlSU OTHtt ANI> BATUNEt ElKRtTSE, 153
1, Forward. 2. Mahgh (or doable fjJtlck — March. )
Guide left (or right.)
lo3. At the second command, the calunui will move for-
ward, and at the third command, the nicii will take the
touch of elbows to the side of the guide.
lot. Iftlic captain should wish the column to gain
;:;round to the right or left, ho will do so by rapid wheels
to the side opposite the guide, and for tlii? purpose, will
change the guide whenever it maj be neces5ary.
155. If a company be in column by platnnn, at half dis-
tance, right in front, the captain can dci)lc)y the first pla-
toon as skirmishers by the means already ?xplained ; but
if it should be the wish to deploy the second platoon for-
ward on the centre file, leaving the fir^t platoon in reserve,
he will command :
1. Second platoon — as tikinnixhcrH. '1. On the centre file —
tftlce intervals. 3. March (or fZoi(6?c quick — MAUcn.)
156. At the first command, the chief of the first platoon
will caution his platoon , to stand fast; the chiefs of sec-
tions of the second platoon will place them.sclvcs before
the centre of their sections ; the fifth sergeant will placo
himself one pace in front of the centre of the second pla-
toon.
157. At the second command, the chief of the right sec-
tion, ::ccond platoon, will command : Section, right face ;
the chief of the left secticn : Section, left face.
158. At the command march, the-so sections will move
ott" briskly in opposite directions, and having unmasked the
the fir'-'t platoop, the chief ff fcct-ions will respectively
160 »S.1KMISH KDILL ANB B.VTOiiET EXERCISK.
command: Jiy the left flank — March, and By the right
Jlank — March; and as soon as the sections arrire on the
alignment of the first platoon, they will command : Jin
«kirmisher8 — MAucn. The group will then deploy accord-
ing to prescribed principles, on the right group of the left
section, whicli will be directed by the fifth sergeant on the
point indicated.
159. If the captain should wish the deployment made by
the flank, the second platoon will be moved to the front by
the means above stated, and haltea after passing some steps
beyon the alignment of the first platoon ; the deployment
will then be made by the flank according to the princi-
ples prescribed.
160. When one or more platoons are deployed as skir-
mishers, and the captain should wish to rally them on the
battalion, he will command :
Rally on the, battalion.
IGl. At this command, the skirmishers and the reserve
no matter what position the company to which they belong
may occupy in order of battle, will rapidly unmask the
front of the battalion, directing themselves in a run to-
ward its nearest flank, and then form in its rear.
162. As soon as the skirmishers have passed beyond the
line of file closers, the men will take the quick step, and
the chief of each platoon or section will re-form his sub-
division, and place it in column behind the wing on which
it is rallied, and at ten paces from the rank of file closers.
These subdivisions will not be moved except by order of
the commander of the battalion, who may, if he thinks
•) ^^opcT, throw tliem into line of battl- at the extremities of
the line, or in the intervals between the battalions.
163. If man}' platoons shonid be united behind the same
^inp; of a battalion, or behind any shelter whatsoever,
they shouW be fornaod ahray« into cloce column, or into
ct>lamn at half distancf.
104. V.'hen a battalion, covcrod by a company of skir-
wiii-hers, .«hall be formed into square, the platoooaand sec-
tions of the covering company will be directed bj their
chiefs to the rear of the square, which will be opened at
the angles to receive the skirmishers, who will be then
formed into close column by platoona in rear of the first
front of the square.
165. If circumstances should prevent the angles of the
square from being opened, the pkirmi.'licri? will throw
themselves at the feet of the front rank men, the right,
knee on the ground, the butt of the piece testing on the
thigh, the bayonet in a threatening position. A part may
also place themselves about the angles, where they can
render good service by defending the ?cctiuos without fire.
166. If the battalion on which the skirmishers are ral-
lied be in column ready to form square, the skirmisher--
will be formed into cloee column by platoon, in rear of the
centre of the third division, and at the command. Form
«quarc — Mabch, they will move forward and close on thy
buglers.
107. When skirmishers have been r.illicd by platoon (»i
section behind the wings of a battalion, and it be wished
to deploy them again to the front, they will be marched
by the flank toward the intervals on the wings, and be
then deplovod so at* to cover the front of the battalion.
6 ' '
I(t3 SKIKUISH DRILL A}M> BATOMEX SXHRCISK.
168. When platoons or sections, placed in the interior
©f squares and columns, are to be depToyed, tkey will be
inarched oat by the flanks, and then thrown forward, as is
prescribed, No. 157 ; as soon as they shall have unmasked
the column or square, they will be deployed, the one od
the right, the other on the left file.
The assmhly.
169. A company deployed a3 skirmishers will bd assem-
bled when there is no longer danger of being disturbed }
the assembly will be made habitually in quick time.
170. The captain wishing to assemble the skirmishers oa
the reserve, will command ;
Jiaaemhle on the reterve.
171. At this eommand, the skirmishers will assemble by
groups of fours ; the front rank men will place themselves
behind their rear rank men ; and caeh groap cf foars wiU
direct itself on the reserve, where each will take its proper
place in the ranks. When the company is re-formed, it
will rejoin the battalion to which it belongs.
172. It may be also proper to assemble the skismishers
«n the centre, or on the right or left of the line, either
inarching or at a halt.
175. If the captain should wish to assemble them on the
centre whilie marching, he will command :
Asetmhle ©u the centre,
174. At this command, the centre guide will continu©
to march directly to the front on the point indicated ; the
front rank nxaa of the directing file vnW follow the guide,
and be corered by hia rear rank man ; the oth»r two com-
radec of this irroup. and likewise thope on their left, will
march diagonally, advancing tlie \-eft shoulder and accele-
rating the gait, so as to re-form the groups while drawing
nearer and nearer the directing file; the men of the right
section will unite in (he same manner into groups, and
then upon the directing file, throwing forward the righ^
shoulder. As they succesi'ivcly unite on th« centre, tho
men will bring their pieces to the right shoulder.
175. To assemble on the right or left will be executed
according to the samo principles.
176. The assembly of a line marching io retreat will alsa
be ejcecuted a<vording to the came principles, the front
rank men inarching behind their rear rank men.
177. To assemble the line of nklrraishers at a halt, and
on the line they occupy, the captain will gire the same
commands ; the pkirmisherg will face to the right or left,
aopording as they should inarch by the right or left flank,
re-form the groups w bile marching, and thus arrive on the
file which ecrvcd as the point of formation. As they sue-
ceesiTely Ririre, the skirmiflhers will support arm«.
Article Fii-TJf.
T<'> deploi/ a battalion a$ ihirmtHherft, and Io rally this bat-
talion.
To deploy iha battalion ns ekirmiihert.
178. A battalion being in line ot battle, if the comman-
irt<T ?bou!d wish to depley it on tJie right of the eixth com-
pany, holding tbe three right companies in reserve, will sig-
nify hiri intention to the lieutenant-colonel and adjutant,
and also to the major, wlio will be directed to take charge
of the reserve. He will point out to the lieutenant-colo-
nel the direction he wishes to give the line, as well aa the
point where he wishes the right of the siztb company to
rest, and to the commander of the reserve tbo place he
may wish it established.
179. The lieutenant-colonel will move rapidly in front
of the right of the 8ixth company, and the adjutant in
front of the left of the same compacy. The commander
of tbe reserve will dispose of it in the mat>nf»r to be herc-
ioafer indicated.
180. The colonel will command :
1. First (or second) i^latoons — c? skirmiihetf^,
2. On the right of the sixth company — tala: intcrvah,
3. Map.CK (or double quicJc) — Mabch.
181. At the second command, the captains of the fifth
and sixth companies v/ill prepare to deploy the first pla-
toons of their respective companies, the sixth on its right,
the fifth on its left file.
182. The captain of the fourth company will face it to
the right, and the captains of the seventh and eight com-
panies will face ihcir respective companies to the left.
183. At the command march, the movement will com-
mence. The platoons of the tifth and sixth companies
will deploy forward ; the right guide of the sixth will
march on the point which will be indicated to him by the
lieutenant colonel.
]8i. The company which ha? faci>d ^o the rig-bt. and
aUo the companies uhich bare faced to the left will march
straight forward. The fourth company will take an in-
terval of one hundred paces counting from the left cf the
fifth, and its chief will deploy its first platoon on its left
file. The seventh and eighth companies will each take au
Interval of one hundred paces, counting from the first file
of the company, which is immediately on its right ; and the
chiefs of these comjianies will afterward deploy their first
platoons on the right file.
186. The guides who conduct the filee on which the de-
ployment is made, should be careful to direct themselves
toward the outer man of the neighboring company, al-
ready deployed as tkirmishers ; or if the company has not
finished its deployment, they will judge carefullv the dis-
tance which ma3-^till be required to place all these filesin
line, and will then march on the i)oint thus marked out.
The companies, as they arrive on the line, will align thcni-
aelvcs on those already deployed. ,
186. The lieutenant-colonel and adjutant will follow the
deployment, the one on the right, the other on the left;
the movement concluded, they will place themselves near
the colonel.
1S7. The reserves of the companies will he established
in echellon in the following manner : the reserve of tlj<»
sixth company will be placed one liundred and fifty paces
in rear of the right of this company ; the reserves of the
fourth and fiflli companies, unined, opposite the centre of
their line of skirmi.-iherp, and thirty paces in advance of
the reserve of the sixth company ; the reserves of tlie
seventh and eighth companies, also united, opposite the
<rntrc of their line of .'lji;j!ii?h."r?, and thittv paofp far-
ther to the rear than the reserve of the eixth compaay.
188. The major comniandir.g the companies compoeiug
the reserve, on receiving an order from the colonel to that
effect, will march these companiee thirty paces to the
rear, and will then deploy them into column by company,
at half distance ; after which, he will conduct the column
to the point which shall have been indicated to him.
189. The colonel will have a pjeneral superintendence of
the movement ; and when it it finished, will move to a
point in rear of the line, whence his view may best em-
brace all the parts, in order to diiect their movements.
190. If, instead cf deploying forward, it be desired to
deploy by the; flank, the sixth and fifth companies will be
moved to the front ten or twelve paces, halttd, and deploy-
ed by the flank, the one on the right the other on the left
file, by the means already indicated. Each of the other
companies will be marched by the flank; and as soon as -
the last file of the .company; next toward the direction,
phall have taken its interval, it will be moved upon the line
established by the fifth and sixth companies, halted and
deployed.
191. In the proceeding example, it has been eupposcd
that the battalion was in order of battle ; but if in column,
it would be deployed as skirmishers by the same command*
and according to the same principles.
192. If the deployment is to be ma.de fortcard, the di-
rectino" company, as soon as it is unmasked, will be moved
ten or twelve paces in front of the head of the column,
and will be then deployed on the file indicated. Each of
the other companies will take its interval to the right or
Irft. and detploy aff °^oob 9^ it is tak«T».
ffivtn?Mas vtAL Jijct 9k f SMI E:siR«nT. 16V
193. If the deployment in to be made by the flank, the
directing company Tvill be moved in the same manner to
the front, as soon as it is unmasked, and will then be halted
and deploy«!d by the flank on the file indicated. Each of
the other companies will be marched by the flank, and when
its interval is taken, will be moved on the line, halted, and
deployed as foon as the company next towards the direction
shall have finij-hed its dt-ployment.
194. It has been prescribe! to place the reserves in
echellon, in order that they may, in the event of a rally,
be able to protect themselves without injuring each other;
and the reserves of two contiguous companies have been
united, in order to diminish the number of the ecbellons,
and to increase their capacity for resisting cavalrr.
195. Theechellons, in the example given, descend from
right to left, but they may, oh an indication from the colo-
nel to the effect, be posted on the same principle, so as to
descend from left to right.
196. When the color-company is to be deployed as skir-
mishers, the color, without its guard, will be detached, and
remain with the battalion reserve.
The rally.
197. The colonel may cause all the various movements
prescribed for a company, to be executed by the battalion,
and by the same commands and the same signals. When
he wishes to rally the battalion, he will cause the rally on
the battalion to be sounded, and will so dispose his reserve
as to protect this movement.
198. The companies deployed as skirmishers will be ral-
lied ia pqutrts ©n their resper live rwerres : each rsfervf
168 SXJPvMtSH DRILL A^D BATUNET BXBRCI68,
of tw"0 contipfuous companies will form the first front of
the square, throwing to the rear the sections on the flanks ;
the skirmishers who arrive first will complete the lateral
fronts, and the last the fourth front. The officers and ser-
geants will superintend the rally ; as fast as the men ar-
rive, they will form them into two ranks, without regard
to height, and cause them to face outward.
199. The rally being effected, the commanders of square
will profit by any interval of time the cavalry may allow
for putting them in safety, either by marching upon the
battalion reserve, or by seizing an advantageous position ;
to this end each of the squares will be formed into column,
and march in this order ; and if threatened anew, it will
halt, and again form itself into square.
200. As the captains successively arrive near the battal-
ion-reserve, each will re-form as promptly as possible, and
without regard to designation or number, take place in
the column next in rear of the companies already in it.
201. The battalion reserve will also form square, if it-
self threatened by cavalry. In this case, the companies in
marching toward it will place themselves promptly in the
sectors without fire, and thus jiiarch on the squares.
BAYONET EXEltriSR.
1. lu teaching the men these exercises, the instructor
fihould cause them to form in one rank, with an interval
of four paces between each man, so that in the execution
of the movements, they may not come in conflict with each
other.
2. The instructor seeing the recruits in the proper po-
sition, and at alight infantry shoulder, will command:
Take- Gvxnx). {Fig. 1.)
One time and txco motions.
3. (First motion. ) Make a half face to the right, keep-
ing the heela together ; turn the left toe square to the
front, the feet forming a right angle, and at the same time
raise a little the piece with the right hand.
4. (Second motion.) Carry the right foot about eigh-
teen inches backward, the right heel on the prolongation
of the left, the body erect and perpenriicular on both legs,
no that the weight of the body is divided equally between
them, the knees bent, and take the position of charge
bayonet.
5. The instructor wishing to allow the recruits a rest
when on guard, will first command :
Shoulder— \u-H9.
Ci. At this command, spring the muekct up smartly into
the h'.lloiv of the ri|jlit ^llOulf^»^. and ret.;'r.e (he poHitioH
7, The instructor will then command Rrst, at which
command the piece will be brought to the position oi'order
arms, and the men are no longer required to remain im-
movable or to preserve silence.
Fig. 1.
fOdiiion of the (Juard.
8. The instructor wishing to resume the position of
guard, will first bring the squad to ativntlon, and com-
mand, Shott^cfvr — Akm», wUioU boing done, ha will com-
isand :
Take — Gtaru.
9. At this command, raise the piece quicklj with the
right hand, seizing it with the left, at the height of the
right breast, and at the same time grasp the small of tho
etock with the right hand, taking the guard, a? before ex-
plained.
DEVELOP AN'D VOLTS.
10. The recruit being in the pof^ition of guard, the in-
structor will command:
Z)crc7o/»— March. (Fij. 2.)
One time and one motion.
11. At the command mrrrcA, advance quicklv the left
foot about twelve inch(.'s, the left leg vertical and the knee
perpendicular with the ankle ; the right foot flat on the
ground, the right kg extended and straight, the body re-
maining erect.
12. At the command Guahd, re-take the position of
guard by bringing back the left foot to its former position.
13. The instructor will then command:
Advance — Makch.
On* time and tico mottom.
14. (First motion. ) At the commaad marcA, carry the
right foot against the left heel.
15. (Second motion. ) Advance the left foot nbnut eigh-
teen inches, preserving the po&ition of the piece and the
body.
/?e^rca«— Makoh.
9r« ''*n* mnm '»^« m9''.»f>t.
172
SRfKMIsin »RjLl> AM» i<ATO.N.Sr HXSKVISU.
16. (First motion. ) Bring back the left foot agaicst iha
rij^ht.
17. (Second motion.) Carry the right foot eighteen
inches to the lea.".
/V^. 2.
Dcveloj).
One pace to right — March.
One time and two motions.
18. ( First motion. ) Carry th(5,ri^hfc foot about eighteen
inches t© tfee ri«rht in thp same directiea.
lilHUttH DRILL aJSP BaTOXET CX£hil€S. K-i
10, (Second motion,) Bring Immediately the leftfoo:
the game (listfloce, and to the ««*me reiative position to ib'
rijflit, that it before occupied.
One pace to (he /c//— Mauck.
One time and two motions.
20. (First motion.) Carry the left foot about cigTitocn
inches to the left.
21. (Second motion. ) Bring- back immediately the rigKt
foot to it/* distance, and in its position-
Jiight—V uLT.
Oi'C titnc and one nioiin-.u
I'l. Turn to the right on the toe of the left foot, (tl.«,
ripht f(»ot dcscribinjj the quarter of an arc of a circle ;
plant the right foot in its proper place and distance, kceii-
u\% tlio piece in the position of guard.
Left — Volt.
23. Turn to the left on the toe of the left foot, (tt-
right foot describing the quarter of an arc of a circle) ,
plant the rigfht foot in its proper place and distance, kee;i-
ing the piece in the position of gnrird.
'ii. The instructor should explain to the men that ther o
movements are the same as right or left face in squad dnll,
except that the position of guard is always maintained.
R'ght rear — Vor.T.
2j. At thif command, turn on the toe of the left fo€f,
(the right foot dccfcribiug the half on an arc of a circle-
prant the foot in its proper place and distance; keeping the
pice© in the position of guard.
Left rear— YoLT,
26. Tnrn on the too of the left foot, (the right foot de-
acriblng the half of an arc of a circle,) plant the foot in its
proper place and distance, keeping the piece in the posi-
tion h{ guard.
27. In all the volts, the instructor shall be careful to ex-
plain to the men, that when the word right, is used, they
must carry the right foot, in turnins:, in the directien of
their rear, and when Uft is used, in the direction of their
front. In the right or left rear volt, the recruit faces qoicft-
ly to tho full rear, as in ahoutface.
1. Pasaade — 2. March.
One time and two motions.
26. (First motion.) Throw the right foot eighteen incb^
es in fVont of the left, the inside of it kept to the front.
20. (Second motion.) Carry quickly the left foot eigh-
teen inches in front of the right, preserving the guard.
1. Leap to the rear — 2. March.
0/jft time and twa nioiiofis,
30. Threw the weight of the body on the left Tog, an^
spring backward as far as possible, lighting on the toes
and preserving the guard.
COMBINATION OF THE MOVEMENTS,
ai. "When the men are perfectly acquainted with th-e
above movements, the instructor will cause them to exe*
t'uie the various movements put together, at the com-
suiaQ March, Example :
SKIRMISH DMLL A.SD BATOSBT BXBB6ISS. 17»
I. Hight Tear voJt and develop— 2^ Mi.ECa.
32. At this command the men will execute what hai
been prescribed in right rear— Volt No. 25, and after fao
ing to the rear they will extend the left foot as haa been
prescribed in Dbvblop No. 11.
1. Left rear voU and develop — 2. Marck«
33. At tho command march, first execute aa has beea
prescribed in No. 26, then execute what is prescribed in
No. 11, preBcrring the guard ia both cases.
1. Paimde audd€velop^2. MinCH.
34. At the command march, first execute what has beea
prescribed in Passabb No. 28, and then what is prescribed
in No 11.
1.- Right rear volt, paaaaJe, and develop — 2. Marcb.
One time and three motio»f,
35. (First motion.) Execute what has been prescribel
for right rear voltj No. 27.
3G. Second motion. ) Execute what has been prescribed
for Passadk No. 28.
37. (Third motion.) Execute what has b-jen prescribed
for Develop No. 11.
38. The instructor may vary these movements as he
sees proper, but should see that the men understand them
and can execute them promptly at tho word of command.
39. When the men understand these movements tibor-
oughly they will be taught the «ee of their weapon for at-
tack an(i d<^fen<^e.
ITG s&rKuisu bXitLh an» BAyoNEr exkroisb.
PARRIES AND THRUSTS.
' 40. Them^u being well-established in the principles and
-mechanism of the guard, and being in that position, the
instructor ■will command ;
1. Ill curie jHiVrtf. 2, Akms.
. 41. At the second command, raise the muzzle of the
piece twelve inches with the left hand, without moving
the right; at the aame time move the piece about six
inches to the left, and remain in that position.
f- 42. The men will, after the execution of each of the fol-
lowing; in -ivementS;, resume the position of guard / to effect
this the instructor will, after each motion, command i
Take. — GuAiip.
43. At which Ihc^men will resume quickly the position
of the guard.
1. In iierce 2iart y. 2. Aums.
44. Raise) quickly the muzzle of the piece twelve incUca
■ with the left hand, without moving; the right ; at the same
time move the piece with the left hand six inches to the
'right, and remain In that position until the command re-
' iutna (jv.ard :
I. In prime parry. 2. Arms.
Kh. \\i'\?<i th»» pifc? with hMh hand-^, th? arnja fullr ftt.
« >»i*« t'K I t.
tt-ndfd, ibe piece cororing the head, the lock plate turufd
to'A'ard^ the body, the barrel grasped by the thumb and
fore-fingor ofthe left hand, the bayonet menacing, although
slightly inclined to the lef*., the tail band at the top of the
hat.
1. hi prime right ot left) parri/^ 2. AnMS.
Hi. Advance the left shoulder for the ripht abo«lUer)
and parry I'as explained in 45) to the right or the left.
]. Li rnric thrust. 3. Arvs.
<7. At the second command, throw the '.veight of tUe
hody forward ; bend the left knee and etraighten the
right; extend the left arm in full, the fin£r:'r3 of the Ifft
handjjeing open and maintaining the piece ; bringing the
butt before the left breast, the lock-plate turned down-
ward ; and reiiiain in that posltidn until tlio ei>nimand. tnhe
fftiard .
I. In tieic thrufif. 2. Ahm-;.
48. Bring the upper part of the body forward ; straight-
en the right knee and bend the left; fully extend the loft
arm, the fingers of the left hand being open and maintain-
ing the piece, the lock-plato turned i;pwnrd, the butt be-
lure tho right b»ca?t :
1. In prime thrust. -. Aum5.
■t;>. Elerat? the pleee with holh listed?, the ormi b«it)!»
jKle'ndcd. lk« trijfjtiv guard un\v;):d, tk« l.arr-.'l hotwecra
the thumb and fingers of the left hand ; bepd the left knee
and straighten the right, thurst at the same time the piece
at the adrersary, directing the blow at the height of a man
on horseback.
1. In prime to the right (or left) thrust. 2. Arms.
50. Advance the left shoulder (or the right shoulder,)
advance to the right (or left) as explained in No. 49.
1. Lunge. 2. Arms.
51. At the second comnaand, throw the upper part of the
body forward, by bending the left knee and straightening
the right ; thrust rapidly the piece at the adversary, fully
extending the right arm, leaving off with the left hand
when thrusting, which is kept extended to receive th«
piece, and resume guard.
62. When the men are on guard against infantry, they
will thrust at the height of the breast of a man ; when on
guard against cavalry, they will aim the blow at the
height of the horses head, or of the sides of the horse-
man.
63. When tJie instructor shall wish to bring the men to
the position of guard against infantry, or cavalry, from
fihoulder arms, he will command :
1. Guard against Infantry — 2. Guard. {Fig. ^.)
One time and two motions.
54. (First motion.) Make a half face to the right on
both heels, ths^ feet square ; rai.se at the same time the
piece a little, and seize it with the left band below MXJ
»i»ar tlio middle )tini.
rmiRMrsK ikul a!t» batoxit bxcrciik.
17>
l»5. (Second motion.) Bring the right l<gto the rear
p'^rpondicularLy, about eighteen inches, th? right heel ou
the same line with the left ; the knees a little bent, the
weight of the body bearing equally on both legs ; lower
the piece with both hands, the barrel upward, the left el-
rirj. 3.
m
bow pressing against the body ; sicze at the same time the
piece below the trigger guard with the right band; the
arms hauj^iny natarally, th* fff>lBt of th* bayonet sliy'h't-
It elpvat^H.
IbQ
Ki!;^U^a Ur-n.!, A\» BATO.NKr UXttCtfl*?.
One time ami ons motion.
50. Raise the piece with the left haud ; l)iiug at the
«amc time the right heel on the alignmyiii of tho U-ft, and
face to the front.
1. Guard ngain^t C'lcahi/ — 2. GuARO. {Fi<j. ■{.)
One time and tico mo'ions.
57. Tho lirst and second motions as in guard ai,'aiu«t ia-
fantry, with the'exceptien that the right hand will be fit-
(Ficj.L) .
Guard against Qavolri;.
od at thf hip. and the bavonet aa higli a.? ihe r_x p a? Ih tk**
)w.>,silion oi' (iMv^? havn((f»t-
KKUiMISB Vnil.L \^}i BATUMI EXEr.c;**. 181
jt<. When tlie men arc perfectly acquainted with thcdi-
veri paces, parries and thrusts, the instructor will causo
them to execute these motions put together, at the com-
mand jnarck. Example :
1. Paanade forward, in prime pdrry and thrii*t. — 2
MAHcn.
55. At the second command the men will ticcuto \v1i«i
Has been prciciibed for paseade, parry in prime, and thruit
in prime.
60. These morcmcnta and combinations maj be varied
as the instructor may think proper, but he ehould always
execute some movement that will be useful to the nicn in
either attack or dcfonfic, and should explain to th»m iti
object.
1|2 |1T;t!lt> 91A.MSir/; STt.
i
MANUAL OF THE SWORD OR SABRE, FOR
OFFICERS.
POSITION or THE SWORD OR SABRE, UNDER ARMS.
The carry. The gripe is in the right hand, which will
be supported against the right hip, the back of the blafde
against the shoulder.
TO SALUTE WITH THE SWORD OR SABRE.
Threetimei (or pautei.)
One. At the distance ot six paces from th» persen to bt
saluted, raise the sword or sabre perpendicularly, th«
point up, the flat of the blade opposite to the right eye,
the guard at the height of the shoulder, the elbow sup*
ported on the body.
Ttco. Drop the point of the sword or sabre by extending
the arm, so that the right hand may be brought to the
side of the right thigh, and remain in that position until
the person to whom the salute is rendered shall be passed
or shall hare passed, six paces.
Three. Raise the sword or sabre smartly, and place th«
back of the blade against the right shoulder.
COLOR-SALUTE.
In the ranks, the color-bearer, whether at a halt sr ia
TMarcTi, will iRlw»;Tg ^ari't tVe h«?«1 ff tlie «^lcfr-!aB'<J» *o>-
poitdd at the right hip, the right hand generally placed
on the lance at the height of the shoulder, to hold it stead j.
When the color has to render honors, the color-bearer will
salute as follows :
At the distance of six paces slip the right hand along the
lance to the height of the eye ; lower the lance by straight-
ening the arm to its full extent, the heel of the lance re-
maining at the hip, and bring back the lance to the ha-
bitual position when the person saluted shall be passed, or
flhall have passed, six paces.
MANUAL
FOR RELIEVING SENTISELS.
One time and one motion.
Throw the piece diagonally across the body, the lockt»
the front, seize it smartly at the same instant with both
hands, the right at the handle, the left at the lower band,
the two thumbs pointing toward the muzzle, the barrel
sloping uoward and crossing opposite the point of the left
shoulder, the butt propoitionally lowered. The palm of
the right hand will be above, and that of the left under
the piece, the naila of both hands next to the body, to
which the elbows will be closed.
Shot IJcr — Abms.
^ . One time anl tno motions.
( /Tnrf >w.»fa oil. ) Brinj {\9 pieces enntrttr t« t>« m^bt
184
HKUKYl-Ntf .«iKNTJ.N.K}.S. Kit.
shoulder, placing the right hand aa in the position of
shoulder arma, slip the left hand to the height of the shoul-
der, the fingers extended.
{Second motion. ) Drop the left had smartly by the side.
Being on parade and at order arms, if it be wished to
give the men reat, the command will be :
Parade — Rest.
At the command rest, turn the piece on the heel of the
butt, the barrel to the left, the muzzle in front of the cen-
tre of the body ; seize it at the same time >vith the left
hand just above, and with the right at the upper band ;
carry the right foot six inches to the rear, the left knee
elightly bent. .;
INSTRUCTION
FOR THE CHIEF BUGLER AND DRUM-MAJOR.
The posts of the field music and band have been given,
Title I, for the order in battle.
In column in manauvre, the field music and band will
march abreast with the left centre company, and on the
fide opposite the guide.
In column in route, as well as in passage of defiles, to
the front or in retreat, they will march at the head of their
respective battalions.
!Ss'fntCilt»> FOR tHIEF BCGl/ER, R1». lib
GENERAL CALLS.
1. Attention.
2. The general.
3. The atscmbli/.
4. To the color.
5. The recall.
f>. Quick time.
7. Double quick time.
8. The charge.
9. The reveille.
10. Retreat.
11. Tattoo.
12. To extinguishliyhtu,
13. A^f^enihly of the buglent.
It. ^^Hficmhly of the guard.
15. Orders for orderly sergeanta.
IG. For ojjicers to take their placet
in li7ie after firing.
17. r/ic dixjierse.
18. Officers' call.
19. Breakfast call.
20. Dinner call.
21. ^icfc ca?/.
22. Fatigue call.
23. C^«rc^ ca«.
24. Drill call.
2-5. School tall.
1^^ XNftTAV«T>MJ? DfJt aklZr nVtlkKSi, BTC>
CALLS FOR SKIRMISHERS.
1. Fix bayonet.
'1. Uiijlx bayonet.
3. Quick time. ^
■4. Double quick time.
6. The run.
6. Deploy a,a tkirmishert.
7. Forward.
8. In retrtat.
9. Halt,
10. ^y <A« right Jlanh.
11. J?y «/»« leftfianh.
)fi. Commence firing f
13. Cease firing.
14. Change direction to (he right.
15. Change direction to the left.
16. Xitf down.
17. iZtse «p.
18. Rally by fonrt.
19. Rally by sections.
20. Rally by platoons.
21. Rally on the reserve.
22. i?a?Zy on ^Ae battalion.
23. Assemhlt on the batalion.
Note. — When the whole of the troops, in the same
camp or garrison, are to depart, the general, the asvtmbly
and to the color, will be beaten or sounded, at the proper
intervals, in the order herein mentioned. At the first, the
troops will prepare for the movement ; at the second, they
vrill ftrm >»v fOBparr, ^^A ti ttie thir^ tiBU»lrr IniHtIi*!':
FIELD FORTIFICATION,
PART FIFTH.
I. Field "WonKS arc any constructions which h«ve for
Ihoir object to impedo the advance of an enemy, or to en-
ible an inferior force to maintain their position agaioit
ihc attack of a superior number.
3. The name of Field Forfificnfion is applied to a work
which is composed of an embankment of earth called a
'parapet," and an cxcavati(tn called a "ditch," on the
exterior side, which last furnishes the earth for the em-
jankment. /
3. The general appellation of IntreuchmemU it applied ^
o all fit'ld works, and a position strengthened by them, ia
laid to be Intrenched.
i. The outline or form of the work varies with tho char-
cter of the ground, ths circumstances under which it \%
soBstructed, the stiength of the force, and particular
character of the defence. The profile or shape of the ©m-
sankment or parapet is usually the same in all cases.
6. When the ground about a work within eflective
•ango of the firearms of the attacking party is quite flat,
he height called tho "command" of the work, must be
It least 7 I'eet, 6 inches, in order that the defenders may
)e covered from the fire of men on horseback— that class
)f men being able to dipeharge tJiwlr arme at 7 fi?»?* % Jw*-
0. Uniaiportrtiit works, or such as arc situated on }iigfe-
cr ground than that within effective artillery range, m»/
have their parapets as low as C feet or even 5 feet.
7. Sometimes the parapet is tornied of earth taken from
an excavation or trench inside of it ; in this case the par.
apct may bo as low as 3 feet, because then, the defenders
standing in the trench of equal depth, and close behind
the parapet, are sufficiently covered by it.
[Remarks.] In this manner cover for troops may be very
fiuickl}' obtain^id, with the advantage of having the pow-
er to advance over tho parapet in order of battle when cc-
casion offers.
8. The general form of a parapet and ditch may be un-
derstood by the followihg explanations : {Fig. 1.)
A B C D E F IS the profile of the Parapet.
G H I K the profile of the Ditch.
L M X the profile of the Glacis.
A B the Banquette Slopes.
B C Tread of the Banquette.
C D the Interior Slope.
D E the Superior Slope.
E F the Exterior Slope.
F G the Berm. .
G n the Scarp.
H I the Bottom of tho Ditch.
I K the Counterscarp.
A the Foot of the Banquette Slope,
B the Crest of the Banquette.
C the Foot of the Interior Slope.
D the Interior Crest.
nA\.» hmr. MMV.A IION.
JFi«
*?« , rtSL* StRTIJICAtlON.
E the Extorior Crest.
F the Foot of the Exterior Slope.
G the Crest of the Scarp.
n the Foot of the Scarp.
I the Foot of the Counterscarp.
K the Crest of the Counterscrp.
M the Crest of the Glacis,
N Foot of the Glacis. ,
9. The inferior slope is the part of the parapet towards
the enemy; it is usually made with thp same slope that
the earth, when first thrown up, naturally takes.
10. The top of the parapet, denominated the superior
tlope, is the line along which the assailed fire on the eae-
my.
11. The intsrior slope, sometimes denominated the breast
height, is the part against which the assailed naturally
lean in the act of firing.
12. The banquette is a small terrace on which the 8ol«
dier stands to deliver his fire ; the top of it is denominated
the tread, and the inclined plane by which it is ascended,
the slope.
13. The tersn creai is applied to those points of the profile,
where a salient angle is formed; and when a re-entering
angle h formed by two lines, the term foot is applied to
the point, in connexion with the name of the superior
line ; thus, foot of the exterior slope ; foot of the iTUericf
»Iope, &c.
14. Theberm is a horizontal space left between the par-
apet and ditch, to prevent the earth from yielding.
15. The slope of the ditch next to the parapet is the
16. The glacis is a small mound of earth raised in front
of the ditch; it is seldom used in field \rork?. therefore is
not a constituent part of their profile.
17. Should there be ground near the position to be for-
tiied, higher than that on which the parapet stands,
the latter must have a greater command than 7 feet 6
inches, but in the more simple kind of field works the
command does not exceed 12 feet ; for as soldiers cannot
taxily throw dirt with a shorel to a greater height thau
6 feet, and as other means are generally wanting in the
field, it is evident that the height of a paiapet for such a
work, must be limited by the capability of executing it
with shovels and pick axes by two parties of men, one
standing on a level 6 feet above the other. The same
reason determines the greatest depth of ditch to We 12
feet, a scaffolding being necessary at 6 fet-t above the bot-
tom of the ditch to receive the earth which is thrown from
thence; the earth is then thrown up to the level of the
ground, by other laborers placed on the scailblding.
18. In the construction of field works it should always
be recollected that a great command of parapet not only
requires additional means, trouble, and time to throw up
the earth, but also renders necessary an increased mass of
earth for the banquette, which may thus encumber the
interior of the work.
19. To obviate as much as possible, the latter evil, it is
usual to mount the banquette, by step?, whjn the parapet
has a greater command than 8 feet.
20 The thickness of the parapets of field works must be
regulated by the description of arms likely to be employ-
ed against th«ni ; in ord»r, therefore, that they aa-y af-
1811 TiBI.U rORllFX'oATIuy.
ford a reasonable degree of resistance to repeated firiu^.
the thickness of parapets must somewhat exceed the pen-
etration of the hhot which may be used against tbcm in
the attack.
Penctralloi of shot. Thickness of jjonipeU
Musket ball, 10 to 18 inches, 3 feet.
G-pounder, 3^^ to 4 feet, 6 feet.
9-pounder, 63-^ to 7 feet, 8 or 9 feet^
12-pounder, 8>^ to 10 feet, 10 or 12 feet.
31. It is found by experiment that loose earth resists
the penetration of shot just as well as that which has becH
rammed together.
22. Although a musket ball penetrates, at most, only 18
inches into earth, musketry parapets require to be made
3 feet thick, in order that they may be sufficiently sub-
stantial to preserve the requisite hei.S(ht, notwithstanding
the action of the weather.
23. Heavier g'uns than 12-pcunders are rarely brought
into the field, consequently 12 feet may be considered uo
the greatest thickness of a parapet 5 and it has been shown
that, for the simpler works, 12 feet is the greatest com-
mand of a parapet, and likewise the greatest depth of a
ditch.
24. The exterior side of a parapet is formed with a
slope which has a base equal to its height, that being the
inclination which ordinary earth assunies when thrown
up loosely ; and, therefore, it is the most advantageous
form for a mass of earth whose sides are supported.
25. The interior slope of a parapet has a base not great-
er than one-third or one-fourth of its height, in order to
allow the men to approach near the crest, and fire ovor
the parapet with ease.
VIELB KOKllKiCAliUN. 183
MANNER OF THROWING UP A WORK.
26. The following wKl describe the manner of laying
the work out on the field, which is called profiling ; tho
distribution of the workmen to excavate the ditch, and
form the parapet ; and the precautions to be observed in
the construction.
27. Poles having been planted at the angles of the work,
and the height of Ihe interior crest marked on them, a
line is traced on the ground with a picks, showing fifae di-
rection of the interior crests. At suitable distances, say
from twenty to thirty yards apart, cords are stretched be-
tween two stout pickc ts, in a direction perpendicular to
the line marked out by the pick ; these cords should be
exactly horizontal. The thickness of the parapet is meas-
ured on the cord, and a picket driven into the ground to
mark the point. The base of the interior slope, and the
tread of the banquette, are set off in a similar manner •
and a slip of deal is nailed to each of the pickets.
28. The height of the interior crest, and the tread of the
banquette, are easily ascertained, from the position of tho
cord, and the interior crest ; these points having been
marked on their respective slips, the outline of the para-
pet is shown by connecting them by other slips, which are
nailed to the uprights ; the banquette slope and the exte-
rior slop •, V, :!l be determined by a similar process.
29. From the profiles thus formed perpendicular to the
interior crests, the oblique profiles at the angles can be
readily set up, by a process which will suggest itself uitli .
out oxplauation.
7
IH FIELD FCKTrFrCATms.
30. Having compl^ied t&e profiling, the foot of the ban-
qnette, and that of the exterior slope, are marked out
with a pick, and also the crests of the scarp and coianter-
scarp. All the arrangements preparatory to commencing
the excayatfon are now complete.
DISTRIBUT1®'N OF TBS WORKING PARTY.
31. DiTide the men into 6 equal parts, 3 of which are to be
provided with pick axes and shovels, 2 are to have shovels-
©nly, and the remainder are to be furnished with ram-
mers only.
32. The party is then marched to the ground, and the
men, having both pick-axes and&hovels (viz : the diggers,)
are to be stationed from 43^ to 6 feet apart, (so as to not
foe in each others way,) on the ground when the ditch is
to be dug along the berme line, and facing the work.
33. The excavation of the (iitch is now begun, the men
Srst loosening the earth with their pick-ases, and thea
shoveling it to the place where the parapet is to stand ;
here the rest of the party are posted, and as the earth is
thrown up to them, the men with shovelfi spread it in lay-
ers, while the remainder, with their rammers, beat ife
down to a firm mass ; and ais the work is raised, they give
it the form indicated by the profiles.
34. In making the parapet, eare should be taken to
form a drain^ at some suitable point, to carry off the water
from the interior ixito the ditch. It can be done by dig-
ging a trench across the ground where the parapet is to ,
he raised, and plank the sides so as to form a gutter. A
gutter of boards should also be made to prevent the water
from running down the scarp, as it would soon destroy it.
FIKLB FORTiriCATIOX. 195
35, For tbs facility of entering the ditch, whilst work-
ing, the offset at the scarp and counterscarp, maj be form-
ed into Ht^ps, with a rise of eighteen inches each ; and if
the ditch is deeper than sii feet, an offset about four feet
broad should be left at the scarp, about mid-depth of the
<litch, to place a relay of shovels to throw the earth on
the berme. In some cases, a scaffold of plank is raised in
the ditch for the same purpose.
36. When the ditch has been excavated to the bottom,
the offsets are cut way, and the proper slopes given to the
sides. The earth furnished by the offsets, if not required
to complete the parapet, may be formed into a small glacis.
37 When near the surface, in soil requiring but little
use of the pick-axe, an excavation of sir cubic yards in a
day of eight hours, would be a fair task for a soldier, who,
in general, is little accustomed to the use of the pick-are
and shoTcl.
38. In calculating the time required to throw up a field
work, the following data may be assumed ; in light, dry,
sandy soil, that can be easily dug without the aid of a pick-
axe, a man can, in a day of eight hours, load from nineteen
to twenty cubic yards of earth on barrows. If a pick-axo
be required, two men can do the same quantity of work.
3J>. If the w hole ma«6 must be first moved with the pick*
axe, three or four men should be allowed.
40. A man can wheel 20 cubic yards of earth per day to
a distance of 30 yards on level ground, or 20 yards on a
ramp.
41. Twenty cubic yards of earth will Gil 500 wheelbar-
rows.
42. A lior.ss ran do as much work as 7 men ; he can c^r-
196 VlKLh FOHTfKie.VTIOX.
ry 300 lbs. 20 miles per day, or 200 lbs. 30 miles ; he csn
draw 1,600 lbs. on a plain, and from 1,200, to 1,300 lbs. on
irregular ground, when the roads are in good (Jrder.
43. Newly moved earth will not remain very well at
such a steep slope as the "interior slope" of the parapet
assumosj consequently artificial means have to be rcsortsd
to, to retain it in that state ; these are called revetments.
REVETMENTS.
44. A J'et'c/rue/if consists ^of a facing of stone, wood, sods
of turf,^ or any other material, to sustain an embankment;
•when it receives a slope steeper than the natural slope.
45. In field vvoi'ks revetments are used only for the inte-
rior slope of the parapet and for the scarp ; for the first,
sods, hurdles, fascines, gabions, and plank are used j and
for the last, timber.
46- Jlevctment of sods. Sod work forms a strong and
durable revetment, and as they are generally procurable
on the spot, they are much used in field works. The sods
should be cut from a well clothed sward, with the grass of
a fine, short blade, and thickly matted roots. If the grass
be long, it should be mowed before the sod is cut.
47. Sods are of two siiics, one termed stretchers, ai*e
twelve inches square and four and a half inches thick : the
pthc.r termed headers, are eighteen inches long, twelV'e
inches broad, and four and a-half inches thick.
48. The sod revetment is commenced as soon as the para-
pet is raised to the level of the head of the banquette ; the
course consists of two stretchers and one header altsrnating,
the end of the header laid to the front. The grass side is
l2.id downward; and tho,«od? should protrude .*^ )ij[ tie be vontj
TrF-i.D FoaTiriOATrov. 197
the line of the interior slope, for the purpose of trimming
thfc course even at the top, before laying another, and to
make the interior slope regular. The course is firmly set-
tled, by tapping each sod as it is laid with a spade or a
wooden mallet ; and the earth of the parapet is packed
closely behind the course.
49. A second course is laid on the first, so as to cover
the joints, or, as it is termed, to break joints with it, using
otherwise the same precautions as with the firr,t. The top
course is laid with the grass up; and in some cases pegs
are driven through the sods of two courses, to connect the
whole more firmly, which i.«, however, by no means nee-
cessary to form a strong sodding.
50. When cut from a wet soil, the sods should not be
lain until they are partially dried, otherwise they will
shrink, and the revetment will crack in drying. In hot
weather the revetment should bo watered frequently, until
the grass puts forth. The sods are cut rather larger than
required for use ; and arc trimmed to a proper size from a
model sod.
51. Fascine revetment. A Fascine, is a bundle of twigs
closely bound up. There are two sizes of fascines ; one
size nine inehes in diameter, and about ten feet lon^ ; the
other which is generally termed a soucisson, is twelve
inches in diameter and twenty foot long ; it is chiefly used
for the revetments of battel ies.
52. To make a fascine, straight twigs are selected, be-
tween the thickness of the little finger and thumb, the lon-
ger the btter ; they should be stripped of the smaller
twigs. A machine, termed &/asciue horse, is put up, by
tirivino- two ttaut pole* intri the o-rnund obliquely, .^hout
lUS vmiu FORI irij irrox.
two feet, 30 as to cross each other about two feet above the
ground, where thej are firmly tied together; as many of
these supports as may Le required, are put up in a straight
line, about eighteen inches apart; this forms the horse,
on which the twigs are laid to be bound together.
53. Another machine termed a. fascine choker, is formed
of two stout levers, about five feet long, connected near
their extremities b}'- a chain or strong cord, which would
b3 long enough to past; once around the fascine, and be
drawn tight by means of the levers.
54 The twigs are laid on the horse, with their large and
small ends alternating ; "the choker is applied to bring them
to""ether ; and they are bound by loiths or gads, made of
tough twigs, properly prepared by untwisting the fibres
over a blaze, so as to render them pliant, or else stout rope
varn may be substituted for them. The gads are placed
twelve inches apart, and every third or fourth one should
be made with an end three or four feet long, having a loop
at the extremity to receive a picket through it; this pick-
et is termed an anchorinc/ 2n(-'kct, its object being to secure
the fascine firmly to the parapet.
55, To form the revetment, the first row of fascines is
imbedded about half its thickness below the tread of the
Jbanquette, and is secured by means of the anchoring pick-
ets, and also by several pickets driven through the fascine
itself about twelve inches into the earth. The knots of the
wythes are laid inside, and the earth of the parapet is well
packed behind the fascine. A second row is laid on the
first, so as to give the requisite interior slope; it should
break joints with the first row, and be connected with it
FIELD roiiiirieAiioJ.'. 139
by several pickets driven through them both. The other
rows arc laid with similar precautions ; and the parapet
is usually finished at the top by a course of sods.
56. Hurdle revetment. This revetment is made by driv-
ing poles in the same direction as the interior slope, into
the banquette, about eighteen inches below the tread, and
then forming a wicker-work, by interlacing the twigs be-
tween them in a similar manner to basket work.
57. The poles should be nine inches apart, their diameter
al)ont one and a half inches. They should be secured to
tlui ])arapet by long withes and anchoring pickets. The
tojt twigs should bo bound together by withes.
58. Gabion revetment. Gabions are strong cylindrical
baskets without top or bottom, two feet in diameter, and
two feet nine inches high. These are placed in rows along
the line of work at an inclination corresponding to the
required slope, and then filled with earth. To make a ga-
bion, from eight to fourteen pickets, three feet six inches
long, are fixed upright in the ground, at equal distances,
in the circumference of a circle, one foot eleven inches in
diameter ; flexible twigs (or rods) arc then interwoven
with the upright pickets, commencing with three rods at
the bottom, and weaving each in succession outside of two
pickets and inside of one; as the twigs (or rods) are ex-
pended, others are added, and the basket work continued
to the height of two feet nine inches ; this work, which is
called the web, is sewn in three or four parts, from top to
bottom; withes, (called gads,) or spun yarn being used
for that purpose, in order to keep it from coming off the
pickets ; the ends of these are then cut off about an inch
from the web. A gabion, thus made, stands three feet
200 riKLD FORTIIiei-lION.
high in the reretment, and weighs from thlrtr-six to forty
pounds. The best wood for the web, and particularly fov
the gads, is willow and hazel.
59. The gabion revetment is seldom used except for the
trenches in the attack of permanent works, where it i? de-
sirable to place troops speedily under cover from the ene-
my's case shot and musketry.
60. Plank revetment. This revetment may be made by
driving pieces of four-inch scantling about three feet apart,
two feet below the tread ©f the banquette, giving them the
same slope as the interior slope. Behind these pieces,
boards are nailed to sustain the earth.
61. Sand-hags are bags of coarse canvass, measuring,
when laid flat, two feet eight inches by one foot four inch-
es; they contain, when quite full, a bushel of earth : but
when tied and placed in revetment, only three-quarters of
a bushel. In building a revetment with them, they are
arranged with their ends and sides presented alternately to
the front in each course, and with the joints in the succes-
sive courses broken, like brick-work. Sixteen sand-bags
buiffl ten square feet of revetment ; they ought to be tar-
red, if the revetments are to laat a considerable time ; if
not tarred, they rot in two months. An empty sand-bag
weighs 1 lb. 2 oz., and when tarred, 1 lb. 12 oz.
62. Filled sand-bags are musket-shot proof, and are fre-
quently . placed on a parapet one across two others, the
latter being a short distance asunder, in order that the
intervals may serve as loop-holes.
63. When sand-bags or gabions are made use of to revet
the cheeks of embrasures, they should be covered with raw
hides, to prevent them f»©m being damaged by the flash
aad th§ eoneussion caused bj tbs dicchargc of the gun.
i\f.nt iCianiicxnQs. 201
OBSTACLES.
64. The means employed ns acccsssry, usually consists
of artificial obstacles, s.o arranged as to detain the enemy
in a position where he will be greatly cut up by the fire of
the work. The proper disposition, therefore, of obstacles,
is in advance of the ditch within short musket range.
65. In placing the ground around a work in a defeusire
attitude, every means should be taken to reduce to the smal-
lest possible number, the points by which the enemy may
approach ; so that by accumulating the troops on the weak
points, a more rigorous defense may be made. In making
this arrangement, equal care should be given to avery thing
that, affording a shelter to the enemy, would enable him
to approach the work unexposed to its fires. To prevent
this, all hollow roads, or dry ditches, which are not enfi-
laded by the principal works, should be filled up or else be
watched by a detachment, covered by advanced work.
All trees, underwood, hedges, enclosures, and houses with-
in cannon range, should be cut down and leveled, and no
stumps be allowed higher than two feet,. Trees beyond
cannon range should not be felled ; or, if felled they should
be burnt to prevent the enemy's movements being con-
cealed.
65. If there are approaches, such as permanent bridges,
fords and roads, which may bo equally serviceable to the
assailed and to the enemy, they should be gurded with pe-
culiar care ; and be exposed to the enfilading fire of a work
ospocially erected for their defence.
67. The principal aviificial obstacles ara Tr9iie-(hIou2),
202 viEin rouTiiicAxiux.
or military 2^^^^ j ahattis ; palisades ; /raises ; stockades;
ckevaux-de-frise ; small pickets ; entanglements', crows
feet ; inundations ; and mines.
68. Trous-de-lovp. These are pits in the form of an in-
verted truncated cone, or quadrilateral pyramid, and are
generall}'- made about 6 feet wide and 6 feet deep ; a point-
ed stake is phmted firmly in the bottom to prevent the
enemy from using them as rifle pits. In order to form an
effectire obstacle, they should be disposed checkerwise in
three rows, a few yards in front of the ditch with inter-
vals of about 10 feet between them ; the earth taken from
them is spread over the ground between them, and is form-
ed into hillocks to render the passage between them as dif-
ficult as possible. If bru.h-wood, or light hurdles, can be
procured, the ditch may be made narrower, and covered
with hurdle, over which a layer of earth is spread. Trous-
de-loup are sometimes placed in the ditch ; in this case,
their upper circles touch.
09. This obstacle is principally serviceable against cav-
alry.
70. Jibatti^. The large limbs of trees are selected for an
nbattis. The smaller branches are chopped ofi", and the
ends, pointed and interlaced with some care, are presented
towards the enemy. The large end of the lirjib is secured
to the ground by a crotchet-picket, and should be covered
with earth, well rammed, to prevent its being torn up.
71. One of the best methods of forming an abattis, and
which is peculiarly adapted to strengthen the skirt of a
wood, occupied b}^ light troops, is to fell the trees so that
their branches will interlace, cutting the trunk in such a
way that the tree will hang to the stump by a portion un-
FlilLU iORIIFlCAriON. 203
cut. The stumps may be left high enough to corer a man
in the act of firing.
72. Abattis are placed in front of the ditch ; in this po-
sition, they must be covered from the enemy's fire by a
small glacis, so that they may not bo seen and destroyed
at a distance by artillery.
73. Abattis is an excellent obstacle in a wooded country,
and admits of a good defence, if a slight parapet is thrown
up behind it. The parapet may be made of trunks of trees
laid on each other, with a s hallow ditch or trench behind
them ; the earth from which is thrown against the trunks.
In an open position it may be relied on as a security against
surprise, particularly of cavalry.
74. A detachment of 90 men can make 750 feet of abattis
in a day.
75. Palisades. A palisade is a stake about 10 feet long,
and of a triangular form, each side of the triangle being 8
inches. The trunks of straight trees should be selected for
palisades. The diameter of th(? trunk should be from six-
teen to twenty inches. The trunk is sawed into lenghts
often and a-half feet, and is split up into rails, each length
furnishing from 5 to 7 rails. The palisade is pointed at
the top, the other extremity may be charred if the wood
is seasoned ; otherwise the charring will be of no service.
A ijaUsading is a row of palisades set in the ground either
vertically, or slightly inclined towards the enemy. Each
palisade is nailed to a strip of thick plank, termed a riband,
placed horizontally about one foot below the ground;
another riband is placed eighteen inches below the top. —
To plant the palisade, a trench is dug 3 feet deep ; they
are th^'n placed about 3 inches aeunder, with an edge to-
nart^s the eRemv.
204 FIBL» FORXJFICATIO?;.
76. Palis&des are only used in ths ditches, and to close
the gorges of field works, and are not as in permanent
works, placed on 'he banquettes ; when in the ditch, their
best position is at the foot of the counterscarp, and slightly
inclined towards it ; for thus placed, they are more secure
from a direct fire of artillery, and they detain the enemy
at the caunterscarp under the deadly aim of the garrison ;
also it makes it difficult for the assailants to cut them
down, there being no room between them and the counter-
scarp to stand and wield an axe.
77. Fraise. This obstacle is formed of palisades placed
in juxtaposition, either horizontally or slightly inclined.
The best position for a fraise is on the berme, or a little be-
low it, so as to be coTered by the counterscarp crest. The
part of the fraise under the parapet is termed the tail,
and is about 5 feet long. To make a fraise, a horizontal
piece of four inch scantling, termed a cushion, is first laid
parallel to the berme ; each palisade is nailed to this, and
a thick riband is nailed on the top of the fraise near the
end .
78. The point of fraise sho^ild be at least 7 feet above
the bottom of the ditch, and should not project beyond
the foot of the scarp, so as not to shelter the enemy from
logs, stones, &c., rolled from the parapet into the ditch.
79. Stockade. Trunks of small trees from 9 to 12 inches
in diameter and 12 feet long, are selected to form a stock-
ade. They are planted in juxtaposition, in a similar man-
ner to a palisading, and are used for the same purposes.
SO. Chevaiix-de-frise, are beams of wood from 6 to 10
feet long, which are cut in a square or hexagonal form,
and havs pointed *t-akes or sword blades inserted in th«
HELD tOHX/Fli'A'l'lON. ' U05
ijices ; when several arc used, in one.length, they are chain-
ed together to provcnt the enemy from removing them ;
and they are made of the lengths just mentioned in ovd^v
that they may be portable.
81. They are employed as t^mporiiry. barriers to impeda
the passage of a breach, the entrance into a work, to block
up a street, &c. ; they are occasionally placed at the foot?
of the counterscarp of the ditch, and, also on the berme ;
in the latter situation, they must be covered fr«m the view
and fire of the enemy by a small glacis.
82. Pointed Stctlccs are frequently fixed in the ground,
at any place at which the enemy might occupy at tlnj
time of an assault ; as on the bermes of works, the edges
of trous-de-loup, and in the spaces between them. They
must be firmly planted in the ground, and if they arc
pointed before insertion, two mallets must be u?ed, one oC
which is provided with a conical hole to receive the point
«f the stake, while the blQ'.vs are struck with the other;
thcBC pickets may be conveniently formed of the small
branches cut from the trees intended \'qi' abattis.
INUNDATI02xS.
83. It frequently occurs in the field that small streams
or rivulets are met with, which of themselves offer no
impediment to the advance of an enemy, but which, by-
judicious management, may bo made effectually to check
his attack on certain points where the water may be col-
lected-
84. It is done by damming back a shallow water course
so as to make it overflow its valley. To be effective, an
inuudaliou should be six feet deep. When this depth cau-
206 MBLD lORTinCATluX.
Bot be procured, trous-de-loap, or else short ditches, placed
in quincunx order, are dug, and the whoi'e is covered
with a sheet of water, which, at the ditches, must be at
least six feet in depth.
85. A dam may be formed in the following manner :
after constructing an embankment of earth on each side of
th« stream, perpendicular to its leiigth, as far as the hanfc^
atones and gravel should be thrown into the water to- di-
minish its depth : then two heaps of earth are prepared,
one on each bank, aud as many workmen being set on as
can be employed without impeding each other ; the earth
from those heap^s is thi'owninto the stream, over the stones
and grave), as rapidly as possible, until the embankments
previously formed, arc connected together across the
stream.
86. It rarely occurs that sufTicient means ai e to be
found in the field to allow of a dam being made more than
ten feet high; and suppaeing tbas heisght to be given, the
difference o-f level between any two dams should be five
feet, in order that the shallowest part of the inundation
may be five feet deep, and therefore not fordable.
87. The distance at which dams shoiild be placed from
one another, will depend upon tbe faVl of t^e bed of the
stream., and must be determined by leveling. The thick-
aess of th.e dam at the top, may be made equal to the
depth of water intended to be retained, but if it is liable
to be battered by artillery, it should be ten feet thick at
the top. The exterior slope of the dam> may be left at the-
aatural s-lopo, of the earth, while to that opposed to the
stream, a base of not less than double its height should h&
i^ifen.
FIELD FORTIFICAWOX. «V4
«8. A sluice or weste weir should be prorided at the
height to which it is desired the water should rise, oth-
erwise, the water being allowed to flow over every part,*
the dam would be destroyed. These openings, or waste
weirs must be rivetted with fascines or timber, and ought
to be completed before the dam w carried up to Ub full
height.
€9. Artificial inundations seldom admit of being turned
to an efiective use, owing to the difficulties in forming
them, and the ease by which tiiey can be drained by tho
enemy. But when it is practicable to procure only a
shallow sheet of water, it it should not be neglected, as it
will cjtuse some apprehension to the enemy. In some
-cases by damming back a brook, the water may be raised
■to a level sufficient to be conducted into the ditches of the
work, and render some parts unassailable. The ditches in
5Uoh cases should be made very wide, and to hold about
the depth of sIk feet. During freezing weather the ice
should be broken in the middle of the ditch, and a chan-
nel of at least twelve feet be kept open, if practicable.—
The ice taken out should be piled up irregularly on eadL
side of the channel; and, as a farther precaution against
« surprise, water should be thrown ob the parnpet t«
freeze.
MIXES.
90. Attempts at applying mines to field works have
seldom proved successful, owing to the rapid character
of the assault, from which the mines are usually sprung
too soon or too late ; so that the only eficct that can be
counted upon for their use, is the panic they may create.
20$ FiET.» FQP.TIFICATieS.
91. There is one species of ciine denominated a '»tons
fougasse, which it is thought might be snceessfv^ly applied
*to the defence of the ditches and the salients-^f the field
■vvorks. To make this mine, an inclined funnel-shaped
excayation is made to the depth of five or six feet, at the
bottom of the funnel, a bor containing 55}bs. ofpowdar ia
jdaced Avith which !i powder-hose communicates. 'A strong
.''hield of wood, formed of battens well nailed together, is
placed in front of the box ; and three or four cubic yards
of pebbles, or an equal wsight of brick-bats, or other ma-
terials, are filled in against the shield. Earth is then
well rammed around the shield on top and behind, to pre-
vent the explosion from taking place in the wrong direc-
tion. A fougasse of this size, when sprung, will scatter
the pebbles oyer a surface of sixty yards in length and
seventy yards in breadth.
92. A good method of discharging fougasses at th$ mo-
ment required, is to place a loaded musket with the muz-
xle in the priming of the fougasse, and a wire attached to
the trigger; the Vv'ire can be led in any direction, in the
same manner as the hose, and being pulled at the proper
moment, the explosion will take place.
THE OUTLINES OF FIELD WORKS.
93. Tlic direction which a parapet is made to assume in
order to enclose or partiall}'- enclose the ground to be for-
tified, is called the outline of a work.
94. The following are general principles to be observed
in determining the outlines of field works :
1st. There should be a reciprocal defense between all the
parts of works, so that the ground over whirh an ene-
FIBL» ro.RTTFTfATION*. 209
tnj must pass to the attack, should, if possible, be seen
b©th in front and in flank.
2dly. The " lines of defence" must not exceed th« eftec-
tire range of muskets, viz : about 160 yards.
3dly. Re-entering angles, (via : flanking angles,) ought
never to be less than 90° and seldom more than 100° ; for
if less than 90°, the men on the flanking parts would fire
against each other ; and if more than 100°, the fire of the
flanking parts would diverge too far from the salient to be
flanked.
4tlilj. The salient angles of works should be as obtuse
as possible, and never lest than G0°, otherwise the interior
space might become too contracted ; the angle would be
so sharp as to be quickly worn away by the weather, and
would be easily battered down ; also the undefended* sec-
toral space in front of the salient angles (which is tko sup-
plement of the angle) would become very great ; and
5thly. The outline of a field work should bo proportion-
ed in length to the number of men and guns intended for
its defence. One man occupies a space of three feet.
95. The names of the works most commonly employed
infield fortification, are Redans; Lunettes; Redouts;
Star-Forts ; Bastion-Forts, <&c,, and works used mostly
for lines of intrenchment, such asTKNAfLLES and Cuemaii-
LEKKS.
*NoTE. — Undefended by direct fire. To prevent the
enemy from approaching the work on these undefended
sectors the salients should be directed towards gome natu-
ral obstacle, such as a marsh, &c. ; or if this cannot be
done, then artificialobst^rles should be fti.^poRPd in their
front.
210
FIELD FORTIFICATION.
•96. The Redabt, {Fig. 2.) is a work consisting of two
faces, wliicii form witli each otiier a salient angle, the
rear being open. When the faces are not more than 20
jards in length, the work is sometimes called a fleche.
97. The redan is in the m<?5t advantageous position,
when the ground before the salient angles and approaches
to the gorge are inaccessible, or when the work can bo
saipported by troops ; for example, when with obstacles
Fig. 2.
Itedan^
In its front, it is employed as an advanced work to defend
lioUow grpund which cannot be seen from the principal
work— to protect a bridge, a dam, a road, a defile, or to
■cover a guard, an advanced post, <fec.
98. The weak points of this work are : that it has an
open gorge, and that its ditch, and the ground in front of
the salient angle, are undefended either by direct or flank-
in^ fir©.
PlELli FORTiriCATlON'. 211
99. On account of its having an open gorge, it is seldom
advisable to co"nstruct a redan as an isolated work ; its
rear should be exposed to the fire of some collateral work,
or have free communication with a body of troops in its
rear, to whom it may form an advanced post, or outvrork ;
o-r otherwise the faces should terminate on a river, a marsh
or any inaccessible ground, which would prevent it from
being turned.
100. The hrst defect, viz : that of having an open gorge,
may be remedied in a slight degree bv placing along
the gorge, abatti?, trous-de-loup, Ac, (or palisades, if
time and material abound); as for the second defect, a
direct fire may be bi'ought iu front of the salient angle by
rounding the latter, or cutting off the angle by a short
face not less than G yards long. A [flanking fire may be
procured for the ditch and salients, by forming auxilliary
flanks, which may be placvd either towards the middle or
at the extremities of the faces ; such a flank 5Ught not to
he less than 12 yards long, that there may bo at least 12
iiien firing from it.
101. Double Redans consists of two redans joined to-
gether, their exterior faces being generally longer than
the others ; the French call a work of this kind a queue
d'hyronde.
102. A Triplh Redak consists of three redans joined
together, the exterior faces of these are .<ilso, in general,
longer than the others.
103. A Lunette {Fifj. 3.) is a large redan with flanks
•parallel or* nearly parallel to the capital ; as a general
rule,, the flanks are traced perpendicularly t^? th? intended
•212
TiZLV rosTiriTAfior;.
line of fire, for the purpose of bringing on certain spots a
more direct fire than could be made from the faces of the
work.
104. It is often desirable to secure gorges of these works
against surprise ; this maj be done by disposing across
the gorges a single or double row of palisades, or a stock-
-ads work, in the form of a front fortification or of a ten-
Fig. 3.
Lunette.
aille j there sliould be a banquette to it, that the defend-
ers may have comm&nd over the assailants, and a ditch to
prevent the enemy from getting close, and cutting, burn-
iog, or blowing down the obstacle. Troua-de-loup, abat-
tis, and chevaus-de-frize are DOiretimes disposed acros3
iJae gor^? for the saias purpose.
FIBL» r9RlirX01TIt>'. 213
105. A Redout is a closed work, the parapet of which
does not form re-entering angles ; it maj be quadrilateral,
polygonal, or circular.
106. Circular redoubts, although ther have no undefend-
ed sectors, and enclose a greater space than any other re-
dout with an equal lentrth of perapet, are seldom formed
cn accouut of the diffiulty of their construction, and also
because their ditches are incapable of any flanking defense:
the lines of fire diverging from the parapet, any one spot
on the ground is very imperfectly defended.
107. A four sided figure is the best and most usual form
for a redout, because it is of simple construction; th3
ditches are more easily flanked, and there are not so many
points of attack as in a redoubt of a greater number of an-
gles. Redouts being closed works, are better able to
stand detached than redans or lunettes, and are, therefore,
constructed when a small work is required without aay
immediate protection from the gorge- the armed party
being strong enough to complete and man a four-sided
redout, each side of which is not less tha^ 15 yards long]
103. The size depends on the number of men who are to
garrison it, and upon the number of guns which it is to
contain ; also upon the length of time during which it is
to be oocupied; this may t^e for a few hours only, (as on a
field of battle) or for a period of weeks or months.
109. If wanted only for a few hours, it will be suflicieut
to allow 3 feet in length of parapet lor every man of tho
detachment ; or for every two men, if they are to be
formed in double rank. If guns are to be placed in the
work, 16 fe^t of parapet must h% jfiven to each, in order
214 IIKLK FoKtlKICAllON,
that the gunners may hare sufficient room on each side to
work it.
110. But when the redout is dc-?tined to contain a body
of men for a considerable length of time, it becomes nec-
cessary for them to have room to lie down within the ban-
quette with their arms and packs; supposing one-third to
be on guard, patrolling, Ac, two square yards in addition
to the slope of the banquette, are sufficient for each man,
and 36 square yards for each gun and its appointments.
111. The rule, consequently, far a square redoubt is : to
multiply the given number of men by 2, and number of guns
by 36, for the number of square yards which the work
ought to contain within the foot of its banquette, the
squarft root of the product will be the length in yards of
the side of the square forming that area ; adding to this
result the breadth of two interior slopes, and of two ban-
quettes with their slopes, (about 7 yards altogether,) we
shall have the side of the square formed by the crest of the
parapet.
112. A square redout ought not to be traced with less
extent of sides than 15 yards ; for, by employing the cal-
culation explained above, it will be found that such a
work is only just sufficient to contain the number of men
necessary for its defense ; on the other hand, it is usual to
make a square redout with a longer side than 40 yards,
because it would require a garrison more suitable to a
work of a stronger outline.
113. The imperfections of redoubts are, that they are
entirely without a Hanking Gre for the defense of the
ground in front of their faces, also that their ditches and
Mtl.S l«KriKH'ATfON. 2lf>
the sectoral spaces before the angles, are without any fire
whatcvei" for their defense.
114. A flanking^ defense for the ditches may be obtain-
ed b}' placing palisade or stockade caponnieres in thera,
either at the angles or in the middle of the faces ; by
tambours in a like position, or by loopholed galleries un-
der the counterscarp at the salients of the work.
115. A ditch caponniere is an oblong structure formed
with palisades, or with structure work, loop-holed, and
roofed over with planks and earth to secure the men from
the effects of shell, and a plunging fire from the counter-
scarp. It ought, if possible, to be flanked with musketry,
to prevent an enemy from closing on it, and getting un-
der cover.
116. The best position for a caponniere in the ditch of
a redoubt, is at the salient angle, as then one caponniere
flanks two branches of the ditch. It should be separated
from the counterscarp by an enlargement of the ditch, to
prevent the enemy from using it as a bridge to cross the
ditch, and it ought to have a wicket to allow of sallies into
the ditch.
117. To lessen the destructive effect of shell, traverses
should be placed in all closed works when those missiles
are likely to be employed against them.
118. the countei'scarp <7oZiery consists of a frame work,
covered at the top with a sheeting, which is placed within
the counterscarp at the salients. The front of the gallery
is made of 9 or 10 inch scantl'ng, placed upright, and ar-
ranged with loop-hole defences ; these pieces are connect-
ed at the top by a cap sill. Cross pieces are notched on
the cap sill about three feet apart ; they are supported by
2!K yinLt r«)iTWi9AViO.\.
ahalves placed four feet from the front piece. The cross
pieces may project three feet beyond the shaWcs, and, if
necessary, be braced from the shalves. The gallery is cov-
ered on top by one and a-half inch shoeting and behind in
a similar manner, but only to the height of 5 feet abore
the bottom. This arrangement gives a free space be-
hind the back sheeting for the play of the rammer in
loading. The height of the gallery may be only 7 feet, its
•width, accorning to the foregoing arrangements, is 4 feet.
It should be covered on top by at least 3 feet of earth. The
level of the gallery should be the same as the ditch; and
there should be a small ditch in front of it, to prevent
the enemy from closing on the loop-holes, or obstructing
their fire by filling the ditch in front of them by means of
sand bags, fascines, &c. ' The entrance to the gallery is
by a narrow door.
POWDER MAGAZINES.
119. The main objects to be attended to iu a powder
magazine are, to place it in a position least exposed to the
enemy's fire; to make it shot proof; and to secure the
powder from moisture.
120. If there are traverses, such for example, as are used
in defilemrjnt, the magazines may bo made in them ; or
they may be placed at the foot of a barbette ; or, in dry
soil they may be made partly under ground.
121. The magazine should be at least G feet high,-and
about the same width within ; its length will depend on the
quantity of aiiimuiiilion. It may be contitructed of fas-
cines, gabions, or coff <■■)•■ work, or any means found at hand
may be used which will afloet tk» end In view.
FJELB f 01 Tiri«Ari©N. 217
122. If fascines are used, the sides should dope out to
resist the pressure of the earth ; the fascines should be per-
fectly secured bj pickets ani anchoring withes. The top
may be formed by a row of joists, of 6 inch scantling, placed
about two and a-half feet apart; these should be covered,
by two layers of fascines laid side by side, and the whole
covered in by at least 3 feet thickness" of earth. The
bottom should be covered by a flooring of joists and boards;
a shallow ditch being left under the flooring, with a pitch
towards the door of the magazine, to allow any water that
might leak through to be taken out. A thatch of straw
might be used on the inside, but it is somewhat dangerous,
owing to its combustibility; hides or tarpaulins arc better
and will keep out the moisture more effectually.
123. A coffcr-xcorh is formed by making frames of 6 inch
scantling; each frame is composed of two uprights, termed
stanchions, and a cap and ground sill, well nailed together.
It is 6 feet wide, and 6 feet high in the clear. These
frames are placed upright, and parallel to each other,
about two and a-half feet apart ; they are covered on the
top and sides by one and a-half inch plank, which is termed
a sheeting. The magazine otherwise is constructed as in
the last case.
124. When gabions are used, a hole is usually dug in
the ground to form part of the magazine; the gabions are
placed in two rows, side by side around the hole, and are
filled with earth. The top is formed as in the case of fas-
cines.
125. The mouth of the magazine is covered by a splinter
proof shelter . This is constructed by taking scantling 8
by 10 inche?, cut into suitable lengths, and placing' it iu
218 FIEtD FOUIIFICATION.
an inclined position, so as to cover the mouth, and leare
an easy access to it. The pieces, usually, ai'c inclined 45°
and are placed side by side ; they are covered by at least
two feet of earth or sods; and hides or tarpaulins are
thrown over the whole.
126. Splinter proof blinds are mainly intended to afford
a shelter against the fragments of hollow projectiles that
explode in the work. They may bo used as a kind of bar-
rack for the troops ; and to store provisions, &c.
BATTERIES.
127. The term battery is usually applied to a collection
of several guns ; it is also used in speaking of the arrange-
ments made of a parapet to enable the guns to fire over it,
or through openings in ic ; as a harhitte battery, an embra-
sure battery, &c. Two kinds of batteries are used in the
defense of intrenchments, the barbette battery and the em-
brasure battery.
128. The Barbette is a construction by means of which a
piece can be fired over a parapet. It consists of a mound
of earth, thrown up against the interior slope ; the upper
surface of which is level, and two feet nine inches below
the interior crest for guns of small calibre, and four feet
for heavy guns. If the barbette is raised behind a face, its
length should be sufficient to allow sixteen and a half to
18 feet long the interior crest for each gun ; and its depth,
or the perpendicular distance from the foot of the interior
slope to the rear, should be twenty four feet, for the service
of the guns. The earth of the barbette at the rear and
sides receive the natural slope. To assend the barbette, a
t iKiji I'ui'M 11- u'Ji rn"».\- 2Ly
constrHCtion, termed a ramp, is made : this is an inclined
plane of earth, which connects thetopof the barbette with
the terre-plein. The ramp is ten feet wide at the top, and
its slope is six base to one perpendicular. The earth at the
sides receives the natural slope. The ramp should be at
some convenient point in the rear, and take up as little
room as possible.
129. The advantajjes of the barbette, consist in the com-
manding position of the guns, and in a very wide field of
fire; on these accounts the salients are the best positions
for them. Their defects are, that they expose the guns
and men to the enemy's artillery and sharpshooters.
130. Light guns, particularly howitzers, are the best for
arming barbettes ; because the hollow projectile of the lat-
ter is very formidable, both to the enemy's columns and to
his cavalry ; and when he opens his fire against the salients,
the light pieces can be readily withdrawn.
131. The Emhrnsnre is an opening made in the parapet
for a gun to fire through. The bottom of the embrasure,
termed the «o?e, is two feet nine inches, or four feet above
the ground, on which the wheels of the carriage rest, ac-
cording to the size of the gun ; it the interior crest. These
four lines form the boundaries of the two cheeks on the su-
perior and exterior slopes.
132. When the directrix is perpendicular to the direc-
tion of the parapet, the embrasure-is termed direct. When
the directrix makes an acute angle with it, the embrasure
is termed oblique.
133. The manner of laying out an objique embrasure is
similar to the direct ; the mouth is of a rectangular form,
but is made wider in proportion to the obliquity, ia order
22ft iiRLi tei; TfricATTOx.
that the part of the embrasure, which corresponds to the
muzzle of the gun, is nearly of the same width in both the di-
rect and oblique embrasures. The exterior width of the
sole is made equal to one-half the length of the directrix,
measured on the &ole. The cheeks are laid out as in the
last case.
134. The muzzle of a gun should enter at least six inches
into the embrasure, to prevent the blast from injuring the
cheeks ; <this limits the obliquity of the directrix to about
60^ for long guns.
135. The height of the cheeks must not be more than
four feet, for the same reason ; it will, therefore, in some
cases, be necessary to raise the ground on which the
wheels rest.
136. The parapet of a battery is usually termed the
epaulment. The interior face of the cpaulment, and the
cheeks of the slopes outward to allow the gun to be fired
under an inclination, the base of this slope should never fee
less than six times the altitude ; the interior[open5ng,
termed the mouthy is from eighteen inches to two feet wide,
according to the calibre of the gun, and is of a rectangu-
lar form ; the embrasure wddens towards the exterior,
which widening is termed the splay ; the manner in which
the play is regulated, is by producing the sole to the exte-
rior slope of the parapet, and makiag this exterior line
measured on the sole, equal to half the distance between
the inner and outer lines of the sole. This construction
makes the sole a trapezoidal figure, the side of the trape-
zoid, on the interior, being eighteen inches, or two feet ;
the ©pposite side being equal to half the perpendicular dis-
tance betw«en the tw^ Bido*. The line which bisects thi?
sole 13 termed the directrix of the embrasure : the sides of
the embrasure, termed the cheeks, are laid out by setting
offtxo points on the exterior crest of the parapet, one on
the right, the other on the left of the sole, so that the hori-
zontal distance of these points from the sole shall be equal
to one-third their height above it. Lines are then drawn
on the exterior slope, froin these points to the exterior
points of the fole ; lines are in like mnnner drawn from the
same points, on the superior slope to the upper points of
the mouth, on embrasures, are riveted in the us^ual manner.
That part of the interior face which lies below the chase of
the gun is termed the (/cHoxiV^erc. The mass of earth be«
tweent two cnbrasures is termed a merlon.
137. The embrasures are generally cut out after the
ftpaulment is thrown up. If their position is decided upon
beforehand, ihej must be roughly formed at first, and be
finished after the epaulment is made-
138. The advantages of embrasures are, that the men
and guns are less exposed than in a barbette battery, —
Their principal defects are, that they have a very limited
field ol five ; they weaken the parapet, and present open-
ings through which an enemy may penetrate in an assault.
Owing to their limited field of fire, they are chiefly used
for the protection of particular points; as to flank a ditch,
protect a salient, enfilade a road, &c. The most suitable
position for tlj^em in a work is on tiie flanks.
139. Platforms. "When a gun is fired often in the same
direction, the ground under the wheels is £oon worn into
ruts; it is to prevent Ihir, that platforms of timber are
wsed in sxich cases.
140. The shape of th;» plaffrrrrn ]•>. H?waHy a rertangrl* ;
2T1 nKLn FonriFiCATiox,
in some cases v^liere a wide field of fire is to be obtained^
the form is a trapezoid. The rectangular platform is 10
feet wide, and 17 feci long, for seigc pieces; and 9 fee^
wide and 15 feet long, for the field guns. It consists of
three sleepers of 6 inch scantling, either 16 or 17 feet long,
which are laid perpendicular to the direction of theepaul-
ment, and are covered with two-inch plank, twelve inches
wide, and cat into lengths (»f 9 or 10 feet. Between the
ends of the sleepers, and thefootof the genouillerc, apiece
of 8 inch scantling, 9 feet long, termed a heurter, is laid ;
it should project about six inches above the platform, and
be bisected hy the directrix. The object of the heurter is
to prevent the wheels from being run against the revet-
ment, and also to give the gun its proper direction, par-
ticularly in night firing.
141. To lay a platform, the earth on which it is to rest,
should be well rammed and levelled ; three trenches are
then made for the sleepers, two of which should be placed
ender the wheels, and the middle one under the trail. The
sleepers are laid flush with the ground, and firmily secuj'ed
by pickets driven at their sides and ends, and the earth is
solidly packed ifl the trench around them ; the plank is
then laid and secured by nails or some other Aistenings.
142. If the platform is for direct firing, with full chargep,
the ^ai7 may be made six inches higer than the front to
break the recoil ; in all other cases itshould be horizontal.
143. A platform may be constructed fimply of three
pieces of timber, one under each wheel, and one under the
trail, firmly secured by pickets, and connected by cross
pieces, into which they are halved.
Mi. For barbetts, the platform may be dippGng?d with.
riBLD FORTinCAlIOA. 225
or if used, the whole surface nearly of the barbette, should
be covered.
H5. If the platform is made of a trapezoidal from it will
require five sleepers.
LINES.
14(?. Lines are a series of works and trcnflieisor of inde-
pendent works, arrraged so as to defend cacli other, and
the ground in front of and between them.
147. Lines are used to cover the front of a position, or
to connect important redoubts or forts together.
148. Lines are of two kinds, such as aire continuous, and
such as have intervals between the wor"ks.
149. The former are principally applicable to situations
where it is proposed to act on the defensive only, and
when they are of such limited extent that the whole line
of parapet can be occupied by troops sexclusive of reserves ;.
as for instance, to close a pass between scarped inountaine,
or on the aea shore, or on the banks of large rivers ; thus
resting on natural obstacles which will prevent their flank
being turned. They are often introduced as portions of
an extended line with intervals.
150. Extensive continued lines can make but slight re-
sistance, while the labour necessarily expended in executing
them is considerable ; and as the enemy mny menace sev-
eral points at once, it follows that as many troops would be-
required for the defense as for the attack, in which case
the first principal of fortification is violated. Even if the
defenders have a sufficient number of disposable troops^,
tbcj act when within lines, under adieadvantagc, for they
224 riKLt) }UEJIFI€AT10N.
must watch and follow every movement of the eneiu j, so
as to be equally prepared to resist a false and a real at-
tack. It has often happened that while the defenders
within the lines were concentrating their forces to oppose
a false attack, the eneniy has penetrated at a point where
he was not expected; and a continued line once entered
may generally be deemed lost.
151. Continuous lines of redans connected by curtains
are constructed in three ways : in the first, (which is the
one puincipalljf used,) as described by Vauban, the salients
of the redans are 240 yards asunder, consequently the
musketry fire of one redan does not, effectively, defend the
Balient of the next. . To remedy this defect, it was subse-
quently recommended that the salients of the redans should
be brought within musket range of each other, or withia
160 yards.
152. In both of these constructions, the flanking angles
formed by the faces of the redans and the curtains joining
them must exceed 160°, and consequently the flanking de-
fence is very impeifect.
163. Lines o^ lenailles, consists of parapets forming a se-
ries Df salient and re-entering angles, and are in fact, like
the improved redan lines, except that in this tracing, the
redans are all of the same size, and have obtuse angles.
154. They are traced by setting off distances of about
200 yards along the front of the intended lines, to marke
the position of the salient angles ; these intervals are then
bisected, and perpendiculars drawn towards the interior
to give the places of the re-entering angles. The perpen-
diculars should not exceed half the distance between the
salients, otherwise the re-entering angles would be less
then right angles.
rirts roRTiFiCATiox. 225
155. CremailUre lines are composed of alternate short
and long faces at right angles (or nearly so) to each other ;
the short faces, called croffJiets, are made about 30 yards
long, and the long faces, called br<tnvhes, about 100 yeads
long.
156. These lines possess the following advantages :
Ipt. The branches are little exposed tc bo enfiladed,
owing to the small projection of the salients.
2diy. Each branch is defended not only by the fire of
th« adjoining crotchet, but by several others.
3dlys mioir outline is very easily adapted to all varieties
<of the ground ; and on slopci-', in particular, they are very
advantageous, because a stnall additional height given to
the e)otchets will defilade a long extent of earth from the
tire of an ancmy on the height.
1.57. Their defects are :
1st. The crotchets being short, very little of the ditch
of each is defended by the adjacent branch;
2dly. A battery which can enHlade one branch is equally
able to enfilade several.
158. Cremalllore lines may be much strengthened by
placing along their front, bastions or double redans, at in-
torvals varying from 690 to 800 yards, in order that a cross
tire of artillery may be brought from them in front of the
other parts of the line.
f yS9. The crotchets sbould face towards the bastions^
or redans, in order that the firt^ fioni the crotchets mar
defenfl the salients of tb'.''9 woiks. aud that the branchce
may t).e defiladed by bc»ng diicctcd on the bastion? or
double ro'^ans.
S'JS FIKLB FORTIKICATION.
lilNES WITH INTERVALS OR BROKEN LINES.
160. Broken lines should always, v>-hen practicable, be
«r?po9ed in a double row, and in puch a manner that the
inner works may flank theontlinp; the advantages pos-
sessed by broken lines, arc :
1st. With the same extent as continuous lines, they ro-
*|uire less labor in the construction, and fewer troOjDS to
jjccupy them, consequently large reserves may be formed,
2dly. The defenders may advance in force and in a regu-
lar formation through the intervals, and attack tho enemy
should he have been thrown into confiision.
3dly. They oblige the enemy to overpower each separate
work before he can become possessed of the whole; where-
as if a continuous line be forced in one part, it is general-
ly lost to the defenders.
4thly. If the enemy has gained one work, he will then
be exposed to the flanking fire of the adjacent works, and
to a fire from the works in the second line.
IGl. To profit fully b}' this advantage, when the front
line consists of closed works, their rear faces ought to be
of slight construction, that the artillery of the second
line may easily demolish those faces, if the enemy should
gain pc ssession of the works.
162. When there are two lines of works, the heaviest
artillery should bo placed in the interior line, or else the
enemy, obtaining possession of the exterior line, would
turn the guns against the other, and have a superiority
over the dofeniers.
163. When lines are on sloping ground descending to-
wards the front, the slope Sshould, if possible, be very t^toep,
so as to form an escapement befur the woj k\-,
MKLu lonriFK'Ano*, 2"'.'
164. A eiugle row of redans or redouts is comparativi-
iy weak, for the fire from tli cm crosses at a distance iu
front of the intervals, and but feebly defends tlie salients.
Lunettes are better in such a situation on account of tlic
lire of the flanks, which may be broug-ht to cross the capi-
tals close to the salient angles.
165. The intervals between the works which form a bro-
ken line, should not exceed l^O yards, in order that they
may be defended by an effective cross fire from those works-
166. The different works should occupy the most promi-
nent and the highest ground : also the flanking parts ought
to be perpendicular to their lines of defense.
167. The intervals between the works may be strength-
ened by artificial obstacles, or by a trench, for troops,
with a rough parapet, (like the first parallel in a seige)
Laving abroad interior slope to enable the men to advance
over it when occasion requires.
DEFENCE OF FIELD WORKS,
168. A spot selected for a military post should not be
commanded, especially on the flank or in the rear, within
the ordinary range of a field piece. There should be plen-
ty of materials on the spot to aid in strengthening the
works, or in forming obstructions in frontof them, the soil
should be of a nature to be easily worked, and the position
ehould be difficult of access ; it should, however, offer the
means of retreating in security, and with facility.
169. There is no talent more essential to an officer than
that of seizing at a glance the strong and weak points of a
position. This talent, known by the name of '"JlUitar,'/
toi'p d' aciV can be atquiicdaloncby practice and stud t ■
228 FIELD ««RTIFI«AriON.
for whatever may be said of natural gifts, apprehension,
however quick it may be, can supply the places of those
indispensable requisitions in every art, and in no one arc
they more so than in the Militwry Art.
170. The highest ground of a position should be occupied
by the salients of works, for then the adjoining faces will
be, in some measure, secured from enfilade fire j it follows
that the re-entering angles should be placed in the lowest
spots.
171. It is very essential to create obstructions within
short range of musketi'y in front of all works of a tempo-
rary nature, with a view of breaking the order of the as-
sailants, and detaining them under a close a«d severe fire,
if they persist in forcing their way through.
172. In fact, all the movements of an enemy, whether to
the front, to the right or left, should be as much cramped
and impeded as possible ; it is important to break his or-
der and put him int© confusion when under fire, for he
can seldom reform under such circumstances ; and if he
attacks in disorder, the chances are against his success.
173. To save time in making palisades or stockade work,
the whole quantity ought to be divided into distinct por-
tions, say 10 or 12 feet in length, to one carpenter and two
laborers ; and to prevent confusion in obtaining materials
for constructing obstacles, it is well to divide the men into
parties of 8 or 10 each, prescribing to each party the na-
ture of the materials required, the place where they are
to be obtained, and the spot at which they are to be de-
posited.
174. The materials are obtained by felling trees, unroof-
ing houses, taking up floora and the like.
FIELD IfdRTjrifATION. 229
175. The guns of a work should not, gcnerallj, reply to
the cannonade which preceds an assault, but should be
placed behind traverses, or other places of shelter previ-
ously prepared by them ; they should only fire at the ene-
my's artillery, while the latter is changing its position.
176. Hound shot or shells arc fired against guns ; grape,
canister, spherical case, and rockets against troops.
177. As soon as the enemy's light troops advance, the
parapets are to be manned ; sand bags, previously filled,
are placed along the parapet, leaving loop holes between
them ; they are musket shot proof, and give the men the
necessary confidence to enable them to take a steady aim.
One rank of men is sufficient on the banquette, others be-
ing placed behind them to load. A reserve is to b« station-
ed under cover, who fall upon the assailants with the bayo-
net, should they sueced in getting into the work. For a
goad defence, there ought to be a fils per yard to man the
parapet, with a reserve of one-fourth or one-sixth of the
whole, in addition.
178. As soon as the assaulting columns begin to mask
the fire of their own artillery, the guns of the work will bo
brought up and open their fire on them.
179. A sortie (very rarely) may be made, should the
enemy be thrown into disorder ; but this step requires
great caution, for should the sortie be repelled, the enemy
may enter the works with the retiring troops.
180. FouGAssBS, previously prepared, will be fired the
instant the enemy is above them, by means of a piece of
safety fuse, or a musket with its muzzle in the powder, and
a wire to the trigger.
181. If the assailen(« at length descend into the ditch,
230 i:leld lOftiificAin^.N.
ebells, grenades, and every sort of missile are to be tbrowii
upon them. The shells are rolled down b}' being placed
in troughs laid on the superior slope of the parapet.
182. If the enemy has to cross a river before he arrives
at the work, the fords maj^ be rendered impassible for ar-
tillery and cavalry, by digging pits, planting stakes,
throwing in felled trees and harrows, or by driving wag-
Otes or oarts full of stones into the middle, and taking off
the wheels.
183. Should the ford be beyond musket range from the
■work, a narapet may be raised opposite to it, at such a dis-
tance from it as tojpermit the aefenders to issue forth and
charge the party crossing it, at the moment they land in
disorder on the bank.
184. To prevent suprise, outposts arc stationed around
the work at night, and heaps of dried brushwood, or tarred
fascines, should be placed along the post at intervals ; at
the approach of the enemy the outposts retire into the
work, having set fire to the piles of brushwood ; this will,
in a great measure, prevent an enemy from concealing
himself near the work.
LOOPHOLING WALLS.
185. Walls are made available for the purpose of de-
fense Dy loopholing them, if a ditch cannot, for want of
time, be dug at the foot of the wall outside. The loopholes
ought to be at least 7 feet above the ground to prevent the
assailants from making use of them ; in the former case a
temporary stage might be made of casks, ladders, &c.,
■within i feet or 4 feet 6 inches of the loopholes, to enable
tlie men to fne thFOUfth them.
1 Itl.O rOKTiyiriiH
JS<i...Tl)o (Quickest way of loopholing a wall is to break it
down fcom the U)p in "the form of narrow fissures abont 3
feet asunder ; but if the wall is very low, or there is not
time to make loopholes, a piece of timber or the trunk of a
tree, supported on the top of it by a couple of stones, wou!d
be a ready expedient, and the men could fire from the open-
ing-under it or sand bagfs, or larp^ stones or sods, might
be-placed on the wall at intervals. .. The roopholes made in
walls or buildings can seldom bo n)ade of any rcjrular form;
The width outside should not exceed 3 inches, but inside
it may be equal to the thickness of .the wall. The best
tools (of such as are usually found about a building-) .to
break loopholes throagh a wall, arc crow-bars, pick-axes,
and large hammers.
187. Barricades for roads and streets," are made, if time
permits, by sinking. a ditch 7 or 8 fiet deep, "and forming
the earth into a breastwork, adding palisades, &c., but if
time presses, casks, bo;ces, or cart bodies lilled with oarth^
stones, manure, or cinders, sacks of four, bale* of mex-
chandise, and 'the; like, must be arranged across j jpavino-
stones may be taken iip and disposed in a similar manner,
188. The mass should be raised 6 or 7 feet high, and a
banquette formed fuj firing over it; the neighboring
houses should also be l.oopholed so as to give a good flank-
ing fire over tli^e ground in front of the barricade,, s;ind
stones may be collected to tlwow down on the assailants
from the contigious houaofe.
FOUTIFYIXCr EOUSES.
IvSfA The gveat art of convciting buildings, and the out-
liii • ;iiid wall that in:n?llv surround them, into defensible
232 VIELB FeUTIFIOATION.
posts, consists in selecting from the mass of objects at hand,
such as will answer the purpose, and in sacrificing eyery-
thing else, making use of the materials to strengthen the
part which is to be fortified.
190. The building chosen should possess some of all tho
following requisites :
Ist. It sTiould command all that surrounds it*
2dly. It should be substantial, (not thatched,) and of a
nature to furnish materials useful for , placing it in a state
of defense.
3dly. It should be of an extent not too great for the
number of defenders, and should only require for the com-
pletion of the proposed object the time* and means which
can be spared.
4thly. It should hare projections flanking the walls and
angles.
5thly. It should be difficult of access on the side exposed
to attack, and yet have a safe retreat for the defenders ;
and, of course, it must be in such a position as to answer
the purpose for which the detachment is posted.
191. As a rough guide to judge of the third requisite,
there ought to be a man for every 4 feet of wall round the
interior of the lower story, one to every 6 feet for the se-
cond story, and one to every 8 feet for an attic, with a re-
Berve about one-sixth of the whole.
192. Should there exist any doubt about having suffi-
cient time to execute all that might be wished, it would
be necessary to decide on the best points to be secured in
order to repel an immediate attack ; in such a case it might
be well to employ as many men as could work without hin-
<lerir»"" e8*"h other by being too crowded, to collect materi-
FIKL» FORTlFI«ATI«N. 233
a^ aod ban-icado the doors and windowe on the grouflli
floor, to make loopholes in them, and to level any obstruc-
tion outside that would give cover to the enemy, or facili-
tate the attack; to sink ditches opposite the doors on the
outside, and arrange loopholes in the windows of the upper
story ; to make loopholes through the walls generally, at-
tending first to the most exposed parts, and to break com-
munications through all the party walls and partitions; to
place abattis or any feasible obstruction on the outside, and
to improve the defense of the post by the construction of
tambours ; to place outbuildings and garden walls in a state
of defense, and establish communication between them ;
to make arrangements (in the lower story particularly)
for defending one room after another, so that a partial
possession only, could be obtained on a sudden attack
being made.
193. These different works should be undertaken in the
order of their relative importance, according to circum-
stances ; and after securing the immediate object for which
they arc designed, they mi^ht remain to be improved on,
If an opportunity should offer.
194. Houses are fortified by piercing loopholes through
the walls, and if the walls are high, two or even three rows
of loopholes may be made, and a temporary scaffolding of
furniture, casks, Ac, erected for firing from the upper
ones ; one row may be made close to the ground, with pits
dug In the rear, &r the floor may be cut through, if there
is a basement, for the convenience of making use of them.
The loopholes may have the dimensions before prescribed,
and they ought not to be made at a less distance than three
feet from each other, lest the wall should be too much
Treakened, ©r the defenders inconve»ientlr cao^^eled.
2oi fiKLU leKriritAxioK.
195. The staircases are to be cut away, the eommuuica«
lion being kept up by ladders ; and the floors, as well as
the partition walls, should be loopholed.
196. Thatched roofs and all combustible materials a^-e to
be removed, and barrels of water should be placed in every
room in readiness to extinguish fire.
197. A communication ought to be opened on the side
farthest from the enem}'^, through which ammunition
and reinforcements may enter.
198. The door or barrier closing this communication,
may be made musket proof, by nailing strong planks to it,
and if there is a basement to the house, the floor should be
cut away within the door, so as to form a sort of a ditch.
199. All the doors and window^are to be barricaded and
loopholed. The best barricade for a door is made by strong
palisades, which are secured to a thick cross beam let into
the wall on each side ; a bank of earth may also be formed
on the exterior.
200. All the enclosures which may atford the enemy
cover, must be removed, if not included in the defense.
201. If artillery is likely to be employed against the
h ouse, it will be necessary, unless the walls are very strong,
to support the timbers cf the roof by means of props.
202. If there is time, the house maybe formed into a
block house by pulling down the upper stories, and laying
the materials over the lower rooms to make the covering
shell proof.
203. A ditch may be dug on the outside of the house,
and the eaith placed against the walls; some protection
may be obtained for the doors, by placing strong beams
on the wall outside in an inclined position, and heaping'
Varth or ruljbifh ovcm- Ihem.
I IKLl) riinTllli.'ATfON. loi}
INTKEXCniXG A VILLAGE.
204. In intrenching a village, the building?, walls, and
hedges on its circuit, are to be considered as part of its
enclosure, and arc to be made fit for the purpose of de-
fense; all the intervals between them are to be occupied
by breastworks or palisades, and strengthened bj abattis.
205. The streets are to be barricaded at intervals with
carts or wagons, having one or two wheels taken off, with
barrels of earth, bales of merchandize, «tc. ; a passage
should be made through the adjoining houses, which should
be loopholed, and care mu^t be taken that the barricade
be not turned by an enomy passing down the neighboring
etreots.
20G. Some strong building, such as a church, court-
house, or jail, should be selected, and fortified with par-
ticular care, to serve as a citadel or reduit, to which the
defenders may retire when driven in from the exterior
part of the village.
207. Advantage must be taken of any walls or outbuild-
ings surrounding whatever has been selected as the reduit
or keep ; and they should be converted into outworks for
strengthening it as an independent post. Should the vil-
lage be of too great an extent for the force thrown into Of,
a portion of it only might be strengthened, and the re-
mainder separated or destroyed ; or the defence might be
confined to some separate building.
208. The roads by which an enemy would advance should
be cut up, and obstructed with felled trees, ploughs, har-
rows, &c. ; bridges should ho brokon, and the passage dis-
puted under cover of some simple field wni'k placed favor-
ably to command the road.
2^^ FIELD FOBTIFreATrOX.
209. The resolute defence of villages situated on the
front of an army has often decided the fate of a battle;
in this position, they may be regarded as bastions connect-
ed by movable curtains.
ATTACK ON FIELD WORKS.
210. The attack on field works may be executed bysur-
prise, or by open force ; the former can only take place
when the advance of the assailants is concealed by fog or
darkness, or by the nature of the ground, as in mountain-
ous countries.
211. In the attack of field works by open force, it is ad-
visable to advance against several points at the same mo-
ment, when circumstances permit ; of these some may be
false attacks, and may be converted into real ones if the
enemy appears weak or hesitating on the points threaten-
ed. One attack ought, generally, to be directed upon the
rear of the work, (if open at the gorge,) which will al-
ways lessen the confidence of the defenders.
212. As many assaulting columns should be formed as
there are points to be attacked, and before the works are
stormed, pits and trenches should (when time permits,
and there is no natural cover for skirmishers) be dug to
conceal riflemen : these pits are about four feet wide, and,
with the excavated earth raised before them, four feet in
depth, in order that they may serve to cover a file of mon to
that height.
213. The artillery should be posted on the prolongations
of the faces to enfilade them, weaken the parapets, and
ruin the interior defences of the works and its ditch ; for
FIELB FORTIPieATION. , 237
the latter purpose howitzers are best adapteii. As soon as
the artillery has produced some effect, the signal for the
assault should be give ; light troopswill gradually advance
towards the counterscarp, in skirmishing order, firing at
the gunners through the embrasures ; they will conceal
themselves in the pits and trenches prepared for thorn, or
seek shelter in the inequalities of the ground. They should
be followed by storming parties, and these should be ac-
companied by adetachuicnt of sappers, (or ajsqu ad of sol-
diers told oft" for that purpose,) carrying axes, crowbars,
bags of powder, <fec., to force obstacles. Lastly, the re-
servo will follow, at some distance, to act as circumstan-
ces may require ; it may repel attempts to aid the
defenders, reinforce the storming parties if they succeed
in entering ;.the work, or it may afford them a rallying
point, and cover their retreat if they fail.
214. The troops descend into the ditch with unfixed
bayonets, in order to avoid accidents ; and thej fix them
when on the berme.
215. Should the ditches have a great depth, it will be
necessary to lessen it by means of bags with heather or
grass, or by bundles of hay or straw, or fascines, &o.
21G. A bridge formed of a gun limber and a ladder maj
be run up to the counterscarp and thrown across.
217. To avoid mistakes in marching by night to attack,
each soldier should bear some visible mark by which he
may be distinguished form an enemy. If a breach or any
particular point is to be attacked by night, the way to it
should be marked by distinguishable pickets or other ob-
jects, placed or re-marked on the ground at the time of the
previous reconnoissance.
;:;;3 field FOETiricAxroK.
-18. The columns naarch to the ai;?ault in tha direction
iS the capitals ;- but after passing the ditch, the troopg
rhould enter the worka by the faces, on each side of the
■^alient angle, tkat they m&y present a front in the work
i uual or ?uperior to that of the enemy. When it may be.
iiiitvisable to force an estranco at the gate of a fortifiecJ
poit, that gnie may be destroyed by a piece of artillery
5,i()ught close ap to it, or by a bag of powder attached to
the wood by a gimlet, or propped against it by a forked
^ ' iclc.
■219. In assaulting a place whose scarps and counter-
v<;irps are revetted with masonry, scaling ladders must be
>!n).loyed. The first division of each column of assault
riniesthe longest ladders ; they descendiinto the ditcli
R:.it.li them, and aftferVi'ards carry the ladders across and
rniso them against the scarp.
220. The next division carries other ladders, ^Yhich they
plitpo and leave against the counterscarp. The ladders are
finied and planted with arms slung. Ladders planted
aii'aiiist aiwall are not to slope above one-foiirth of their
h ight, lest they should break under the weight of the
iii;'"n.
22;1. A strong firing party is drawn up on the glacis to-
kiiep down the fire of the defenders, if the latter should ap-
pear oa tb« parapets to oppose the assault.
ATTACKING HOUSES.
222. In the attack of houses, artillery should be era-
])l».r{ito form a breach before giving the assault, and also-
tu iuow hot shot, shells, and carcassos-.
iihLi* rom-iiiC-Miox.
223. If the detnelnncnt is unprovided with artillery, ^.i-
tampti must be made to force passages through door.
^vindo^vs, or unflanked parts of the walls: the atta.k
should be made on different parte of the building, to du-
iractthe attentien of the defenders; in the meantime,
and for the same purpose, parties of men keep up a fire -ui
anv points where there is a chance of disabling them. -
Attempts may also be made to effect an entrance throu;:h
the roof by means of ladders.
224. If the assailants have neit4icr iwwder nor crowbwi^s
for forcing doors, a heavy beam or tree may, if at b;-.i..i,
be used as a battering ram ; a fire of straw or brush^vnod
may bo made near the walls further to distract and p...r.u,
the defenders, and to cover the operations of tto aMaU:iiilr.
ATTACKIXO BARRICADES.
225. Artillery will soon clear a passage tiirough ordiii*-
ry^barricades ; "if not, the assaulting party must endeavor
to turn the barricade, either by passing down some <.i h r
street, or by forcing a passage from one^ouse to ancUin,
until they arrive in rear of it : a few loaded musket, ap-
plied to tlie locks and bolts of the strongciit door wiU f-.M-ce
it open, and the partition walh: may be destroyed by h^-i
of powder, &c. After having taken possession ot a ht-u.-,
troops must be left in it for the purpose -of firing frcw it
upon the barricade.
OUTPOST AND PICKET DUTY.
PART SIXTH.
ADrANCED-OUARDS AND ADVANCED-POSTS.
1. To k,eep an enem}' in ignorance of the state of our
forc»6 and the character of our position, is one of the most
indispensablie duties in war. It is in this way that we
oblige him to take every possible precaution in advancing;
forcing him to feel his way step by step, and to avoid risk-
ing his own safety in hazarding those bold and rapid move-
ments which, when made against a feeble or an unprepared
enemy, lead to the most brilliant results.
2. This object is eftectedby placing between the position
occupied by the main force and the presumed direction of
the enemy, a body detached from the main force, but act-
ing always with reference to it, termed an Advancecl-
Ouard.
3. Thia term is used for any body of troops so separated
from the main body, whatever its strength and composi-
tion, and whether the troops be in position or on a
march.
i. For a large Jorce, the adrancsd'-gaard is necessarily
o«f-POSf AN* ncKEi Dwrr. 241
composed of troop« of all armg, its strength being propor-
tioned to that of the main force ; the more or less re-
sistance of an independent character it may be required to
make; and the greater or less extent it may be found
necessary to embrace by its advanced-posts, on the front
and flanks, to watch and anticipate every movement of
the enemy.
5. The proportion of the advanced-guard to the main-
body may vary from a third to a fifth of the total force.
In armies of some strength, or large eorps-d' armee, par-
ticularly where the nature of the country requires a wide
development of advanced-posts, the larger proportion is de-
manded ; as at least one-third or even one-half of its
strength will be required for the advanced-post service.
In a small force of two or three thousand men, one-fifth
will usually be all that can be well spared for the same
purposes.
fi. Our purpose, in all cases, should be to keep the ei>c-
my in a state of uncertainty as to our actual force and
movements, and this can be effected only by keeping con-
stantly between him and our main-body a force of sufficient
strength to offer an obstinate resistance, if necessary, to
every attempt he may openly make to gain information,
and even to aot offensively against him, when occasion of-
fers, so as to keep him in doubt aa to the actual character
and number of troops before him ; the old military axiom
being always kept in mind, that " a sword opportunely
drnum frequenthf keepn another hack m itt scabbard."
7. In all defensive positions, the adv. meed-guard audits
advanced-posts should retire slowly but circumspectly, s(>
that the main-body may have time to take all its defensive
Tneasures. In the ofTensWe, the attack of the aclvauced-
guard should be decided and vigorous ; pressing upon the
enemy at cvcrj point, and leaving nothing undone to de-
moralize Lim, bj the confusion which so often follows from
an impetuous onset.
8. Whilst in position, the advanced-guard should take
advantage of the natural, or other obstacles on its front
and flanks which are within supporting distance, to
strengthen itself, and again strppurts for its advanced-
posts. In this waA^, its means of resistance, whether act-
ing oiiensively, or otherwise, may be greatly augmented.
Ground of this character, taken up by the troops, should
not be abandoned without very cogent reasojis for it;
eince, should circKrastauccs bring abo«t a forward move-
ment, it might cost more to regain what was given up
than to have maintained it obstinately at tir.'>t.
9. The ground to be taken by an advanced-guiud, and
embraced within its advanced-posts, should be carefully
chosen. To take position where the movements of the
enemy can be well watched, whilst our own troops art
kept concealed, and not liable to a sudden attack, either
in front or flank, are the dedder^.ta in such cases. If, in
following this guide, it should lead to a development -of
advanced-posts which would be too weak at any point for
a tolerable resistance, there remains but the alternative-
to retire slowly before the enemy,— taking care that he
do not slip behind the out-posts and their supports,— upoi;
3ome een-tral point to the rear where the advanced-posts,
united to tlio troops in reserve, may make a good stand,
and from which, if the chances are favorable, they may
idvance u]u>n the onemv, and makchioi paj- dearly i'arblg
SeUlCMUTV..
10. In all affaire of advanced-s^uarda great circumspeo-
tion is to be shown, both by the offictir in command of the
advanced-guard, in throwing forward fresh troops to
strengthen a point assailed, as well as on tho part of the
general-in-chief, in sustainins;^ th« advanced-guard br
weakening bis main-body. The«e are point.^ that can only
be decided upon the spot. The .safer rule, in all cases, is
Bot to weaken th-? main defen.^e, or main attack, by detach-
ing from it to support a feeble point. If the force engag-
ed, under such circumstances, does not suffice for its own
defence, it is best for it to fall back in time, and, taking
jionition with the main-bod j, endeavor, by their combined
eirorts, to turn the scales of victory in their favor.
11. The duties of advanced-guards being" so much more
frequently to feel and occupy tho enemy, preparatoi-y to
some decisive blow by the main body, than to engage him
with a view to follov/ up any advantage gained, it follows,
as a matter of course, that they should be composed of the
Moat efficient and active light troops at tho general's dis-
popal. 8uch troopp, in the hands of a bold, energetic, but
prudent leader, will be the right arm of any army. —
Prompt on all occasions, never taken at fault, they keep
the enemy constriiitly occupied, harass him with fatiguing
precautions to secure his Hanks and rear, whilst their own-
ikco is kept relieved from these annoyance?, and alvvay,'>
fi'csh for aay great emergency.
ADVANCED POSTS.
1 2. The duties of the advanced posts ai'c the same whetlr-
er the troops are stationary, or in movement : the}' arCjr
\ To keep a good lookout for tb« enemy, and when i^^ hA^
244 orx-POST akd picket duty,
immediate presence to take all means to bo accvirately in-
formed of his strength, position and movements ; 2. Should
the enemy advance, to hold him in check long enough to
give the main body ample time to be prepared for his at-
tack.
13. By a faithful discharge of these duties, the n-hole
army can, at all times, and under all circumstances, b»
kept in a state of readiness for action, without subjecting
the soldier to any fatigue beyend the ordinary physical
•endurance of a well-developed manhood, as but a small
portion, comparatively, of the forces present is required
to watch over the safety of the rest, and can therefore be
frequently relieved, so that every one may have time suf-
ficient for the repose demanded after extraordinaiy exer-
tions.
14. The object being to secure the front and flanks of the
■position occupied by the main body, from any attempt
eiiher to reconnoitre or attack it, the detachments which
-form the advance posts must be so distributed as to em-
brace all the avenues by which the enemy can approach
■the position. The system adoped, in most services, to ef-
fect this object, consists of two or three concentric lines of
posts, disposed in a. fan-shaped order. The exterior line,
which forms the Out-Posts, embraces a wide circumfer-
ence, and by means of a chain of Sentinels, poeted in ad-
'vance, prevents any one from penetrating to the rear be-
tween the posts, without being seen.
15. The second line, which is one of Grand-Guards,
embraces a narrower circumference than the line of out-
posts, occupying the more important avenues from the out-
jiosts to the interior, go as to be in position to support the
eXTT-POST AyD PICKET BUTT. 24o
out-posts in case of necegsity, and to receive them if driven
in.
16. The interior line consists of several stronj? detach-
ments, termed Pickets, posted upon the main avenues to
the position. They serve as supports to the two exterior
lines, upon which they rally if forced to retire before the
enemy.
17. Besides ese dispositions for security. Patrols are
kept up betwt n the line of posts, to keep the one inform-
ed of the state of the other ; and also between the out-
posts and chain of sentinels, to see that the duties of the
latter are well performed, and to search any ground not
brought well under the eyes of the sentinels. The whole,
in this way, forms a connected system, for observing the
enemy and for mutual support in case of attack.
18. The duties of the out-posts, and of the grand-guards
which form their supports, are strictly those of observa-
tion. If attacked, they offer no resistance farther than to
enable them to foci the enemy perfectly, and never lose
sight of him. The task of holding the enemy in check by
a vigorous resistance, so as to procure sufficient time for
the main body to make its dispositions foi: battle, is con-
signed to the pickets.
19. The ground taken up hy the advanced-posts will
depend on the capabilities which its natural features offer
for defence, on the number and character of the approach-
es it presents to an enemy for attacking the front or flanks
of the position occupied by the main body, and upon the
facilities it may afford for communication between the
posts.
Mb lUT-POflT AND PICK til 01 I V,
OUT-POSTS.
20. The position of the out-po?t3, with respect to the
main body, will be regulated by the more or less broken
character of the country. As a goijeral rule, the mean
distance may be taken at about two miles. The line occu-
pied by these posts should take in all the approaches to
the front and flanks of the main position. When a posi-
tion is to be held for some time, or is taken up after a bat-
tle, the out-posts may be thrown farther in advance, to
^pprocui'e greater repose and security for the main body.
21. The ground on which the line of out-posts is estab-
lished, should be carefully examined, with a view both to
observation and defence. As far as practicable, those
points should be selected for posts which present some na-
tural advantages for the defence ; will screen the troops
from the enemy's view, and enable tbeni to watch all bis
movements. Whenever the features of the ground do not
offer natural obstacles to cover the posts, artificial means
of a slight character should be resorted to. The flanks of
the line should rest upon strong natural obstacles ; when
such cannot be found, withdvit giving the line too great
an extent, these points must be secured by strong pickets
of cavalry or infantry, thrown back to form crotchets,
from which patrols must be constantly kept up on the
flanks, in the presumed direction of the enemy.
22. The strength of each out-post, and the distance from
one to the other, will be '"egulated by the features of the
ground, and the number of sentinels or vedi^ttes that each
post must throw out. The posts should, as far as practi-
cable, be within si^ht of the grand-guards to which they
0UT-P08T AN» riCKir DUir. 2i1
belonjj, and the sentinels of their respective posts. When
the ground does not pertnit this arrangement, sentinels
should be placed at intermediate points, to communicate
promptly whatever may happen at the line of posts, or of
sentinels, to the rear. Posts of infantry should not, as a
general rule, be placed farther ap;irt than 600 paces, nor
their sentinels more than 300 paces in advance of the posts.
Those of cavalry may b^sorae 1500 paces apart, and their
vedettes from 600 to 800 paces in advance. The strength
of each post should be calculated at the rate of four men
for each sentinel, or vedette.
SENTINELS.
23. The sentinels and vedettes form a chain in advance,
and are posted on points from which they can best watch
the enemy without being seen by, or exposed to him, in
any way. As one of their main duties is to preveat any
one from passing their chain, they should be so placed,
with respect to each other, that they can see all the ground
between their respective posts, and be able to stop any one
who may attempt to pass between them. At night and in
misty weather, the sentiuelg should be doubled and be
drawn in nearer to the out-posts.
24. Whenever it may be deemed neeessasy to post senti-
nels on points beyond the line of out-posts, they should be
furnished by posts detached in advance of the line.
ORAXD-GUARDS.
25. As thegrand guards furnish the out-posts, and serve
as their supports, not more than one-third of their force
248 wBi-Poax AS» rivKiiT ifir.
should be taken for the out-posts. The graud-guarjds ai'e
posted on the principal arenues leading to the detachments
on which they are to fall back, if driven in; and when of
infantry, about 200 pace's, and of cavalry, 600 to 800 paces,
in the rear of the out-posts. The points which they occu-
py should be selected, both to secure them from the enemy's
view, and to give a ready communication between them
and their respective out-posts. No difficult or broken
ground should lie between the grand-guards and their
out-poste ; if any such occur, particularly if it be of a na-
ture to offer TaTCititjes to an enemy to penetrate to the rear,
the whole should be posted on the farther, or either side
of it, and in preference in the latter position, if by it the
chain of post can be preserved unbroken.
PICKETS.
26. The main detachments or pickets, which form t he
supports to the grand-guards and out-posts, occupy the
principal avenues to the position of the main body. As
their duty is to hold the enemy in check, the points which
they take up should be susceptible of a good defence ; such,
for example, as villages, defiles, &c. Whenever these ad-
vantages are not found at hand, resort should he kad to
any temporary obstacles, as abattis, &c., which can be
readily procured, to place the troops under shelter. The
points thus occupied should, as a general rule, be about
midway between the line of out-posts and the position of
the main body.
27. Small posts should be thrown forward by the pick-
ets, between their position and the line of grand-guards ;
evT-POsr i.N» rieKBT bhtt. 2t-
both for the greater security of the detachments, and as
supports to the grand-guards. In like manner, when the
line of pickets is of considerable extent, intermediate poata
must be established, to keep open a communication between
them.
28. No pains should be spared to obstruct the approach-
es of the enemy to the points occupied by the pickets, par-
ticularly those which lead to the flanks, leaving open such
only as will oblige the enemy to attack under the most
unfavorable circumstances, and if, between the advanced'
posts and the main body, a defile, or other unfavorable
pass should occur, which the. enemy, by turning the line
of the advanced posts, might seize upon, and thus cut off
their retreat, it should be occupied by a strong detach-
ment, both to prevent such a raanccuvre, and to favor the
retreat on the main body.
STREXGTU OF THE ADVANCED-POSTS.
29. The entire strength of the advanced posts, as well as
the relative strength of tha pickets, grand-guards, and
out-posts, will depend upon the character of the ground
covered by them, as being more or less open, and present-
ing more or less facilities for circumscribing the approach-
es of the enemy to the main position. It rarely occurs
that sufficient troops can be detached to cover all the ac-
cessible ground; and perform the duties in a thorough
manner.
30. The strength of each picket, and the kind of troops
of which it is composed, will depend on the degree of re-
sistance to be offered to the enemy's attack, and the char-
acter of'the position occupied. In most cases where a vig-
-•>'' iiUT-.POST A.\l) I'TCKET Bl.^T.I .
oroiis defence? is callecl for, they will -consist- of troops of
all arms, and an aggregate of sevef al hundred men. The, •
grand-guards, ou't-posts, and pafr'ols, should not exceed
one-third the strength of the pickets to which thej.belong.
They will be composed of car air v, or infantry, according
to the more or less broken features ©f the ground/
SI. It rarely ocQura that artillery is placed at the out-
posts. Whenever it happens that a piece or two may be
deemed necessary, to sweep some passage, oi; defile, in ad-
vance of the line of out-posts, the guns must be prot^icted
by a strong post, to insure their safety in a retreat. , '"
32. If, from the character of the ground, the out-posts
are mainly of infantry> some cavahT should alwa3'&be at-
tached to them, to patrol in advance of the position, and
to convey intelligence to the rear*, of what may be passing
in the jieighborho?)d of the out-posts.
33. When the advanced posts cover an advanced-guard,
the commanding officer of the "whole should take a posi-
tion, with his artillery andthe main body of his command,
at some central point, in the rear of the pickets, .in order
to be read}^ to support them if hard pressed by-the ene-
my.. The choice of this position is an object of the great-
est importance, as the safety of the advanced-posts, as well
as that of the main body, may depend upon the degree of
judgment shown in this selection. . -
34. So soo» as the advanced-posts have taken up thoir
stations, instructions shpuld be given to the officers of the
different. posts, with respect to the points upon which they
are to fall back, in case of bpi-ng forced in, the.Unes of
communication they must retire by, and the position they
must take up, in joining thj .supports to which they re-
spertiv^Ir belnn£'.
, oc!»F(.i^r AN» FicKBT OL rr. ?5l
DUTIES OF OFFICER COMMANDIXG AN OUT-POST.
35. An officer in coinniand of any of the out-poat3 must
be capable of untirinu; vip^ilance aud activity, to perform
the various duties which devolve upon him. lie should bo
provided with a ifood map of the country, a telescope, and
writing niatoiialf.
36. lie will thoroucjhly .reconnoitre th* ground upon
which be is to dispose his command, and also as far in ad-
vance as circumstances will admit, questioning closely
any inhabitant he may lind. After taking up his position,
he should go forward, with the half of his command, and
post each sentinel himself. If, however, he relieves an-
other in the command, awd deems it advi>;able to make any
changes in the d spositions of his predecessors, he should
promptly report the facts to the commanding officer in his
roar.
37. When the officer finds that the enemy is not III his
immediate neighborhood, he should endeavor to feel his
way cautiously towards him by patrols ; and when in im-
mediate presence, he should omit no means to watch the
cnemj^'s movements, and from the occurrences of the mo-
ment, such as noises, the motion of clouds of dust, camp
tires, conflagrations, <fec., endeavor to divine what is pass-
ing in his camp, and his probable intentions.
38. Accurate written reports should be promptly sent to
the officer in command, in the rear, on all these points.
The reports should be legihly written, and should clearly
but concisely state what has fallen under the officer's eye,
Tvhat he has learned from others, and the character of the
soui'Ces from ^'hicb hi;- iuf'^'i raation i? drann.
252 •rr-posT and picket putt.
39. Ho will particularly see that no comaiuuication with
the enemy be allowed, and that no flag be permitted to
pass the line of post, without orders from the rear.
40. The post under the officer's command, whether horse
or foot, should not all be allowed to sleep or eat at once.
The horses, when watered, should be taken singly or by
pairs, and always mounted. At night, one half of the
command should be under z^rms, prepared for an attack,
the other seated, their arms and the bridles of thtir horses
in hand. The men should never be permitted to occupy a
house ; and if the weather is such that a fire out of doors
is indispensable, it should be as much concealed as practi-
cable; one-half only being allowed to sit near it, the oth-
er posted, at a convenient spot at hand, to fall on the ene-
my should he attempt a stroke.
41. When the position taken up is to be held for some
time, it will be well to change the locality of the posts oc-
ca^nally ; this should be done, particularly at night, in a
hilly district, changing the post from the brow of the hill,
where the men can best keep a look-oat by day, to the low
ground at night, as more favorable to detect any move-
ment above.
42. The out-posts are usually relieved at day break, as
being the most favorable moment for the enemy to attempt
a surprise ; the new guard will serve to reinforce the old.
For the same reasen, the old guard should not be suffered
t9 retire before the patrols come in, and report all safe.
43. As a general rule, no post should ever retire before
an inferior force ; and, if attacked by one superior to it,
resistance should be cautiously made with a view solely to
give time to the graud-guard to be in readiness to receive
OUT-rOST AND PICKF.l DLTT. 253-
tlic enemy. When it is aeon that the mov.oicnt of the en-
vmy is serious, the officer should dravr fn his sentinels as
ekirmishers, and retire upon the grand guard ; the latter
will usually be divided into two divisions, one of which'
will be sent to take up a position to the rear, to cover the
retreat ; the other will act as a support to the line of skir-
mishers, 80 as to feel the enemj. In all cases of retiring,
whether of sentinels upon their posts, or of posts upon
their supports, care should be taken to assume a directiom
towards the flank of the force in rear, so as to unmask its
front and not impede any forward movement it may make,
if necessary.
44. The degree of resistance to be offered by the pick-
ets will depend on the object to be obtained, and the im-
portance of the point occupied. They should not retire
until they have received the whole of their grand-guards,
out-posts and patrols.
15. At night the pfecautions should be neeessarily re-
doubled, and every movement bo made with extreme cau-
tion. Whenever any noise is heard in the direction of a
ncntinel's post, the officer should proceed, with a part of
his command, in its direction, to ascertain the cause of it.
If he finds that it arises from an onward movement of the
enemy, he should only fall back upon his grand-guard
when he sees that resistance would be unavailing ; retiring
slowly and cautiously, and taking every advantage, which
the ground offers, t© check the enemy's advance. Should
the enemy fall suddenly upon his commmand, he must en-
deavor to cut his way through, and reach his position in
the rear by the best circuit he can find.
251 OUl-Pum AND ri<REl Pt IT.
ADVANCED-GUAKDhi.
46, Jloasuic^ of precaution, lor a. force in po.ntioii, at ^
far more easily arranp;cd than for ono in moUcn. At .<
halt of som«' <Uys, but alight chanffca in the first di.ipo.-*;
tiony, arisinj!^ fi<nn u metro thorough knowledge of tli'
«jround taken up, will be requisite ; on a march the bccn
is continually shifling, and the enemy may lall on just ;r
that point or under those circumstances in which we ai
least prepared to meet him. Hence a necessity for doul
ling the ordinary precautions on a march, and keeping tli
troops more in hand, so as to be, at all moments, prepar<
for anv emercrenrv.
t *
47. The £{iirit of the dispositions ia th«* i<ame in bod'
cases : changes in the details, so tm to adopt our force to
(he changing features of the ground passed over, present
the real didiculty. On a march, we may hare to guard
against an aitack on the head of the column, on either
flank, or both, and in the loar. "Hence a necessary disposi-
tion of movable advanced-posts, in each of these direc-
tions, keeping pace with the progress of the main body,
and far enough from it to give it timely warning of a throal-
eucd attack.
RECONNOISSANCES.
-is. Tiic'ic are no more iraportaut duties wluch an officer
may be calletlnpon to perform than those of coUocting and
an an5,hig the information upon which cither the general
or daily operations of a campaign must be based. For the
proper performance of the former, acquirements of a very*
l»igh order, in the departments of gcograjjhy. and statistics,
are indi><pensabli> requisites, to which must be added a u>in-
Ute acquaintance Avith topography, and a good coup d'ctil
militairc for that of the latter.
40. However detailed and perfect may be a 'map, it can
'never convey all the information that will enable an ofll-
cer to plan even an ordinary march .with safety, etill less
operations that necessarily depend for their success upon
a far greater number of contingencies. To supply these
deficiencies of maps, an examination of the ground must
be made liy the eye, and verbal information bo gained, on
all the points connected with the operation over this
ground. This examination and collection of facts is term-
ed a Jiecoiuiois-^aucc.
fiO. From the services demanded of a reconnoitering of-
fiC3r, it i?, in the first place, evident that lie should po.sscss
acquirements of no ordinary character, bnt in addition to
^ tbeeo, h«-' shonid l^e <rifted bv nntui-o with certain ti.'iitp,
\
2S6 EBC0XK§ie9i'4C!E^'
without which his acquisitions would be of little account in
the discharge of the responsible duty in question.
51. With clear and specific information before him, one-
half of a general's difficulties in planning his measures, are
dissipated. In a letter from Gen. Washington to Major
Tallmadgc, now to be seen framed in the office of the Com-
missary-General of Xew York, he remarks, in relation to
reports made to him on a certain occasion : " But these
thitjgs not being delivered with certainty, rather perplex
thkn form the judgment." It is in truth this feeling of
certainty that constitutes all the difierence ; having it, the
general makes his dispositions with roiiffdence ; without it,
he acts hesitatingly, and thus ccmmUnlcates to others that
want of confidence felt in his oWn mind.
62. A-n officer then, selected for the duty in question,
should be known to te cool-headed and tntihful — one wlii;
sees things as they Are, and telle clearly and precisely whM
he-bass^en. In making his report, whetlier verbaluj or
in writing, the officer should study conciseness and' preei-
sioa of language. He must carefully separate what he-
knows from his own observation, from that which he hafl:
learned from others, and add all the Qircumstanpes- oit
place and time with accuracy.
DUTIES OF REC0NN0I1?ER:I"NG OFFI'GER.
hii. The first thing to be drme by an officep selected for
a reconnoispanee, is to ascertain precisely. ihc duty required
of him ; and what further should be done in case of cer-
tain contingencies that may, from the nature of the duty,
bp naturally looke'Jifor. lui tihe oeiiOwraanof* of tlu' diitVj^
RECONNOISSAKOES. 257
assigned him, and in making his report, the "officer should
keep always in mind the specific character of his mission,
as his guide in both points.
64. As the need of a recounoissauce supposes a deficien-
cy in information upon the features of the country, the of-
ficer detailed to make one should provide himself with
maps, a good telescope, such simple aids for judging of
distances, and ascertaining the relative positions of objects,
as he can himself readily make ; writing materials ; one or
more good guides ; and gain all the knowledge he can,
from the inhabitants at hand, bearing upon his mission.
55. The talent of judging of distances, and of the con-
nection between the various features of a country within
the field of vision, is partly a natural and partly an ac-
quired one. Some individuals can never be brought to
have any confidence in their own judgment on these points ;
others have a natural aptitude for them, which requires
but little practice for their perfect development. The
powers of the eye vary so greatly among civilized per-
sons, that no general rules can be laid down as a guide for
the matter in question. Among uncivilized herdes, used
to a roaming life, there are found standards which are
well understood by all ; the Arab, for instance, calling
that distance a mile, at which a man is no longer distin-
guishable from a woman— growing out of their habits.
5G. The first thing, then, to be done by an ofilcer in ac-
quiring the cox(2) cVciil militaire, is to learn, both from
books and on the field, what space is taken up by a battal-
ion and its intervals,by a squadron and by a battery when in
order of battle ; how much when in column of march ;
and the average time required for certain movements, un-
9
der given circumstances of the ground. Thi3 acquire-
ment he may make by adopting some standard of his own,
his ordinary pace, and that of a horse, serving for comput-
ing time and distance reciprocally. The next step is to
acquire the habit of estimating, by the appearances of
these different objects, from various points of view, how
far off they are. This must be done practically. A very
simple aid to it is the following : Upon the stem of a lead
pencil, cut square, and held out at a uniform arm's length
from the eyo, by means of a thread attached to it and fas-
tened to the top button-hole, let the officer mark off, on
one of the edges, the length seen on it by holding the pen-
cil upright between the eye and a man placed successively
at different distances from it, as 100, 150—1000 yards.
This will gi"^e one rough standard for practice. Another
may bo made by first ascertaining the average height of
certain cultivated trees, as the apple, &c.
57. For getting relative positions, a contrivance for
measuring angles roughl}^ must be used. This is done by
first folding a leaf of paper across, and then doubling it
along the folded edge, as if to divide it into four equal
parts. The angle between the edge of the first fold and
that of the second, will be a tolerably accurate right-an-
gle. Now, by cutting off carefully along the fold one of
the pieces, we obtain a quadrant, or 90° ; then folding
this at the angle, so that the two edges will exactly coin-
cide, we get the half of a quadrant, or 45° ; and so on, by
successive bisections we can mark off smaller angles. Then
making a pen or pencil- mark along each of the folds, and
numbering the angles successively from 0 to 90°, we have
a rougli j».'V)^/Trr/or, that can be uspd both for measuring
KECUN N UlSS.S N e l-x. 2i0
«ngIos and setting them off on a s-kctch. To measure ver-
tical angles, a thread with a light plummet, must be at-
tached to the angular point. If the object is above the
horizon of the eye, we hold the proti actor triih the anjxi-
lar point from the <^ye, &o that the plumb-line will fall along
the face of the paper, just touching it; then directing the
tep edge of the protractor on the object, so that it is juFt
seen bj the eve, sighting along the edge, the angle formed
between the plumb-line and the other edge, will be the
.same as the angle between the line of sight and the hori-
zon of the eye.
58. If the object is below the horizon of the eye, the an-
gular point !•? ^^/f/cer^ /ocarc/^ //tr; eye', the same scried of
operations will give the ar.r^lc below the eye's horizon,
GUIDE?.
59. Trustworthy guides are invaluable, but most rare,
in an enemy's country. The best, from the information
they acquire by their habits of life, are to be found among
those classes whose avocations keep them much abroad,
going from place to place within a certain sphere con-
stantly— such as common carriers, hunters, smugglers,
kc. Among the first things to be attended to by an offi-
cer, in taking post at any point, is to find out persons of
this class, and to ascertain their whereabout when want-
ed. Kind treatment, doucciira, and promises, should not
be spared, to enlist either their good will or their inter-
ests ; and, if policy requires it, they may openly be treat-
ed with apparent harfchncs?, to screen them from odiuia
among their neiuhbory.
260 RECONNOISSANSES.
60. If none of this class can bo found, then resort must
bo had to a liigjher — local authorities being in preference
selected — and if necessary, forced to act. Here rery care-
ful treatment is requisite. When the necessity of the case
is admitted by thorn, much may be gleaned by kindness,
courtesy, and a certain deference, from such persons, that
cannot be looked for from their inferiors.
61. Before starting on his mission, the officer should
question his guide thoroughly ; and if he has several,
question each apart ; like precautions should be taken with
respect to other inhabitants. Care must be had to find
out the usual beats of one taken as a guide, so as not to
take him out of his own neighborhood. In all cases, the
guide must be well watched, however trustworthy he may
seem. If unwilling or sulky, he must if needs be, be tied,
and attached to a strong man, with a rope round his mid-
dle ; being first strictly searched for any cutting instrument
about him.
62. Should there be but one guide, he must necessarily
be placed with the most advanced portion of the detach-
ment accompanying the oflicer. If there are several, one
must be there also ; the one apparently the most intelli-
gent with the officer, who should ply him with questions,
and the others in the rear strictly guarded.
63. It may be well to remark, that guides are useful
even in a country of easy communications ; as in case of
a rencontre, they may point out bye-ways convenient for
retreat, if necessary.
REGONNOISSANCKS. 261
RECONNOISSANCE.
6'1. To designate all the objects to be embraced in a re-
connoisance, would lead farther than the limits of this lit-
tle woi'k will allow ; some general heads, which will serve
as guides in all cases, wall therefore be alone noticed.
65. A general view of the ground to be examined must
first be taken in, so as to obtain some notion of the forms
of the parts, their connection and relations to each other,
before going into a detailed examination. To one posess-
cd of some topographical knowledge, this study of what
is before him will not demand much time. A level country
for example, he knows is usually well cultivated, and
therefore has plenty of hedges, ditches, &c., which lend
themselves w^elllto affairs of light troops, may be not a
little inconvenient to manoeuvres of artillery, and fre-
quently bring up cavalry very nnexpcctedly in full career.
In a mountainous one, dangerous passes, narrow roads,
torrents with rough beds, ugly sudden turns, &c., will ne-
cessarily be met with. Each and all these demand a par-
ticular examination, and in his report their advantages
and ilisadvantages should be clearly pointed out by the
officer.
66. If the reconnoissance is for an onward movement,
the distances from halt to halt, as well as all others, should
be estimated in hours of march ; the nature of the roads,
and the obstacles along them be carefully detailed ; the
means that may be gathered along the line to facilitate the
movement, as vehicles, men and materials for removing
obstacles, &c. The points where cross-roads are found,
EECOMsOlSSANCES
must be specified ; the direction of tbese roads, their
uses, &G.
67. All local objects aloug the line, as villages, farm-
houses, &c., should be carefully designated, both as to
their position on the line, or on either side of it ; and also
as to their form, and color, Ac, as -'square white houge
on the right," "round gray stone tower on hill to left.''
68. The names of localities, in the way in which tht in-
habitants pronounce them, sliould be carefully written,
and called over several times, so as to be sure to get them
as nearly as practicable right in sound ; then the names,
as written by an intelligent inhabitant, should be added.
69. All halting points must be well looked to ; their
military capabilities in case of attack, as well as their re-
sources for accommodating the troops, be thoroughly gone
into.
TO. If the halt is to take position for some time, to
await or watch the enemy, then more care must be taken,
the whole site be well studied as to its fulfilling the pro-
posed end ; the points of support on the flanks be desig-
nated, as well as others in front and rear, that may re-
quire to be occupied ; the suitable localities to be chosen
for parks, hospital, &c ; the communications to be opened
or repaired, pointed out ; and all the facilities either for
an advance or a retrograde movement to be laid down.
ARMED RECONXOISSANCE.
71. Reconnoissanees, made in the neighborhood of an
enemy, require to be done under the protection of a prop-
er detachment, the strength and composition of which
TV ill depend ou the object to be attainod.
f. ^:^•3^o^»^A.•<f•Ji^. 'i('>3
12. If the object be to gain secretly a knowledt^e of the
enemy's whereabout and strength, then a detachment of
light cavalry, conducted by a trusty guide, through cir-
cuitous bye-ways, and moving with celerity, but with
proper precautions against falling into an ambush, or hav-
ing his retreat cut off, is usually resorted to. The detail?
for this will be found under the head of Patrols.
73. When an enemy's position is to ba recoflnoitcred,
with a view to force him to show his hand, by causing
him to call out all his troops, then a large detachment of
all arms, adequate to the task of pressing the enemy vig-
orously, and also of withdrawing with safety when press-
ed in turn, must be thrown forward.
74. Under the shelter of either of these forces, the ofli-
cer charged with the reconnoissance, takes the best mo-
ment, and best point of view, for cirefullv ascertaining
the dispositions made by the enemy. A good time will
be at early dawn, when troops, in most servicea, are all
made to stand to their arms. The points which the ofli-
cer must exhibit most attention in finding out, are those
occupied by the batteries, and nil those in any way in-
trenched.
TATROLS.
75. Patrols are of two classes, from the different objocta
had in view. The first are those made with a view of in-
sui iug greater security from the enemy's attempts to pass,
or force the line of out-posts, and may therefore be term-
ed drfensive patrols. They consist usually of three or
i\n\r m.^n, who go the rounds, along the cliain of Pftritin*^U
264 RBCONNOISSANCES,
and bet\reen the posts ; seldom venturing farther than a
few hundred paces beyond the sentinel's chain ; the object
being to search points which might present a cover to the
enemy's scouts, and to keep the sentinels on the alert.
76. The second class are those made exterior to the line
of out-posts, with a view of gaining intelligence cf the
enemy's whereabout, and may therefore be termed offen-
sive 2^ atrols. They are composed of larger bodies of men
than the first class, the number being proportioned both
to the distance to be gone over, and the extent of front to
be examined. In a position, presenting but few cross-
roads, and sparsely settled, a patrol of ten or twenty
horsemen, may be found ample, to search with all desirable
thoroughness, from twenty to forty miles in advance of
the position, along the principal avenues to it ; whereas,
with a more extended front, presenting many lateral ave-
nues, double this number might be required for the same
duty. From the information obtained, through the ordi-
nary channels of maps, and by questioning the inhabitants
at hand, the commanding officer can usually settle, with
sufficient accuracy, the strength of a patrol.
77. From the duties to be performed by patrols, cavalry
are usually employed alone ; in cases of very broken
country, infantry mjiy be necessary, but they should al-
ways be accompanied b}'^ some horse, if for no other pur-
pose than to transmit intelligence promptly to the rear.
78. The main duties of a patrol are to find the enem}^ if
in the neighborhood, gain a good idea of his position and
strength, to make out his movements, and to bring in an
accurate account of his distance from the out-posts of their
own force, and the character of the ground between the
position occupied by the respective forces.
liECoNMU.SSANCEc. Ibr^
79. From the nature of these duties, it i^s OTident that
both officers and men, for a patrol, should be selected with
especial reference to their activity, intelligence, and the
aptitude thej may possess, from previous habits of life,
for a service requiring a union of courage, prudence, and
discriminating observation — usually to be met with only
in individuals who have been thrown very much upon their
own resources. When the character of the country ad-
mits of it, the employment of such individuals, singl^^, or
in very small bodies, as scouts, is one of the most availa-
ble means of gaining intelligence of an enemy, without
betraying the secret of our own w^hereabout.
DUTIES OF OFFICER IN COMMAND OF A PATROL.
80. In conducting a patrol, the commanding officer
should provide himself with a good map, telescope, and
guides, and gain all the information ho can before start-
ing, by questioning persons in the neighborhood. Noth-
ing should escape his eye along bis line of search, and ho
should particularly note points which might be favorable
to his defence, if driven back by the tnem}', or by which
his retreat might be endangered.
81. The order of march of the patrol will be regulated
by the circumstances of its strength, kind of troops em-
ployed, the character of the country passed over, the hour
of the day, and the particular object in view. The intelli-
gence and judgment of the officer in command will have
sulficiont exercise on these points, as he will be continual-
ly called upon to vary his dispositions. The general and
obvious rule of keeping a look-out on all sides, will prompt
'J66 Kk,CO^.>'Jl:y8A.NLllS.
the general disposition of .an advanced-guard, rear-guard,
and flankers, according to the circumstances of the case,
however small his coniraand. The sole object being to car-
ry back intelligence of the enemy, no precaution should
be omitted to cover and secure his line of march, without
making, however, too great a subdivision of his force.
82. Too much circumspection cannot be shown in ap-
proaching points favorable to ambuscades, as woods, ra-
vines, defiles, inclosures, fiirm-houses, villag?s, &o. The
main body should ahvaj'-s be halted, in a good position be-
yond musket-shot, or where cover can be obtained, whilst
a few men proceed cautiously forward, following at some
distance in the rear of, but never losing sight of each oth-
^r, to examine the suspected spot. If the officer deem it
Deccssary, at any point, to detach from his command
smaller patrols, to examine points at some distance on his
flanks, he should halt the rest at the point where they
separate, until the detachments como in and report; or
if he decides to move forward, he should leave three or
four men at the spot, to convey intelligence promptly
to the rear, if anything is discovered, ns well as to him-
self.
83. It may frequently be found that some eminence on
the flanks ma}' present a good view of the surrounding
country, in which case, if it be decided to use it, two or
three men ought to be detached for the purpose, with or-
ders to keep in sight of each other, but far enough apart
to guard against a surprise of the whole.
8-i. When the officer finds himself in the presence of
the enemy, he should halt his command at a convenient
spot, wher^ ihpy will be screened from the eii^mr's rievr,
and having made his dispositions agaicsi a surprise, he
will proceed with a few picked men to the most favorable
point from which he can obtain a good look-out, to recon-
noitre the position occupied, and the other points of inter
est. If he deem it advisable to keep his position, or change
it for some other point more favorable, he will first trans-
mit a report to the rear of what he ha? observed.
85. When tlte patrol moves bv night, the ordinary pre-
cautions must be redoubled. Signals must be agreed up-
on to avoid danger, should any of the party become sepa-
rated from the main body. Careful attention must bo
given to every thing passing around, as the barking of
dogs, noises, fires, &c. On approaching any inhabited
spot, the command should be brought to a halt, whilst a
few picked men move noiselessly forward, and if practica-
ble, by stealing up to the windows, learn the character of
the inmates.
86. It cannot b.* too strongly impressed upon the mind
of the officer in command of a patrol, that he must be all
ears and eyes j that he will be called upon in turn, to exer
else great boldness, caution, presence of mind and good
judgment, in accomplishing a mission where the enemy
must be seen but not encountered ; and such roads and
halting points be selected, both in moving forward and re-
turning, as shall be most favorable to his movements, and
least liable to expose him to surprise, or a disadvantage-
ous collision with the euemv.
SURPRISES AND AMBUSCADES.
87. These two classes of operations depend for their suc-
cess upon the same point — that of being able to attack the
enemy suddenly when he is not prepared to resist. The
term siuyrise is applied to unexpected attacks upon an
enemy's position ; that of ambuscade, where a position is
taken for the purpose of falling suddenly upon the enemy
when he reaches it. Secrecy, good troops, and a thorough
knowledge of the localities, are indispensable to the suc-
cess of either of these operations.
SURPRISE.
88. In planning a surprise, the officer must spare no
pains in ascertaining the fact of the country leading to,
and in the immediate vicinity of the enemy's position, the
character and disposition of his troops, and the state of
preparation of the defenses of the position. Information
may be obtained on the points from the spies, deserters,
inhabitants of the locality occupied by the enemy, good
maps, &c.
89. The troops to be employed in the expedition, as well
as the other necessary arrangements, will depend upon the
information gained on these points. If the position be an
intrenched one, infantry will constitute the main force ;
glRrniSF.S AN'U AMBUSCADES. 269
cavalry and artillery can be of little other use than to
cover the retreat of the infantry, and to make pris-
oners of those who may escape from the position.—
A body of engineer troops or of picked men used to hand-
ling tools, will accompany the infantry, carrying with
them such implements as may be requisite from th« char-
acter of the defenses, as axes, saws, crowbars, email scal-
ing ladders, &c.
90. If the position be not intrenched, as an open village,
&c., cavalry may perform a very important part, by a
sudden dash among the enemy, in creating confusion and
alarm.
91. As the success of the affair will greatly depend upon
the secreey with which these preparations are made, and
the celerity with which it is conducted, all orders for col-
lecting the necessary implements and assembling the
troops, should be given at the shortefet notice ; no more
troops should be taken than are indispensably necessary,
and they should cary nothing with them but their arms,
and the requisite amount of ammunition.
92. Midnight is the best hour for small bodies of trooj^a
to carry out such enterprise, as they must effect all they
desire to do and be off before day break. A few hours before
daylight is the best time for large expeditions, as the
dawn of day will be favorable to their retreat by which
time they will have been able to effect their purposes.
The season of the year and the state of the weather should
be taken advantage of. Winter and bad weather are most
favorable, as the enemy's sentinels and out-posts will then,
in all probability, be less on the alert, and more disposed
'o keep under such shelter as they can procure.
\
\
\
270 SCIirillSES and AMIirscADKS.
93. As our purpose may be divined by the enemy, meas-
ures should bo taken against such a contingency. These
will mainly consist in securing by detachments all defiles
and roads by which our retreat might be cut off, and by
designating a rallying point, on which our force will i'all
back, if repulsed, which should be strongly occupied by
cavalry and artillery, if they constitute a part of the force.
94. In conducting the march, the troops will be kept
well together ; the greatest order and silence be observed.
Instead of the ordinary precautions of as advanced-guard
and Hankers, reliance should rather be placed* upon a few
active and iijteUigent scouts, to gain timel}^ notice of any
movement on the part of the enemy.
95. Concerted attacks upon several points are good
means of creating confusion and paralyzing the enemy's
efforts, when they can be successfully carried out; but,
a.i they may req^uirc some of the detachments to make con-
siderable circuits to reach their points, much will depend
upon chance as to their success. In such cases, some sig-
nal must be agreed upon, to let the detachments, already
in position, know when those which are likeliest to reach
theirs latest, are ready ; but this may have the inconve-
nience of giving the alarm ta the enemy. Rockets may
be used for this purpose, and also to give notice to the
troops to retire together,
9o. Tiie retroat after a successful issue, should be con-
ducted with the same promptitude as the advance. Time
must not be lost in waiting too long for all the detach-
ments to coine in at the rallying point, as the safety of the
wfii>l(> command misrht bo comptonrii-'pil.
SX lirKl.SK.S A.N» AMliVtfiAl'K*.. -271
AMBUSCADE.
07. In planning an ambuscade, we should be well ac-
quainted with the enemj-'s force, and the state of disci-
pline shown hy it. The position chosen for the attempt,
must be favorable to the concealment of troops, and if
practicable, it should be reached by night, every precau-
ti®n beiii'i; thken to insure secrecy. The best positions are
those where the enemy is incioscd by a defile, or villacce-
and has not taken the proper precautions to secure him
t<clf from an attack. By seizing the outlets of the defile
by infcintry, in such cases, and making an impetuous
charge of cavalry into it, the enemy inny be completely
routed.
1)8. Ambuscades may frequently bo attempted with suc-
cess in the aflairs of the advanced and rear-guards, bv
pushing the enem.y vigorously and then falling back, if
he ofiers a trong resistance, Eo as to draw him upon a
point where stroops are posted in force to receive him.
on. To trace anything more than a mere outline, ai a
guide in operations of this kind, which depend upon so
many fortuitous circumstances, would serve but little use-
ful purpose. Au active, intelligent ofFicor, with an imagi-
nation fertile in the expedients of his pi't.fession, will sel-
dom be at a loss as to his best course when the occasion
offers ; to one without these qualities, opportunities prfr-
scnt themselves in vain.
KEGlJiATIONS AS TO INSPECTIONS, PARADE,
ETC., ETC.
PART SEVENTH.
FORM OF INSPECTION.
1. The inspection of troops, not less than a company, will
generally be preceded by a review. The present example
embraces a battalion.
2. The inspecting^ officer and the field and staff officers
will be on foot. The battalion being in the order of battle
the colonel will cause it to break into open column of com-
panies, right in front. He will next order the ranks to be
opened ; when the color-rank and color-guard, under the
direction of the adjutant, will take post ten paces in front,
and the band ten paces in rear of the column. The colonel
seeing the ranks aligned, will then command :
1, Officers and Sergeants to the front of your Companies.
2. March.
3. The officers will form themselve in one rank, eigt'
paces, and the non-commissioned officers in one rank, *
paces iu advance, along the whole fronts of their r"^*^"*"
IXSPECTICN. 273
tivc companies, from right to loft in the order of seniority;
the pioneers and music of each company, in one rank, two
paces behind the non-commissioned officers. The colonel
will then command :
1. Field and Staff to the front. 2. Maroh.
4. The commissioned olRccrs thus designated, will form
themselves in one rank, on a line equal to the front of the
column, six paces in front of the colors from righ to left
in the order of seniority : and the non-commissioned staff,
in a similar manner, two paces in rear of the preceding-
rank. The colonel seeing the movement executed, will
take post on the right of the lieutenant colonel, and wait
the approach of the inspecting officer. But such of the
field officers as may be superior in rank to the inspector,
will not take post in front of the battalion.
5. The inspector will commence in front. After in-
specting the dress and general appearance of the field and
commissioned staif under arms, the inspector, accompan-
ied by these officers, will pass down the open column,
looking at every rank in front and rear.
G. The colonel will now command. 1. OrcZcr— Amis. 2.
Rest ; when the inspector will proceed to make a minute
inspection of the several ranks or divisions, commencing
in front.
7. As the inspector approaches the non-commissioned
staff, color-rank, the color-guard and the band, the adju-
tant will give the necessary orders for the inspection of
arms, boxes and knapsacks. The colors will be planted
firm in the ground to enable the color-bearers to display
the contents of their knapsacks. The nun-commissioned
J (4 l^irLL'Ily^.
stalFmay be diamisicd as? soon as inspected, but the color-
rank and color-guard will remain imtil the colors are to
be escorted to the place from which they were taken. As
the inspector successively approaches the eonipanies, the
captains wii! command :
1. Attcntien. 2. Conipniiy. 3. In^peciion — Akjss,
8. The inspecting officers will then go through tha
whole company, and minutely inspect the arms, accoutrc-
raeuts and dresoofeach soldier. After this is done the
captain will command: 0/>cn— Boxes ; when the amron-
iiition and boxes will be examined. He will then com-
mand :
1. Shouhlcr — Arms. '_'. Clone- OnL'T. 3. Marpk. \. OrJcn'
— Arm:>. 5. Stack — ARMy- <j. To the rear open order.
7. Map. cit. 8. Front rank, About — Face, 5. Z'neliiV]
JCnupsack'. 10. Open Knup>sacl:8,
^. The sergeants will face inward at the second com-
-inand, and close upon the centre at the 3rd, and at the oth
command st nek their armsi at the 6th they M"ill face
■r.utward, and at the 7lh resurae their position. When the
ranks are closed, preparatory to iahe armi, the serg■eant^<
will also close upon the centre, and at the word, take their
iirms and re>uino their position.
10. The knapsacks will be placed at the feet of the men,
the flaps from tliem, with the gi'cat coats on the flaps, and
knapsacks leaning on the great coats. In this pojition
the inspector will examine their contents or so many of them
as he may think necessary, commencing with the r.nn cr.m-
s'iiiisioae^l otVirerf. tko men gf.'indinc;' at sttrntion, VrinHi
the iKspector La; pa3sed through the companj, the cap
tain will comiT^and : Repack Knajy^achs^ when each sol-
dier win repack and buckle up his knapsack, leaving it
on the ground, the nuuihrr upwards turneJ from hiin,
and then ptanJ at rest. Tlte captain will tlien command :
1. Attention. 2. Company. 3. Sling Knap.=iack8. i.
Front rank, Anoi'T Face. 5. Clone Ortltr. C. March.
7. JaA'e— Akms. 8. .^Aow/c/^r— Arms. 0, OjUrfrs anJ
Sergeants 10 your 2>OHt9. 10. March.
11. At the works7tW7 of the *rd command, each soldier
will take his knapsack, holding it by the inner Flraps, and
Etand erect; at tlvc la^-t word, he will replace it on his
back. At the 10th command, the company will fde off to
their tents or quarters, except the company that is to re-
escort the colcr?, which will await tb« further order? cf
the coloneh
FOllMS OF PARADE.
12. ThcJ *jzample3 here given embrace a battaliun of in-
fantry. A single company will parnde as if it wore with-
the h.att.'ilion,
I. DRESS PAR A in:,
13. At the hour appointed, on thoFigna! of the adjutant
the captain.s will march their companies to the parade-
ground, where they take their position.? in the order of
battlff. When the line is formed, the captain o^' the lirst
company, on notice fiom the adjutant, ftcpn one pace to
the front and gives to hia company the coiiminnd : Order —
4rm : • l*i^,io<h — Kvsr • which i^ rr-peatpd Ur *^n.ch nap-
27C DKESS PARADE.
tain in succession to the left. The adjutant takes post two
paces on the right ©fthe line; the sergeant-major two
paces on the left. The music will be formed in two ranks
on the right of the adjutant. The senior officer preisent
will take the command of the parade, and will take post
at a suitable distance in front, opposite the centre, facing
the line.
14. When the companies have ordered arms, the adju-
tant will order the music to heat off', when it will commence
on the right, beat in front of the line to the left, and back
to its place on the right The adjutant will then step two
paces to the front, face to the left, and command :
1. Attention. 2. Battalion. 3. Shoulder — Arms. 4. Pre-
pare to open ranks. 5. To the rear open erder. G.March.
16. At the sixth command, the ranks will be opened, the
commissioned officers (tield and stafi" dismounting) will
march to the front, field officers six paces, the company
officers four paces, opposite to their position in line of
battle, halt and dress. The adjutant seeing the ranks
aligned, wall command: Fr8nt, and march along the front
to the centre, face to the right, and pass the line of com-
pany officers, eight or ten paces, face to the right about
and command :
Present —Anna.
16. Seeing this executed, he will face about to the com-
manding officer, salute and report, "Sii', the parade is
formed." The adjutant will then, on intimation to that
efiect, take his station three paces on the left of the com-
manding officer, one pace retired, passing around bis rear.
DRESS PAUADE. 277
17. The commanding nfticer, having acknowledged the
salute of the line by touching his hat, will, after the adju-
tant has taken his post, draw his sword and command.
1. Battalion. 2. Shoulder — Akms,
and add such exercises as he may think proper, conclud-
ing with Order — Arms. He will then return his sword,
and direct the adjutant to receive the reports.
18. The adjutant will now pass around the right of the
commanding oflicer, advance upon the lino, halt midway
between him and the line of company officers, and com-
mand :
1. First Sergeants to the/rorU and centre, 2. Mar#h.
19. At the first command, the first sergeants will shoul-
der arms, march two paces to the front, and face inward.
At the second command, they will march to the centre,
and halt. The adjutant will then order :
1. Front— FxcE. 2. Report.
20. At the last word, each in succession, beginning o»
the right, will salute by bringing the left hand smartly
across the breast to the right shoulder, and report the re-
sult of the roll-call previously made on the company pa-
lade. The adjutant then commands :
1. First Sergeants, outward—FACE. 2. To your posts —
March,
when they will resume their places and order arms. Tho
adjutant will then face to the commanding officer, salute,
report absent officers, and give the result of the first ser-
2Ts IiRESS Pa U ADS.
geants' reports. The commanding officer will then direct
the orders to be read, when the adjutant will face about
and announce :
ATTENTION TO ORDERS.
21. Having read the orders, the adjutant will lace to
the commanding officer, salute and report; when, on an
intimation from the commander, he will face again to the
line and announce :
PAKAQK IS SISM2SSI2D.
22. All the officers will now return their swords, face
inward, and close on the adjutant, he having taken posi-
tion in thetr line, the field officers on the flanks. The ad-
jutant commands :
1. Front — Face.. 2. Forward — March.
When they will march forward, dressing on the centre, the
music playing, and when within six paces of the coai'
mander, the adjutant will give the command ? Halt.
The offiers will then salute the commanding officer by
raising the hand to the cap, and there remain until he
?hall have communicated to them such instructions as he
may have to give, or intimates that the ceremony is fin-
ished. As the officers disperse, the first sergeants will
close the ranks of their respective companies, and march
them oti", the band continuing to plaj- until the companies
clear the regimental parade ground.
KETIKU. 279
II. IIEVIEW.
23. Preparatory to a review, the adjutant will cau^e a
camp-color to be placed 80 or 100 paces, or more, in front of,
and opposite to, where the centre of the battalion will rest,
where the reviowinj^j officer is supposed to take his station ;
and although he may choose to quit that position, still the
color is to be considered as the point to which all the
movements and formations are relative. The adjutant
will also cause points to be marked, at suitable distances,
for the wheeling\s of the divisions, so that their right flanks,
in marching past, shall only be about four paces from the
camp-color, or position of the reviewing officer.
24. The battalion being formed in the order of battle at
shouldered arms, the colonel will command:
1. Battalion, pn par cf or review. 2. To th«re<ir,oj)cn order.
3. Mauch.
25. At the word march, the field and staft' officers die-
moiint, the company officers and the color-rank advance
four paces in front of the first rank, and place themselves
opposite to their respective places in the order of battle ;
the color-guard replace the color-rank; the stafl'offieer«i
place themselves, according to rank, three paces on the
right of the rank of the company officers, and one pace
from each other ; the music takes post as at dress parade;
the non-commissioned stafii" takes post one pace from each
other, and three paces on the right of the front rank of
the battalion.
2G. When the ranks arc aligned, the colonel will com-
m«'\nd : Fuont : ^ml place hi ni.HelC eight paces, und tl<'<
280 KEVIEW.
lieutenant-colonel and major will place themselves two
paces, in front of the rank of company oflEicers, and oppo-
site to their respective places in the order of battle, all
facing to the front.
27. When the reviewing officer presents himself before
tlie'centre, and is fifty or sixty paces distant, the colonel
will face about and command :
Present — Arms ;
and resume his front. The men present arms, and the of-
fficers'salute, so as to drop their swords with the last mo-
tion of the firelock. The non-commissioned staff" salute
by bringing the sword to a ^joise, the hilt resting on the
breast, the blade in front of the face, inclining a little out-
wards. The music will play, and all the drums beat, ac-
cording to the rank of the revieAving officer.*
28. The reviewing officer having halted and acknowl-
edged the salute by touching or raising his cap or hat, the
colonel will face about and command : Shoulder — Aums 1
when the men shoulder their pieces ; the officers and non-
commissioned staff" recover their swords with the last mo-
tion, and the colonel faces to the front.
29. The reviewing officer will then go towards the right,
the whole remaining perfectly steady, without paying any
further compliment, while he passes along the front of
the battalion and proceeds around the left flank, and along
* If the reviewing officer be junior in rank to the com-
mandant of the parade, no compliment will be paid to him,
but he will be received with arms carried, and the officers
will not salute as the column passes in review. The col-
ors salute such persons only as from their rank, and by
regulation, arc entitled to that honor.
nKVir.w. 2^1
the rear of the file closers, to the right. While the re-
viewing officer is going round the battalion the band will
play, and will cease when he has returned to the right
flank.
30. When the reviewing officer turns off to place him-
self b}' the camp-color in front, the colonel will face the
line and command :
1. Close order. 2. Mauch.
31. At the first command the field and company officers
will face to the ri(/ht-eihout ; and at the second command,
all persons, except the colonel, wiU resume their places in
the order of battle ; the field and staff officers mount.
32. The reviewing officer having taken his position near
the camp-color, the colonel will command :
1. By Company, riyhl ivhcel. 2. Qwic/c— Marcu. 3. Paaa
in revieio. 4. CvUnnn, foricard. 5. Guide right. 6.
Maucu.
33. The battalion, in column of companies, right in
front, will then in common time, and at shoxilder arms,
bo put in motion ; the colonel four paces in front of the
captain of the leading company;, the lieutenant-colonel on
a line with the leading company ; the major on a line with
the rear company ; the adjutant on a line with the second
company ; the sergeant-major on a line with the company
next preceeding the rear — each six paces from the flank
(left) opposite to the reviewing officer ; the staff officers
in one rank, according to order of precedency, from the
right, four paces in rear of the column ; the music prece-
ded by the principal musician, six paces bofor the colonel,
'1H2 RKVIEVV.
the pioneers preceded by a coi'poral, four paces before the
principal musician ; and the quartermastei'-sergeant two
paces from (lie side opposite to the guides, and in line with
the pioneers. The guides and soldiers will keep their heads
steady to the front in passing in review.
34. The music Avill begin to play at the command to
march, and after passing the reviewing officer, wheel to
the left out of the column, and take a position opposite
and facing him, and will continue to play until the rear of
the column shall have passed him, when it will cease, and
follow in the rear of the battalion.* The officers will sa-
lute the reviewing officer when the}^ arrive within six pa-
ces of him, and recover' their swords when six paces past
him. All officers, in saluting, will cast their eyes towards
the reviewing officer. The colonel, when he has saluted
. at the head of the battalion, will place himself near the re-
viewing officer, and will remain tkere until the rear has
passed, when he will rejoin the battalion. The colors
will salute the reviewing officer, if entitled to it, when
within six paces to him, and be raised when they have
passed by him an equal distance. The color-bearer will
remain in ranks while passing and saluting.
35. The reviewing officer, or personage, will acknowl-
edge the salute b_y raising or taking oflf his cap, or hat,
when the commander of the troops salutes him ; and also
when the colors pass. The rest of the time, occupied by
the passage of the troops, he will bo covered.
36. When the column has passed the reviewing officer,
the colonel will direct it to the ground it marched from,
* That is, unless the battalion is to pa?s in qitich time
al?o, in which case it will keep it* poaition.
C.CAKD-MOCMl.NG. 2S5
and command Guide left, in time for tlie guides to cover.
The column having arrived on its ground, the colonel will
command : 1. Column. 2. Halt ; from it in order of
battle, and cause the ranks to be opened as above directed.
The review will t«rmiuate by the whole saluting as at the
beginning. '•'•■
37. The colonel will afterward cause the troops to per-
form such exercises and manceuvres as the reviewing oHi-
cer may direct.
:{8. A number of companies, less than a battalion, will
be reviewed as a battalion, and a single company as if it
were with the battalion. In the latter case the company
may pass in column of platoons.
] I r. G UARD-MOUNTING.
39, At the first call for guard-mounting, the men warn-
ed for duty turn out on their company parades for inspec-
tion by the first sergeants. Each detachment, as it ar-
rives, will, under the direction of the adjutant, take post
on the left of the one that preceded it, in open order, arms
shouldered and bayonets fixed ; the supernumeraries five
paces in the rear of the men of their respective companies;
* If, however, instructions have been given to march the
troops past in quick time also, the column will, instead of
changing the guide, halting the column, and wheeling it
into lino, ns above directed, give the command : 1. Quick
time. 2. ^Mauc^. In passing the reviewing officer again,
no salute will be offered by either officers or men. As the
column approaches, the music, having commenced play-
ing at the command mnrch, will place itsef in front of, and
march oU' with the column, and continue to play until the
battalion is halted on its original ground. The review Avilf
lerminatc iu the .?a)ric mannor as abi>v*j diicciiKU
284 GUAUD-MOUNTUsG.
the first sergeants in rear of them. The sergeant-major
will dress the ranks, count the files, verify the details, and
when the guard is formed, report to the adjutant, and
take post two paces on the left of the front rank.
40. The adjutant then commands: Front, when the offi-
cer of the guard takes post twelve paces in front of the
centre, the sergeants in one rank, four paces in rear of the
officers ; and the corporals in one rank, four paces in rear
of the sergeants — all facing to the front. The adjutant
then assigns their places in the guard.
41. The adjutant then command :
1. Offi-cer and non-commissioned Officers. 2. About face.
3. Inspect your guards — Marsh.
42. The non-commissioned oflBcers then take their posts.
The commander of the guards then commands :
1. Order — Arms. 2. Inspection — Arms.
and inspects his guard. When there is no commissioned
officer on the guard, the adjutant will inspect it. During
inspection the band wiU play.
43. The inspection ended, the officer of the guard takes
post as though the guard were a company of a battalion
in open order, under review ; at the same time, also, the
officers of the day will take post in front of the centre of
guard ; the old officer of the day three paces on the right
of the new officer of the day, one pace retired. The adju-
tant will then command :
1. ParatZe— Rest. 2. Troop— Q^Ki Off.
■ when the music, beginning on the right, will beat down
GUARB-MOUMIMi. 265
tlio line in front of the oflScer of the guard to the left, and
back to its place on the right, it will cease to play.
44. The adjutant will command :
1. t^ttention. 2. Shoulder — Arms. 3. Close Order.-'
March.
45. At the word ** close order," the officer will face
about; at " march," resume his post in line. The adju-
tant then commands : Present — Arms: at which he will
face to the new officer of the day, salute and report, ^'Sir,
the guard is forjyied." The new officer of the day, after
acknowledging the salute, will direct the adjutant to march
the guard in review, or by Hank to its post. But if the
adjutant be senior to the officer of the day, he will report
without saluting with the sword then, or when marching
in review.
46. In review, the guard march past the officer of the
day, according to the order of review, conducted by the
adjutant, marching on the left of the first division; the
sergeant-major on the left of the last division. When the
column has passed the officer of the day, the officer of the
guard marches it to its post, the adjutant and sergeant-
major retiring. The music, which has wheeled out of the
column and take post opposite the officer of the day, will
cease, and the old officer of the day salute, and give the
old or standing orders to the new officer of the day. The
supernumeraries, at the same time, will be marched to
their respective company parades and dismissed.
47. On the approach of the new guard, the officer of the
old guard having his guard paraded, will command: —
/Vescj(<— Arms. The new guard will march in quick
<ime, puft the old guard, at ehouldur arms, nfiicefs ealut-
ing-, and take post four paces on its right,, when, being
aligned v.ith it, its commander will order : Present — Akms".
The two officers will then approach each other and salute.
Tliey will th«n return to their respective guards, and com-
mand :
1. Shoulder— Anus. U Order-~A\i^i^.
48. The otllcer ®f the new guard wHl now direct the de-
tail for the advance guard to be formed and marched to
its post, the list of the guard made and divided into three
reliefs, and perform all the other duties incident to his post
itnd necessary at this time to be done.
4:0. The first relief having been designated and ordered
two paces to the front, the corporal of the new guard will
take charge of it, and go to relieve the sentinels, accom-
panied by the corporal of the old guard/ Vvho will take
command of the old sentinels, when the whole are reliev-
ed. The relief, with arms at a support, in two ranks, will
march by a flank, conducted by the corporal on the side
of the leading front rank man ; and then men will be num-
bered alternately in the front and rear rank, the man on
the right of the front rank being No. 1. Should an offi-
cer approach, the corporal will command : Carry c(rm<i,
and resume the support arms when the officer is passed:
50. When the sentinel sees the relief approaching, ho
will halt and face to it, uith his arms at a shoulder. At
fix paces the corporal will command : 1. lleU'f, 2. Halt ;
when the relief will halt and carry arras. The corporal
will then add, '-' No. 1," or ''No. 2." or ''No. 8," accord-
ing to the number of the port, Arms—Voi.i, Thet'-ro
tlAHJiS AX* SK.S I IMil.S.
utitteU will, with arms &tport tkon approach each other.
n hen the old j-entincl, under the correction of the corpo^
ral, v\ill whisper Ihc inEtruciions to tlic now sentinel. Tuiti
*lone, the two sentinels will shoulder arnip, and the old
sentinel will pass, in quick time, to his place in rear of the
relief. The corporal will then command : 1. Support —
Anjfs. 2, Foruard, 3. JlAncn. And the relief prooeedB
in the same manner until th^e wh«le .ire relieved.
51. The detachments and sentinels from the old guard
hsviniy come in, it will bo marched, at shovlcUr avnin,
.'•ioDg the front of tlie new fcuai d, in quick time, the new
guard standing at presented arms ; oHiccrs saluting and
the music of both guards beating, except at the out-posti?.
52. On arriving at the regimental or garrison parade,
the commander of the old guard will send the detachment^
oonipos-ing it to thrir respective regiments or compani'^s.
53. Wlicn the old guard has marched off fifty paces, the
officer of the new gnard will order his men to stack their
arm SI. or ]-lace them in the arm-rack?.
GUARDS AND SENTINELS.
iii. Camp and garrison guards will be relieved every
tvTenty-four hours. Sentinels will bo relieved every two
hours. The oflicers are to remain constantly at their
guards, except while visiting the sentinels or necessarily
engaged elsewhere on their proper duty. Neither officers
nor soldiers are to take off their clothing or accoutrements
while they are on guard. AVhen a fire breaks out, or any
alarm is raised in a garrison, all guards are to be imme-
diately under arms. Sontinck-; will not take ord?)- or al-
low thi'^Hi=»lvp« to be relieved, orcopt by an (Wlienv or non-
288 '}UARDS AKli SENTINELFo
commissioned officer of their guard or party, the officer of
the day, or the commanding officer. Sentinels will re-
port every breach of orders or regulations they are en-
trusted to enforce. They must keep themselves on the
alert, observing everything that takes place within ^ight
and hearing of their post. They will carry their arms
habitually at support or on either shoulder, but will never
quit them. In wet weather they will secure arms. No
sentinel will quit his post or hold conversation not neces-
sary to the proper discharge of his duty.
55. Sentinels will be respected by all persons of whatev-
er rank. They will present arms to general and field offi-
cers, to the officer of the day, and to the commanding offi-
cer of the post. To all other officers they will carry arms.
The sentinel at any post of the guard, when he sees kny
body of troops, or an officer entitled to compliment, ap-
proach, must call "Turn out the guard; and announce
who approaches. Guards do not turn out as a matter of
compliment after sunset, but sentinels will, when officers
in uniform approach, pay them proper attention, by facing
to the proper front and standing steady at sJioulder arms.
This will be observed until the evening is so far advanced
that the sentinels begin challenging.
CHALLENGING.
56. After re/rea^ (or the hour appointed by the com-
manding officer) until broad daylight, a sentinel challeng;-
63 every person who approaches him, taking at the same
time the position of arms poj-f. He will suffer no person
to come nearer than within the reach qf bis bayont, until
CBAIIfiS AM) ^E.Ml-NKL.-. 2S'J
the peisou has given the coHn!crsijfi. A sciitiucl in dial-
longing, wHl call out : "Who coviev pJure*^^ If ausweir
ed—'' Friend , icith (he conntcftign,'^ and he be instructed
to pass pei'ons with the countcvtign, he will reply — *' Ad-
vance, friend, with (he coi(i)(ersignJ" If answered—
" Friends" he will repl^'— " HaU friends. Adcance one
ivith (he countertvjn" If answered— " Relief," ** Patrol "
or " Grand rounda," he will reply — " Jfalt ; advance »cr-
ffcant (or corporal) with (he countcrsifjn," and satisfy him-
self that the party is what it represents itself to be. If he
have no^authority to pass persons with the countersign, if
the wrong countersign be given, or if the persons hare not
the countersign, he will cause thcni to stand, and call —
*' Corporal of (he f/ucird."
«RAM) KOl'NUS.
57. The oflicei' wishing to make the rounds, will take an
escort of a non-commissioned oQiccr and two men. When
the rounds arc challenged by a sentinel, the sergeant will
answei" — '* Grand roiinds ;" and the sentinel will replv—
'"Halt, grand rounds. %fldrance, sergeant with the toro)-
tersign." Upon Avhich the sergeant advances and gives
the eounter&ign. Tiie sentinel will thou cry — ** Adoanut-
7'ounds ; and stand at a shoulder till th;^y have passed.
58. When the sentinel before the guard challenges, and
is answered — " Grand rounds," he will reply •' HaU, grand
rounds. Turn ou^ (he guard , grand rounds." Upon whirh
the guard will be drawn up at shouldered arm?. The ofiicfir
commanding the guard will then order atcigeaut and tno
caeu to advancs: when within ten pace:?, the ser;rcaut
10
cballengcs. Tiiu soi'g-eant of the grand rouniLi aiis\?ers —
'* Grand rounds." The sergeart of the guard replies —
"t^dvance, sergeant, ivith the countersign."
59. The sergeant of the rounds advances alone, gives the
countersign, and returns to his round. The s«rgeant of
the guard calls to his officer — ''The countersign is right";
on which the officer of the guard calls — "Advance rounds."
The officer of the rounds then advances alone, ihe guard
i<tanding at shouldered arms. The officer of the rounds
passes along the front of the guard to the officer, who
keeps his post on the right, and gives him theparole. He
then examines the guard, orders back his escort, and tak-
ing a new one, proceeds in the same manner to other
guards,
ESCORTS OF HONOR.
, ,60. The escort will be drawn up in line, the centre op-
posite to the place where the person to be escorted pre-
sents himself, with an interval between the wings to re-
ceive him and his retinue. On bis appear Jince he will be
received with the honors due to his rank. When he haa
taken his place in the line, the whole will bo wheeled into
platoons or companies, as the case may he, and take up
the march. The same ceremony will be observed, and the
same honors paid, on his leaving the escort.
61. When the position of the escort is at a considerabl©
distance from the point where he is expected to be receiv-
ed a double line of sentinels will be posted from that point
to the escort, facing inward, and the sentinels will succes-
aively salute as he passes. An officer will be appointed to
attend him, to bear such communications as h« may have
Co make to ^he eommandcr of the es-c&rt.
K5cr.PT OF Ho\"o*i -29i
COLOR ESCORT.
€2> Whoii a battftliou turns out under arms, and tliB
coior is WRotcd, a company, other tban that of the color,
will be put in march to receive and escort the color, in the
following order, in quick time and without music : the
drum-major and field music followed by the band-; the es-
cort in column by platoon, right in front, with arms shift-
ed to the right shoulder, and the color-bearer between the
platoons.
63. Arrived in front of the tent cr quarters of the colo-
nel, the escort will form into line, the field music and baud
on the right, and arms will be carried. The eolor-bearer,
preceded by the first lieutenant, and followed by a serge-
ant of the escort, will then go to receive the color.
Gi. When the color-bearer shall come out, followed br
the lieutenant and sergeant, he will halt before the en-
trance ; the captain will cause the escort to present armsp
and the drums will beat to the color for half a minute,
when arms will be shouldered, and the escort will fee bro-
ken into column by platoon. The color bearer witi place
himself between the platoons. The lieutenant and serge-
ant will resume their posts, and the escort will march back
to the battalion to the sound of music, in quick time and
in the same order as above.
65. Arrived at the distance of twenty paces from the
battalion the escort will be halted, and the music will
cease; the colonel will place himself sis paces before the
centre of the battalion, the color-bearer will approach the
o:>Ionel. by fha rront-, in quick (miip : whf»n at tiie drstanre
Of ten paces, ho wlU halt: the colonel will cause arm, tx.
h. presented, and to tJ^e .olor to be played -^-.^'^-g ^ ;
c.uted,the color-bearer will take hi« place u. the froiU
rank >fthe color-guard, and the battalion by command
,viU shoulder arms. The escort, field mus^c --' -"^ ^^ .
return in quick time to their several places m tnc hue ot
battle, marching by the rear of the battalion.
66 The color will bo escorted back to the colonel s tc^.t
or quarters with like ceremony and in the same order.
rUNKRAL HONORS.
67 Th. funeral escort will be formed i:. two rank., op-
^oe te to the quartern or tent of the deceased, with shoul-
S eda-sand bayonets unfixed ; the artillery and cav-
a rvon the right of the infantry.- On the appearance ot
tt/corpse, the officer commanding the escort will com-
inand :
/^•e?-?Hf~ AuMS.
68 When the honors due to the deceased will be paid by
,vhen it will be halted. The commander will then oidci .
a.h.el n. March. 4. Jieverse-A^m. 5. Column,
fonmrd. C. GHide right. 7. March. ,
69. The column ^viU bemai;chedm_^lm^
-;i^;;.;ri;;dge of ^^^^^^^ 4^r:^f
black crape ^''""'^^^ *''';. ^^j "be worn when in full or
music, and on reacliin<( tlio o;ravo, will take a diiection so
ns that the g'uides shall be next to the grave. When the
centre of the column is opposite the grave, the coinuiander
will order :
1. Column. 2. Halt. 2. Right into line tvhecl. 4. Maiith.
70. The coffin is then brought along the front, to the
oppofiite side of the grave, and the coramandei- then or-
ders :
1. Shoulder. — AuMS. 2. Piebeut—Xv.\\\i.
71. And when the coflin reachen the grave, he adds :
3. Shoulder — Arm?. 4. Rent on — Arms.
72. After the funeral service is performed, and the
coffin is lowered into the grave, the commander will ordei :
1. Jittention. 2. Shoulder — Arm.«. 3. Load at will. A.
Load.
73. And cause three rounds of small arms to be fired by
the escort. He will then command :
1. P,tf company {or platoon) r'ujht-wh eel. 1. March. S,
Column forward. 4. Guide left. 5. Quick — March.
74. The music will not begin to play until the escort is
clear of the enclosui-e.
AMMUNITION.
Troops in the field should not only be supplied with a
sufficient quantity of ammunition, but the men of the
command should be taught how to prepare it. Cartridges
for small arms are made of paper in the following manner:
Having prepared the paper, which should be strong, but
not too thick, by cutting it first into strips eight and a
half inches wide, then cutting these strips crosswise to
smaller strips four and a half inches in width, and then
cutting these last diagonally, so that the pieces will be
three inches on one side and five and a half on the other ;
the pieces are then rolled on a small cylindrical stick of
the same diameter as the ball to be used, about six inches
long, having a spherical cavity at one end and rounded at
the other. The paper is laid on a table with the side per-
pendicular to the bases next the workman, the broad end
to the left; the stick laid on it with the concave end half
an inch from the broad edge of the paper, and enveloped
in it once. The right hand is then laid flat on the stick,
and all the paper rolled on it. The projecting end of the
paper is now neatly folded down into the concavity of the
stick, pasted, and pressed on a ball imbedded in the table
for the purpose.
Instead of being pasted, these cylinders maybe closed
by choking with a string, tied to the table, and having at
the other end a stick by which to hold it. The convex end
of the /ormcr is placed to the left, and after the paper is
rolled on, the former is taken in the left hand, and a turn
made around it with the choking string half an Inch from
the end of the papei'. Whilst the ■-'■fiing: is drawn tight
AMMUMIIOK. 29o
with the right hand, the former is held iu the left with
the forfinger resting on the end of the cylinder, folding it
neatly down upon the end of the former. The choke ib
then firmly tied with twine.
For ball cartridges, make the cylinders and choke thoui
as above described, and the choke tied without cutting the
twine. The former is then withdrawn, the ball put in, and
the concave end of the former put iu after it. The half
hitches are made a little above the ball, and twine cut off.
For ball and buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as
before, insert three buckshot, fasten them with a half hitch
and insert and secure the ball as before.
For buckshot cartridges, make the cylinder as before,
insert four tiers of three buckshot each, as at first, making
a half hitch between the tiers, and ending with a double
hitch.
To till the cartridges, the cylinders are placed upright
in a box, and the charge poured into each from a connical
charger of the appropriate size; the mouths of tlie cylin-
ders are now folded down oa the pov/der by two rectan-
gular folds, and the cartridges bundled in packages often.
For this a folding box is necessary ; it is made with two
yertical sides at a distance from each other equal to five
diameters of the ball, and two diameters high.
FORMS,
rtw or FUKT.orr.H. 2*»7
FopM No. 1.
FORM OF FURLOl GH.
FURLOUGHS TO ENLISTED MEN.
Furloughs will be grantod onh' by the ■commanding ofh-
cer of the post or the commanding' ofliccr of the regiment
actually quartered with it. Furloughs may be prohibited
At the discretion of the olticer in command.
Soldiers on furlough shall not take n-ith them their
arms or accoutrements.
Form of furlough :
TO ALL WHOM IT MAY COXCERX.
The bearer hereof, , a Sergeant [corpora],
or private, as the case may be] of Captain •
company — regiment of , aged — ■ years, — feet,
— inches higli, complexion, pyes,
hair, and by profession a ; born in the —
, and enlisted at , in the of —
the — day of eighteen hundre<:l and -
for the period of is hereby permitted to go to
in the county of State of he having
received a Furlough from the — day of , to the —
day of , at which period he will rejoin his company
or regiment at , or wherever it then may be, oV
be considered a deserter.
iSubsistence has been furnished to said
tlie — day of , and pay to the — day of
inclusive.
Uiven under my kand, at , this — day of
iiignature of the officer >
giving the furlough ) —
298
PIT AcenuvT.
a
«
Eh
O
O
o
o
i^
«3
s
«
<•*
>^
o
'C
f»H
^
.'
1
■^ 1
»-
c«
a
a;
tf
,
W'
-«^
o
o_
,
a
Q
j_^
xn
« •
-u
-1
c;)
id
a>
,
-
M
>%
t-'O
CJ
Q
M
r-^
riS
*
a o
-W
J5
S
in
JH
•^
, -. ,
a a ,
cy o I
8 '-^ o
<v) rt
H
o j:;
?, 'g.
_-
1
a
Stj
o
J5 a
u
O rt
flH
-i->
;h (U
a
.O o
0
«« .«
o
o
o
(m
"o
aJ
en
fS
to
rt:
r ^
a
I 2
,a
1 ^
V. f%
|s
p^
L =>
O I
a
^f^
fM I
1 o
Cs
N
PAT ACCUC-NI.
293
13
"a J'r,*" o^ e-:S ^ ^ ^ *:
« S S^ S: « S - I s
"■ be S
■a i) r:
±>S-.
O jj i>
bo a o
a S e <u
bt) c?, ^ .2 P -^ xi _ o be «
•° ^ o :S ^ ^ « -^ - = -^ ^
r; Ujs fe g --girt S g eti
. " t»l '-H J3 --v r- 1^ ri C ^
^ ^ i» .d o '^
— 0)
^
„ o *c; *^ 'S -^> B
« - :2 ^ x3 " =^ '
«»
e3 O C
e
o
S
300
SUBfilylAiViCK.
w
o
^
s
s
05
•S t^
O
<Si c
^
H
di
r//
l-H
5
M
fti
ca
a
1:3
^
.§^5^
7- O
ft5
no
w
M
o
■■n
H
->(
p5
•IIBS 1
•dtjog i
soipu«o 1
.icSoui^ 1
Mui^n^ 1
•^S^fOQ 1
•00 iH !
•su'Bog; 1
'jno]j[ 1
•iiaoj 1
jsaq -J^ 1
'SUOl^TJ.! 'OJy: 1
•SATjp JO -OX 1
•I^^OJL 1
•aaraoAV -o^vj |
'tiain JO -o^Nj I 1
(
1
o
■"<
H
o
(/)
I
i
o s
ir,
O
J**
m
I
«
N
pecitied are
circumstan-
tending to
3
an CJ
■?-2
1?,
1:1
•a 0
4; C.2
'^
!S "S ;:^
t-»
^C
■^ i
1 -^ o o
S
?i ^
i: ►-
fc. -s *->
^
"^ as
0 a
0 ar-
the a
the fol
ink fit
<
c;
m
'J
d
-<::
, 0
cs &•
:!5
a
0 a>
C n
<u
'. '■^
-^^••-i *■*
^ » g
; .Cn
^•.2 c
S"^'
t.- ' — '
0 ^ c
ed i7> a>
^,
— XI
13 correct,
ice, render,
easons as h
TJ
^
0
o
c
»— <
6J UV ^
• •«• cy) ^
'5
- a;
1 a^
1 -r. « s
'i*
U..5
-Ji i
*S -^ f '^ "i^ ii
> +J " .■G O ™
C . te -^^ CIS 0)
c9 •*; t- .0 .i *->
_ 4; 5»-. /J
5J i) o , ■•" S
-^^ •- •£ S'< •-'
b^ i,, 2 « fl p-
w-5 .. ^ »"o
w::;
• ^ Q,-
?^ ^•
-e s-
S !=l
d <^
4J ^
C5 -i->
"<
c 0
■SI
-»-> i)
0
./J _o
C4
0:1: u
-, ^ w
0 > t)
<p cS
1 fcfci,
.Ur 1>
.,; 0 p
tt
h:S">.
0 0 •-•
,*^
a «-•
APPENDIX.
1. The t'ollovTiDg^ movements are designed principallj
for the Hse of volunteer compaaies on public occasion8, for
parade and show, and when properly executed, greatly
enhance the looks of a corps of citizen soldiery.
2. In the execution of these movements, the company
»3 supposed to be in one rank, facing to the froat ; the cap-
tain then counts off the strength of the company from
right to left, and divides them into fowr eq^ual parte, termed
♦ ' RrcUobs."' To execute movement No. L, he will com-
mand :
1. Brtak into coltivm by sections. 2. By icctions righi
wheel. 3. March.
(/-%. 1.)
3. At the cemmand warch, the sectioiis-iirhc-Gt as is pre-
scribed in company drill for hreuking i»to cohapn hy jjla^
toon, being halted and dressed in the same manner, and
each officer and non-commissioned officer taking the po-
sition prescribed for thorn, that is, the captain takes com*
niand of the first section, the iirst lieutenant the fourth,
Ac, and the first sergeant acting as guide of the first sec-
tion, and the second of the fourth. At the command,
Forieard — Marcii, thcj will step off promptly.
{Fig. 2.)
i. To c-xecute Fig. 2., the company is supposetl to be
marching in the position of Fig. 1. ; ihe captain will give
the cautionary command. Subdivision of secHoni, at which
each chief of sections will, with his sword, divide his sec-
tions in two parts, and at the command : 1. Subdivision/i
of sections^ right and left ohlique, 2. March, each subdi-
vision will oblique two paces, the right going to the right
,ind the left subdivision to the left, and when at that dis-
tance the captain will command : 1. Fortpord, 2. March.
The captain may sometimes command : Offictrs, c«ntre,
when each chief will take his place in the interval formed
in the centre of his section.
ft. To cause the position of Fig. 1., to be resumed, the
tfomraand will be. I. Subdivisions af »e(^tons, right and I^C
304 AP{»EXDI.t.
oh^ijue to place, 2. MiRCH; at the ^'omnrand march, oarh
subdivision will oblique to Its pkce, and as soon sa the
connexion is mride they will Continue the march to the
front without farthef cotrimand.
( ^*V- 3 )
6. Fig;. 3. is formed by giving the command :
1. Subdivlsion.1 of Sections to rear. 2. Margk,
7. At the first command the guide of each section will
go immediatety to the right, if not already tbere, and iit
the command march, each left subdivision will mark time
until each right subdivision gets about 3 paces in front^
the left subdivisions will then oblique right until exactly
behind and in a line with their right aubdivisions when
the command will be given 1. Foi'irard. 2. ^aecip,
8. To cause a resumption of Fig. 1, the command will
feejl. Form sections. 2. Marc^, At thecoijjmand wsflo-cA,
APPKNDIX.
30.»
thft right subcHvi>'ion?i mark timo until the K^ft «hall have
obliqued left to their placo*?, when tlio commantl will l)e-
given, fo r ira /• d, m a v cJi^
9. To form Fig. 4, the canipAny is supposed marching:
to the front in position of Fig. 1. ; the captain will com-
mand : '
1. Form crosD. 2. Maucit.
10. At the first command the guide of each section will
place himself promptly on the right, and at the command
inarch, tha first section will come by the riffht Jlank,file
left, and mark time, forming the first wing of the cross:
the second section will march straight to the front and
form the left wing of the cross; the third will oblique to-
the right and connecting its left flank to the rearmost file
of the first section, will form the right wing; the fourth,
will come by the right fank, hyjile left, and the front mjin
of this section will connect Mmself with tlve rearmost man'
of the first, forming kbe fourth wing ; the wote move-
-"nt will be done »imuU:inpon?1v. nnd nr; soon as it \^
306
APfKXlHX.
ffxecuted the captain will cominan4, 1. Forward, 2. M^irch;
at which command the company will move off promptly.
{Fig. 5.)
- Colors,
11. The company marching in the position of Pig. 4.,
and the captain wishing it to execute the movemewt of
Fig. 6, will command :
1. Open order hy sections. 2. March.
12. At the command march, the fourth section will mark
time until the first has gotten to the distance of four pa-
ces to the front, at the same time the second and third
sections will oblique to the right each two paces, the cap-
tain will then command: 1, .For!i«7'(^, 2, March, when
tlie company will move cfF.
18. In both these movements the flag will take position in
the centre of the cross.
14. The captain wishing to change the movement, will
command : 1. Close ortfergy 2. March : at the second c?om-
tVFhSBlX.
30V
iiiaud the iiist »ot;tiou will mark tiuio and the utbei>? will
close on it, assuming the position of Fig. 4. The com-
mand will then be given :
1. Form column by tectiovi. 2. March.
)5. At the command march, the men of the first section
will form rapidly on the left of tfre front rank man in the
manner prescribsd in the movement, by platoon in line,
the front rank man (who is the first sergeant), marching-
straight to the front ; the second oection .continues to
march straight to the front at its proper distance ; the
third obliquing to its place in rear of the second and the
fourth, going through the movement prescribed for the
first ; the company will then be in the position of Fig. 1.
{Fig.%.)
lb": The company marching in the position of Fig. 1,
tlie captain wishing to cause it to assume the positiou of
Fig. 6, will command ;
1. Form square. 2. March.
17. At the command mirch, the first and fourth eoctions
will majrk time, the sQCond will come6j/ ths right fiank, by
;](jg APfENWlX.
nie lepy and iurm the right side of the cro^s, the third will
come hi, the left flank, file right, and form the left wing ot
the cro'ss ; as soon as executed the captain will command :
1. i'bnrarrf, 2. MAKCH,at which command the company
will step ofi".
18. To execute this movement well, it is exceedingly
necessary that it be done all together ; the captain should
dwell sometime between the command of caution and that
ofcreoMh-oH, to enable the men to think how the move-
ment is to be executed.
19. The captain may add to this command by halting,'
the company, and putting them through the diflerent fir-
ings, to do this hr/will command :
1. Compcouj. 2. Halt.
20. At the second command the company will halt
promptly, dosing up any interval that may have been
made ; the captain will then command : Outward face,
at which the 2nd, 3rd and 4th sections will face outwards,
they will then be put through the firings as the captain
may see proper ; when he wishes them to march forward
acrain he will cause them to ceasefirinrj, and command :-
1? To first position. 2. Face. At this command they
^villface promptly to their places.
21. To cause them to resume tlieir posJtioa <jf Fig. 1,
the captain will command :
1. Form sec'ioue. 2. March.
22. At the command marck, the first section will con-
liime to marth titraight forward, the second section, which
is the right side of uf the square, will form promptly ou it?
.irrEN-rtiA. 309
right guide and follow in the rear of the first; the third
Avill form in like luanner, and the fourth will march
straight forward; but marking time a little at first, to
allow the second and third to finish the execution of theiv
movement.
(/',V. 7.)
23. The compinn' uiarchinsf in the position of Fig. 1,
and the captain wishing it to assume the position of Fig. 7,
he will command :
1. Echelon hi/ sections to the right. 2. Mauoh.
24. At the command march, the first section will con-
tinue to march straight forward, the 2nd, 3i'd and 4th,
will commence obliquing to the right, and as soon as the
left fde of the second section is in a line with the right file
of the first, the chief of the section will command: For-
ward March ; as soon as the left file of the third has got-
ten in line with the right file of the second, the same com-
mand will be given; the same thing is applicable to the
fourth section.
25. This movement may bo varied by commanding
Echelon, to the left — Jfarch, which will be done in the
v^amc manner, except in this case the sections oblique to
the left.
2t). To caipse the position of Fig. 1, tu be resttined, the
captain will command :
1. Form eolumn. 2. MAucn..
27. At the command march, the sections will oblique to
their places, keeping the regular distances from each other.
\Fig.b.)
28. Thexompany marching in the powtiou of Fig. 1,
and the captain wishing it to assuume that of Fig. 8, will
command :
1. Echelon hy sections^ right andhift. 2. March.
29. At the command march, the first section marches
straight forward ; the second obliques right until it gets
into the position as indicated in Fig. 7. ; the third obliques
left in the same manner, the fourth continuing to march
forward. The second and third must be exactly opposite
each other.
30. To cause the position of Fig. 1 to be resumed, the
command will be : 1. Form coZK??i?i. — 2. March, at which
the sections oblique to their proper places.
APPENDIX. 311
{Fig. 9...
31. To assume the position of Fig. 9, the company is
supposed to be marching in the position of Fig. 3, when
the captain will command :
1. Echelon by subdtvition »/ tectione to the right {or l^t)
2. March.
32. At the command march, each subdivision will oblique
right (or left) as has been indicated in No. 24, Fig. 7,
except that as soon as the left flank man of each subdivis-
ion is in line and covers the right flank man of the preced-
ing section, they will forward without further command.
33. To resume the position of Fig. 3, the captain will
command :
1. Forvi column hy subdivision of sections. 2. March.
34. At the command march, each subdivision will oblique
to its prcper place, keeping the required distance from
each other.
3-1'
IPPENDTT.
{F!g. 10.)
35. The company being in march, in the position of FI<j.
?>, and the captain wisliing it to assume the position of Fig.
10, will command :
1 . Echelon hy stihdirision of sections to front and rear. 2,
March.
36. At the command march, the first subdivision will
continue to march forward, the 2nd and 3rd will oblique
to the right and left, and place themselves opposite each
other, the 4th and 5th execute the same movement ; the
Cth and 7th oblique right and left until they get opposite
each other and in an exact line with the 2nd and 3rd ; the
8th continues to march forward, and the whole keeping
the proper interval between them.
37. To resume the position of Fig. 3, the captain will
command:
1. Form eohimn hy snhdivision of secfioii. 2. March.
38. At the command march, the subdivisions will obliqua
right and left until they get in <ht»ir proptM- position?.
APPU.NDIX.
{Fig. 11.)
31:
39. The coim>anv uiarching in the position o( Fig. 10,
and the captain wishing it to assume that of Fig. 11, will
com ui and :
1. Subdivisiom of section. 2. By the right jlank,Jile lej'i.
3. March.
40. At the command march, each subdivision will
promptly and simultaneously execute the movement of
flanking to the right and filing to the left.
41. To resume the position of Fig. 10, the captain will
command : Subdivisions of sections , file right — 3Iarch, and
,as soon as they shall have filed, he will command:
\. By tUUftJkmk. 2. March.
>li APPBNUIa.
{Fiy.Vl.)
41. To execute the movement of Fig. 12, the company
is supiioscd to be marching in the position of Fig. 3, when
the captain will command :
1. Echelon hy subdivisions of sectione^ right and left. 2.
Marck.
42. At the command march, the first subdivision of sec-
tion continues to march forward, the second obliques right,
the third left, the fourth right, the fifth left, and so on
forming the movement as indicated in Fig. 12.
43. The captain wishing them to assume the position
of Fig. 3, will command:
•1. Form column by subdivision of sections. 2. March.
44. At the command march, each subdivision will ob.
liqae right and left to its proper place, taking care not to
loae the distance between them.
.tPPFN»IX; 31i)
{f;s. 15.)
45. In the execution of Tig. 13, the company should be
marching in one rank, (single file), and when the captain
shall wish to cause the movement to be executed, he will
command :
1. Echelon Jjy Jilt right and left. 2. March.
46. At the command march, the first sergeant continues
to march forward, the man next in his rear will oblique to
the right until his left shoulder is in a line and thirteen
inches in rear of the sergeant's right shoulder ; thus the
movement will continue alternately from right to left,
each man obliqueing in the Ojiposite direction from the
one in front of him. In the execution of this movement
the first sergeant will shorten his steps to enable the men
to execute it without confusion. Should the company be
a large ontv t r r>venit>nt hnd better be done in double
ijuick timi*.
210 A.PPKNPfX.
47. The onptain may var3M,his movement 'by command-
ing: Jiic/lit uhont—March, when in thd position of Fig. 13.
He may also put the company throiigh the different firings
in this position.
48. The captain may vary these movements ao he sees
proper.
49. He may also greatly add to the appearance of the
company when marching by section, to give the caution-
ary command, subdivision a of necfiotit, right and left wheel-,
and then command :
1. First section, right and left wheel. 2. M.vp.CU,
at which command, each subdivision of section will begin
wheeling, the right subdivision wheeling right and (he left
wheeling Uft, they will continue the wheel and go to the
rear, passing to the right and left of the other three sec-
tions, who continue to march straight to the front ; as
soon as it has an ived to the rear, its chief will command :
1. Firist section right and left wheel — March ; both subdi-
Tisions will wheel at the same time and form the section
again, which will march on after the other three ; the se-
cond will go through the same movement and by the same
commands from its chief, as soon as it has arrived at sec-
tion distance in front of the ground where the first section
wheeled; the thiid and fourth will execute the same move-
ment, thus keeping up a succession of wheels as the column
moves on. i
50. In the execution of Figures 4, 5, fi. 8, 10 and 11, the-
color-bearer takes his place in the ccntii.'.
AdTUTAM ami iNSPECTOC-ORNKRAf/s OFirCE,
Richmond, Va., June fi, 11^61,
General Orders. Xo. 9.]
UNIFORM AND DRESS OF THE ARMY.
T t: X 1 c .
For Cnmmissionrd OJfirers.
1. All officers shall woar a tunic of ifray cloth, known as
cadet gray ; the skirt to extend half-way between the hip
antl the knee; double breasted for all grades.
2. For a Brigadier-General — Two rows of buttons on the
breast, eight in each row, placed in pairs ; the distance
between the rows four inches at top and three inches at
bottom; stand up collar, to rise no higher than to per-
mit the chin to turn freely over it ; to hook in front at the
bottom, and slope thence up and backward, at an angle of
thirty degrees, on each side; cuffs two and a half inches
deep on the undtr side, there to be bul toned with three
small buttons, and sloped upAvards to a point, at a di.i-
tance of four inches from the end of the sleeves ; pockets
in I li<e fuUls of thi^ skirt, wilh en.' bnttnn at tli • hip .inJ
318 SNIPOWX? JkNB DRESS.
one at the entl of each pocket, making four buttoRiss on th«
back and skirt of the tunic, the hip buttons to range with
the lowest breast buttons.
3. For a Colonel — the same as for a Brigadier-General,
except that there will be only seven buttons in each row
on the breast, placed at equal distances.
4. For a Lieutenant- Colonel, Major, Captain and Lieu-
tenant— the same as for a Colonel.
For Enlisted Men.
5. The uniform coat for enlisted men shall be a double
breasted tunic of gray cloth, known as cadet gray, with
the skirt excnding half-way between the hip and the knee ;
two rows of buttons on the breast, seven in each row ; the
distance between the rows four inches at top and three inch-
es at bottom : stand-up collar, to rise no higher than to
permit the chin to turn freely over it ; to hook in front at
the bottom, and slope thence backwards at an angle of
thirty degrees on each side ; cufis too and a half inches
deep at the under seam, to button with two small buttons,
and to be slightly pointed on the upper part of the arm ;
pockets in the folds of the skirts. The collars and cuffs te
be of the color prescribed for facings for the respective
arms of service, and the edges of the tunic to be trimmed
throughout with the same colored cloth. Narrow lining
in the skirts of the tunic of gray material.
Facinc/s.
6. The facings for General Officers, and for Officers of
the Adjutant-General's Department, the Quartermaster-
General's Department, the Commissary-General's Depart-
IMVORM ANb Dl!i;S>. 31$
oieut, and the Engineers — buff. The tuuic lor all oflicers
to be edged throughout with the fasciugs designated.
7. For the Medical department — black.
8. For the Artillery — red.
•K For the Cavalry — yellow.
10. For the Infantry — light blue.
11. For fatigue purposes, a light gray blouac, doubled
breasted, with two rows of small button?*, seven in each
row ; small turn over collar — may be issued to the troops.
12. On all occasions of duty, except fatigue, and when
out of quarters, the coat will be buttoned and hooked at
the collar. Officers on bureau duty m:iy w*ar the tunic
open.
Buttons.
13. For General Officers and Officers of the Genera!
Staff — bright guilt, rounded at the edge, convex, raised
eagle in the centre, with stars surrounding it ; large sizc»
one inch in exterior diameter ; small size, half an incb.
14. For Officers of the Corps of Engineers, the same a«
f©r the General Staff, except that, in place of the eagle
and stars, there will be a raised E in German text.
15. For Officers of Artillery, Infantry, Riflemen, and
Cavalry — guilt, convex, plain, with] large raised letter in
the centre : A, for Artillery ; I, for Infantrj' ; R, for the
Riflemen ; C, for the Cavalry ; large size, seven- eights of
an inch in exterior diameter; small size half an inch.
16. Aids-de-Camp may wear the button of the General
Staff, or of their regiments or corps, at their.option.
17. For enlisted men of Artillery— yellow, convex, large
raised letter A in the centre ; three-quartcrd of an infth in
exteriof diameter.
•18. For all otiiet" enlisted meii; the saijio as lor the Ar-
tillery, except that tlie numTber of the re<;iment, in large
rdgurcs, wiU'oe fubtsitiited for the letter A.
Troiosers,
19. The uniform trowsers for both offi(;prs and enlisted
men will be of cloth throughout the year ; made loose, and
to spread well over the foot; oflij^ht (or sk}') blue color,
for regimental officers and enlisted men ; and of dark blue
clcth for all other officers ; reinforced for the cavalry.
20. For General Offiers — two stripes of gold lace on the
outer seam, one-eighth of an inch apart, and each five-
eighths of an inch in width.
21. For Officers of the Adjutant-Generars Department,-
the Quartermaster-General's Department, the Commissary
General's Department, and the Corps of Engineers — one
stripe of gold lace on the outer seam, an inch and a
quarter in width.
22. For the Medical Department— a black telvet stripe;
one inch and a quarter in width, ;\ ith a gold cord on
each edge of the stripe.
23. For Regimental Officers— a stripe of cloth on the
outer seam, one inch and a quarter in width; color accord-
ing to corps ; for Artillery, red ; Cavalry, yellow ; Infan-
try, dark blue.
24. For the non-eommissioned staff of reti:iments and for
all sergeants, a stripe of cotton webbing or braid on the
outer seam, one and a quarter inch in width: color ac-
cording to arm of service.
23. For all othor enlisted men — plain.
CMirtRM AND DRESS. 321
Chapeau, or Cocked Hat.
26. A chapeau, or cocked hat, will be worn bv General
officers and officers of the General Staff and Corps of En-
gineers, of what is called the French patern ; the model
to be deposited in the office of the Qaartermaster-General.
27. Forage cap for officers — a cap similar in form to
that known as the French kepi, according to pattern to
be deposited in the office of the Quartermaster-General.
28. Uniform cap— according to pattern to bo deposited
in the office of the Quartermaster-General,
Pompon.
29. For the Artillery— red.
30. For the Infantry— light blue.
31. For the Caralry — yellow.
Cravat or Stock.
32. For all offieers--black. When a cravat is worn,
the tie not to be risible at the opening of the collar.
33. For enlisted men— black leather, according to pat-
tern.
Boots.
34. For all officers— ankle or Jeff*erson.
35. For enlisted men of Cavalry— ankle and JeSersoDi
according to pattern.
36. For other enlisted men— Jefferson, according to
pattern.
Spurs.
37. For all mounted officeri— yellow mt tal or guilt.
322 uirir«»M akd bress.
38. For enlisted mounted men— yellow metal, according
to pattern.
Gloves.
39. For (JenerJil Officers, and officers of the General
Stiff Corps— buffer white.
40. For officers of Artillery, Infantry and Caralry—
White.
tSush.
41. For General OfiScers — buff silk net, with silk bul<
lion fringe ends j sash to go twice round the waist, and to
tie behind the left hip ; pendent part not to extend more
than eighteen inches below th© tie.
42. For officers of the General Staff and Engineers, and
of the Artillery and Infantry --red silk net. For officers
of the Cavalry — yellow silk net. For medical officers —
green silk net. All, with silk bullion fringe ends j to go
around the waist, and to tie as for General Officers.
43. For sergeants — of worsted, with worsted bullion
fringe ends ; red for Artillery and Infantry, and yellow
for Cavalry. To go twice around the waist, and to tie a
above specified.
Sword Belt,
44. For all officers— a waist belt, not less than one aid one-
half inches, not more than two inches widej to be worn
over the sash 5 the sword to be suspended from it by slings
of the same material as the belt, with a hook attached to
the belt upon which the sword may be hung.
45. For General Officers — Russian leather, with three
stripes of gold embroidery ] th« slings embroidered on
both sides, ., .c ;
UKIFORM AND DftaSj. Zl^
46. For k\\ other officers— black leather, plain.
47. For all non-coiiiinissioned officers— black leather,
plain.
Sword Belt Plate.
43. For all officers and enlisted men — gilt, rectangular;
two inches wide, with a raised bright rim ; a silver wreath
of laurel encircling the "arnta of the Confederate States."
Sword and Srabfmrd.
40. For all officers — according to patterns to be depesi-
ted in the Ordinance Bureau.
Sword Knot.
80. For all officers— of plaited leather, with tassels.
Badges to distingmsh RanJc.
51. On the sleeve of the tunic, rank will be distinguidhed
by an ornament of gold braid, (in form as represented in
the drawing deposited in the Quartermaster-General's
office,) extending around the seam of the cufi", and up the
outside of the arm to the bend of the elbow. To be of one
braid for lieutenants j two, for captains ; three for field
officers; and four, for general officers. The braid to be
one-eighth of an in«h in width.
52. On the front part of the collar of the tunic, the rank
of the officer will be distinguished, as follows :
53. General Officers — A wreath with three stars en-
closed, embroidered in gold. The edge of the wreath to
be three-fourths of an inch from the front edge ot the col-
lar ; the stars to be arranged horizontally ; the centre «n9
t© be one and one-fourth inches in exterior diameter, and
the others tlMT^e- fourths of an inch.
:324 UNIFORM AND SRISt.
54. Colonel — Three stars, embroidered in gold, arranged
horizontally, and dividing equally the rertical spac* of
the collar. Each star to be one and one-fourth inches in
exterior diameter ; the front star to be three-fourths of an
inch from the edge of the collar.
55. Lieutenant- Colonel — Two stars of same material,
size and arrangement, as for a colonel.
56. Ilajor — One star, of same material and size as for a
colonel ; to be placed three-fourths of an inch from edge
of collar, and dividing equally the vertical space.
57. Captain — Three horizontal bars, embroidered in
gold; each one- half inch in width; the upper bar to be
three inches in length ; the front edge of the bars to in-
cline to correspond with the angle of the collar, and to be
three-fourths of an inch from the edge ; the line of th«
back edges to b« vertical.
T8. First-Lieutenant — Two horizontal bars of the same
material and size as for captains, and dividing equally th«
vertical space of collar.
59. Second-Lieutenant — One horizontal bar of the same
material and size as for the centre bar of captain, and
dividing equally the vertical space of collar.
Overcoats for enlisted Men.
(50. For mounted men— of cadet gray cloth ; stand-up
collar ; double breasted; caepe to reach to the cuff of the
coat, when the arm is extended, and to button all the way
(sp, (buttons, eighteen.)
61. For footman— of cadet gray cloth ; stand-up collar;
double breasted ; cape to reach to the elbows, when the
arm is extended, and to button all the way up, (buttons,
trMIPOBM 1V» BRISS. 32{>
eighteen.) For the present to be a talma, with sleeves,
of water-proof material; black.
Chevrons.
62. The rank of non-commissioned officers will t>e mark-
ed by chevrons on both sleeves of the uniform tunic and
the overcoat, above the elbow, of silk or worsted binding,
half an inch wide; color the same as the edging of the
tunic ; points down, as follows :
C3. For a Sergeant -Major — three bars and an arc in ailk.
G4. For a Qaartermasttr- Sergeant — three bars and a tie
in silk
65. For an Ordnance-Sergeant — three bars and a star in
silk.
60. For a First (or Orderly) Sergeant — three bars and
a lozenge in worsted.
67. For a Sergeant — three bars in worsted.
68. For a Corporal — two bars in worsted.
Hair and Beard.
69. The hair to be short: the beard to be worn at the
pleasure of the individual ; but, when worn, to be kept
short and neatly trimmed.
By Command of thb Secretary of War :
S. COOPER,
Adjutant and Impector-General.
TABLE OF CONTENTS.
TAGS,
Introduction - **
PART FIRST.
Position of the Soldier ^
,, . J
f acing?
The Direct Step ♦♦ "•'". *
The Quitk Step •• **'
The Doable Quick Step ^
The Run '^
Alignments • ^
To March to the Front ^
To Mark Time ^*
To Change Step • •••• ^^.
To March by the Flank • 13
Wheelings ^^
Wheeling from a Halt, or on a Fixed Pivot 1*
Wheeling in Marching or on a Moveable Pivot 18
Turning ..•— ^^
Manual of Arms for Heavy Infantry 20
Principles of Shoulder Arms • •• ?l>
Position of Order Arms - 23
To Ground Arms ^^
;inspectioA of j^rms ....^ • •••••• • ^^
II TABLB or CONTEHTS.
Loading and Firisg 38
Load in Four Times 41
Load at Will 42
The Firings 45
The Oblique Fire 46
Position of Banks in the Oblique Fire to Right 46
" " " " <' " " Left 47
To Fire bv File 47
To Fire by Flank 48
PART SECOND.~THE COMPANY.
Foi-mation of Company 64
To Open Banlca 66
Alignment in Open Ranks 67
Manual of Arms 67
To Fire by Rear Rank 69
ToAdrancein Line of Battle 70
To March in Retreat 71
Oblique March in Line of Battle 72
To March by Flank 73
To Change Direction by File 75
Movements in Column 78
Post of Officers in Column 83
To March in Column 84
To Change Direction 85
To Halt the Column, and to form to the right (or left)
into line either at a Halt or on the March 87
To Break the Company into Platoons 91
To Re-form the Company 92
Being in Column, to Break Files to the Rear, tud to
TABLE OF CONTENTS. lU
PAGB.
cause them to Re-enter into Line 93
The Columa in Route 95
Countermarch 98
Formation of Company from Two Ranks into Single
Rank, and Reciprocally 103
Formation of a Company from Two Ranks into Four,
and Reciprocally, at a Halt and in March 103
PART THIRD.
Manual of Arm« for Riflemen or Light Infantry 107
The Position of Order Arms 110
To Stack Arms 123
To Resume Arms 124
Formation of a Regiment in Line of Battle or in Line 124
Position of Field Officers and Regimental Staff 12fi
Posts of Field Music and Band 127
Color Guard 127
General Guides ;. 12S
PART FOURTH.
Instruction for Skirmishers 12?
Deployments 132
Bayonet Exercise 169
PosUion of the Guard 170
Develop aud Volts ". 171
Develop 172
Combinations of the Movements 174
Parries and Thrusts 176
Guard agaiust lufantrv , 170
)v » table of contehtb.
?aob;
Guard against Cavalry 180
Manual of Sword or Sabre for Officers 182
Manual for Relieving Sentinels 183
Color Salute 182
Instruction for Chief Bugler 184
General Calls 185
Callifor Skirmishers 180
PART FIFTH.-FIELD FORTIFICATION,
Nomenclature and General Principles of Field Fortifi-
cation 187
Manner of Throwing up a Work 193
Distribution of the Working Party 15^4
Revetmentt « 196
Obstacles 201
Inundations 205
Mines .., 207
The Outlines of Field Works 208
Powder Magazines 216
Lines 223
Lines with Intervals or Broken Lines 22G
Defence of Field Works 227
Loopholing Walls 230
Fortifying Houses 231
Intrenching a Village 235
Attack on Field Works 236
Attacking Houses 238
** Barricades 23^5
TABLE OF CONTEXTS. T
PAHT SIXTH.— OUTPOST AND PICKET DUTY.
Plus.
Instructions for Picket Dutj 240
AdTaHced Posts 24a
Out Posts 246
Sentinels , 247
Graod Guards 247
Pickets 248
Strength of the Advance Posts 249
Duties of Officer Commanding^ Out Posts 251
Advanced Guards 254
Reconnoissances 255
Duties of Reconnoitering Officer 25G
Guides 259
Reconnoissance 262
Armed Reconnoissance 202
Patrols 23.3
Duties of Officer in Command of Patrol 205
SURPRISES AND AMBUSCADES.
Surprise 268
Ambuscade 271
REGULATIONS AS TO INSPECTIONS, PARADE, Ac.
Form of Inspection 272
Forms of Parade 275
Dress Parade 275
Review 279
(ruard Mounting 283
Guides aad ^Sentinels 287
VI TABLE OF C0KTBNT3.
PAOH.
Challenging 288
Grand Rounds 28&
Escort of Honor : 290
Color Escort : 291
Funeral Honors 292
AMMUNITION.
Preparation of Ammunition 294
FORMS.
Form of Furloug-h 29T
Officers* Pay Account 298
Subsistence Form 300
Requisition Form ". 301
APPENDIX.
The Mo'/ements of Volunteer Corps for Public Occa-
casions 302— 81G
UNIFORM AND DRESS OF THE ARMY.
For Comoiissioned Officers, &c 317—324
ERRATA.
By neglect of the Proof-reader several mistakes have
occurred in numbering (he pages of the foregoing work.
The errors, however, are confined to the figures on the up-
per corners of the pages. The text is in its proper order
and the whole number of pages contained in the work is
correctly given in the concluding pages. In ether ree-
pects it is believed the work ii generally accurate.
Live Music
Archive
Librivox
Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland
Museum of Art
Internet
Arcade
Console Living Room
Open Library
American
Libraries
TV News
Understanding
9/11